Hammond SKX PRO Professional Double-manual Stage Keyboard Owner's Manual

STAGE KEYBOARD
Model: SKX PRO
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Hammond
SKX PRO Stage Keyboard.
The Hammond SKX PRO features authentic Hammond Organ Sound
along with high-quality Piano, Ensemble and Mono Synth sections to
make it the perfect instrument for all musical occasions. Two 61-note
keyboards are provided.
Please take the time to read this Manual completely in order to take full
advantage of the many features of your SKX PRO, and please retain it for
future reference.
Owner’s Manual
2
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these instructions.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Keep these instructions.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold
with the apparatus. When cart is used: use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.
The wider blade or third prong is provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit
from the apparatus.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms,
or when unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as
power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed
to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose
this apparatus to rain or moisture.
ATTENTION: Pour réduire les risques de choc électrique ou
d’incendie, ne pas exposer cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.
-THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
-The socket-outlet shall be installed near the apparatus and shall be easily accessible.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle, indicates that dangerous voltage constituting a risk of electric
shock is present within this unit.
The exclamation point within equilateral triangle, indicates that there
are important operating and maintenance instructions in the literature accompanying this unit.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
3
For the USA
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital unit, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For CANADA
This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
For EU countries
In case in the future your instrument gets too old to play/use or malfunctions beyond repair, please observe the
instructions of this mark, or, if any question, be sure to contact your dealer or your nearest town or municipal
office for its proper disposal.
For UNITED KINGDOM
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY
This appliance is supplied with a molded 3-pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.
The plug contains a 13 amp fuse.
Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it is
approved by ASTA or BSI to BSI1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If the fuse cover is lost, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local Hammond Dealer.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME,
THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT-OFF PLUG IS INSERTED
INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.
To replace the fuse, open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover.
Introduction
4
IMPORTANT - PLEASE READ
Power Supply
1. Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric
motor or variable lighting system).
2. Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/
or damage to speakers or other devices.
3. This unit features an Auto Power Off function that
automatically turns the power off if the unit is not operated
for a specified period of time. The setting will revert to its
default value if not backed up before the power is turned
off.
Placement
1. Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or
move it farther away from the source of interference.
2. This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
3. Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices,
such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit.
Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call,
or while conversing. Should you experience such problems,
you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a
greater distance from this unit, or switch them off.
4. Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle,
or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Also, do
not allow lighting devices that normally are used while
their light source is very close to the unit (such as a piano
light), or powerful spotlights to shine upon the same area
of the unit for extended periods of time. Excessive heat can
deform or discolor the unit.
5. When moved from one location to another where the
temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.
6. Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain
on the unit for long periods of time. Such objects can
discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish.
7. Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument.
Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the
exterior finish.
Maintenance
8. To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is slightly
dampened.
9. To remove stubborn dirt off plastic parts, use a cloth
impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent.
Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a
soft, dry cloth. Try to wipe the entire surface using an
equal amount of strength, moving the cloth along with the
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
grain of the wood. Rubbing too hard in the same area can
damage the finish.
10. Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
Additional Precautions
1. Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the risk of losing important data, we recommend that you
periodically save a backup copy of important data you have
stored in the unit’s memory in USB Flash Drive.
2. Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
of data that was stored in another MIDI device (e.g., a
sequencer) once it has been lost. Hammond assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
3. Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
4. When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself - never pull on the cable. This will avoid
causing short circuits, or damage to the cable’s internal
elements.
5. To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the
unit's volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
6. When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
TRADEMARK
All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
5
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
6
Table Of Contents
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ..................................... 2
IMPORTANT - PLEASE READ ...................................................... 4
INTRODUCTION ....................................... 5
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ........................................................10
TOP PANEL .............................................................................................................10
LEFT SIDE OF THE KEYBOARD .........................................................................12
REAR PANEL ...........................................................................................................12
KEYBOARD .............................................................................................................14
ACCESSORY ...........................................................................................................14
ACCESSORIES (SOLD SEPARATELY)................................................................14
MAKING THE CONNECTIONS ................ 15
BASIC CONNECTIONS ...............................................................16
CONNECTING A LESLIE SPEAKER ..........................................17
BASIC CONNECTION ...........................................................................................17
3-CHANNEL TYPE (2101/mk2) ........................................................................17
SINGLE-CHANNEL TYPE (122XB, 981 or 3300/W) ....................................17
OTHER AUDIO CONNECTIONS ...............................................18
OUTPUT DRY ORGAN SOUNDS ......................................................................18
ROTARY OUT jack.................................................................................................18
ORGAN PEDAL OUT jack ...................................................................................18
USING AN EXTERNAL MIXER............................................................................19
INDIVIDUAL OUT jacks .......................................................................................19
USING A MUSIC PLAYER ....................................................................................19
AUX IN jack ...........................................................................................................19
EXPANDING THE KEYBOARD ..................................................20
RECOMMENDED MIDI PEDALBOARDS ........................................................20
CONNECTING THE CU-1 LESLIE SWITCH.............................21
TURN ON AND PLAY............................... 23
POWERING ON.............................................................................24
HOW TO POWER ON ...........................................................................................24
BACKING UP THE INITIAL SETTINGS..............................................................24
AUTO POWER OFF ...............................................................................................24
RESTORING THE FACTORY SETTINGS ...........................................................24
OPERATION PROCEDURE ..................................................................................24
STRUCTURE OF THE SKX PRO .................................................25
SECTIONS ...............................................................................................................25
KEYBOARDS AND PARTS ...................................................................................25
KEYBOARDS ...........................................................................................................25
PARTS .......................................................................................................................25
MEMORY .................................................................................................................25
PATCHES ..................................................................................................................25
FACTORY, USER and BUNDLE ..........................................................................25
COMBINATIONS....................................................................................................25
FAVORITES ..............................................................................................................25
USING COMBINATIONS.............................................................26
WHAT IS A “COMBINATION?”............................................................................26
SELECT A COMBINATION ..................................................................................26
FOOT SWITCH .......................................................................................................28
DAMPER PEDAL....................................................................................................28
LESLIE SWITCH ......................................................................................................28
MANUAL ........................................................................................29
What is “MANUAL”? .............................................................................................29
INITIALIZE “MANUAL”..........................................................................................29
USING ORGAN PATCHES...........................................................30
ALLOCATING A SECTION TO A KEYBOARD .................................................30
RECALLING A PATCH ...........................................................................................30
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME .................................................................................31
CHANGING THE OCTAVE ...................................................................................31
CREATING AN ORGAN PATCH .................................................32
SELECT [MANUAL] ...............................................................................................32
INITIALIZE “MANUAL”..........................................................................................32
ALLOCATE THE SECTION TO A KEYBOARD .................................................32
USING THE ORGAN SOLO BUTTON ...............................................................32
SELECT THE ORGAN TYPE .................................................................................32
ADD DRAWBARS ..................................................................................................33
ADJUST THE VOLUME.........................................................................................33
CHANGING THE OCTAVE ...................................................................................33
ADDING PERCUSSION ........................................................................................34
ADDING EFFECTS TO THE ORGAN SECTION ..............................................34
VIBRATO & CHORUS ............................................................................................34
LESLIE.......................................................................................................................35
OVERDRIVE ............................................................................................................35
OTHER EFFECTS....................................................................................................35
ORGAN SECTION IN DETAIL ....................................................36
KEYBOARDS AND PARTS ...................................................................................36
ORGAN TYPES .......................................................................................................36
TONE WHEEL (A-100, B-3, C-3) ........................................................................36
MELLOW .................................................................................................................36
TRANSISTOR (Vx, Farf, Ace) ..............................................................................36
PIPE ...........................................................................................................................37
HARMONIC DRAWBARS™ ........................................................38
DRAWBARS (A-100, B-3, C-3, Mellow)...........................................................38
DRAWBARS FOR THE UPPER AND LOWER PARTS.....................................39
PEDAL DRAWBARS ..............................................................................................39
DRAWBAR REGISTRATION PATTERNS ...........................................................40
Diapason family (check mark pattern) ........................................................40
MODERN DRAWBAR REGISTRATIONS ..........................................................41
DRAWBARS (Vx) ...................................................................................................42
DRAWBARS (Farf, Ace)........................................................................................43
Farf ............................................................................................................................43
Ace ............................................................................................................................43
DRAWBARS (Pipe) ................................................................................................44
F1: Classic ...............................................................................................................44
F2: Theatre 1 ..........................................................................................................44
F3: Theatre 2 ..........................................................................................................44
ORGAN SECTION OPERATION ................................................45
MATCHING THE REGISTRATION TO THE DRAWBAR SETTING ...............45
SHOWING CURRENT SETTINGS ......................................................................45
USING PIANO AND ENSEMBLE PATCHES ............................46
FAVORITES-FREQUENTLY USED COMBINATIONS ............27
ALLOCATING THE SECTION TO THE KEYBOARD........................................46
RECALLING A PATCH ...........................................................................................46
WHAT IS A “FAVORITE?”......................................................................................27
BANK AND NUMBER ...........................................................................................27
LINKING A COMBINATION TO A FAVORITE..................................................27
RECALLING A COMBINATION USING A [FAVORITE] BUTTON ...............27
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME .................................................................................47
ADJUST THE VELOCITY SENSITIVITY .............................................................47
CHANGING THE OCTAVE ...................................................................................47
USING CONTROLLERS ...............................................................28
USING MONO SYNTH PATCHES .............................................48
ON-BOARD CONTROLLERS ..............................................................................28
EXPRESSION PEDAL ............................................................................................28
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
USING THE “OTHER” PATCH Category ...........................................................46
ALLOCATING THE SECTION TO THE KEYBOARD........................................48
RECALLING A PATCH ...........................................................................................48
7
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME .................................................................................49
CHANGING THE OCTAVE ...................................................................................49
CREATING A MONO SYNTH PATCH .......................................50
SELECT [MANUAL] ...............................................................................................50
ALLOCATE THE SECTION TO THE KEYBOARD.............................................50
LOCATE THE MONO SYNTH CONTROLS ......................................................50
ADJUST THE VOLUME.........................................................................................50
CHANGING THE OCTAVE ...................................................................................50
INITIALIZE “MANUAL”..........................................................................................50
SELECT AN OSCILLATOR....................................................................................51
SLIDE THE PITCH (PORTAMENTO) ..................................................................51
ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS (FILTER) ................................................................51
CHANGING THE SOUND OVER TIME (ENVELOPE) ....................................51
ADDING PERIODIC CHANGING (LFO) ...........................................................51
SELECT THE WAVEFORM (OSCILLATOR TYPE) ............................................51
ADJUST THE WAVEFORM (MODIFY)..............................................................51
ADDING EFFECTS ................................................................................................52
SHOWING CURRENT SETTINGS ......................................................................52
WHAT IS AN “OSCILLATOR?”.............................................................................52
OSCILLATOR TYPES AND CHARACTERISTICS .............................................53
Duo ...........................................................................................................................53
Unison .....................................................................................................................53
Pulse .........................................................................................................................53
Sync ..........................................................................................................................53
FM .............................................................................................................................53
Noise ........................................................................................................................53
COMBINING THE SECTIONS AND PARTS ............................54
PATCH ......................................................................................................................67
CUSTOM..................................................................................................................67
SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................67
FILE ...........................................................................................................................67
FUNCTION MODE .......................................................................68
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY ............................................................................68
OPERATION IN THIS MODE ...............................................................................68
APP (APPLICATION) MENU ...............................................................................68
EXAMPLE OF OPERATION .................................................................................69
“SHORTCUTS” ...............................................................................71
IF YOU FREQUENTLY USE A CERTAIN PAGE... ....................71
REGISTER ................................................................................................................71
DISPLAY THE RECORDED PAGE .......................................................................71
LOCKING THE DISPLAY..............................................................72
EDITING PARAMETERS .......................... 73
COMBINATION .............................................................................74
EDITING PAGES AND PARAMETERS ...............................................................74
APP (APPLICATION) MENU ...............................................................................74
SETTING ..................................................................................................................75
CONTROL................................................................................................................76
REVERB ....................................................................................................................77
INTERNAL ZONE ...................................................................................................78
EXTERNAL ZONE ..................................................................................................78
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN “VOLUME” AND “EXPRESSION”..........................79
PANIC FUNCTION / PARAMETER RELOAD ...................................................79
SECTIONS AND KEYBOARDS ...........................................................................54
ORGAN ...........................................................................................80
ALLOCATING THE SECTIONS............................................................................54
CHANGING THE OCTAVE ...................................................................................54
EDITING THE ORGAN SECTION .......................................................................81
PAGES AND PARAMETERS ................................................................................81
APP (APPLICATION) MENU ...............................................................................81
GENERAL.................................................................................................................82
PEDAL TO LOWER ................................................................................................55
LOWER TO PEDAL ................................................................................................55
PEDAL SUSTAIN ....................................................................................................55
ADJUSTING THE SOUND DURING PERFORMANCE .........56
REVERB ....................................................................................................................56
MASTER EQUALIZER ...........................................................................................56
LOUDNESS .............................................................................................................82
PITCH BEND ...........................................................................................................82
DRAWBARS ............................................................................................................82
UPPER & LOWER DRAWBARS...........................................................................83
PEDAL ......................................................................................................................83
TRANSPOSE, TUNE .....................................................................57
CONTACT / SUSTAIN ...........................................................................................84
TRANSPOSING THE ENTIRE KEYBOARD .......................................................57
VIRTUAL MULTI-CONTACT ................................................................................84
UPPER & LOWER SUSTAIN.................................................................................84
IMPEDANCE ...........................................................................................................84
WHAT IS AFFECTED BY THE TRANSPOSE FUNCTION? ............................57
MASTER TUNE .......................................................................................................57
RECORDING EXAMPLE: BUNDLE ...........................................58
RECORDING BUNDLES QUICKLY............................................59
USING THE DISPLAY ............................... 61
USING THE DISPLAY ...................................................................62
PLAY Mode.............................................................................................................62
MENU Mode ..........................................................................................................62
FUNCTION Mode .................................................................................................62
PERCUSSION..........................................................................................................85
LEVEL .......................................................................................................................85
DECAY ......................................................................................................................85
KEYBOARD .............................................................................................................85
DRAWBARS ............................................................................................................85
VIBRATO & CHORUS ............................................................................................86
PLAY MODE...................................................................................63
TONE WHEEL ORGAN .........................................................................................86
PEDAL ......................................................................................................................86
TRANSISTOR ORGAN ..........................................................................................86
PIPE ORGAN...........................................................................................................86
PLAY MODES .........................................................................................................63
MATCHING TRANSFORMER ..............................................................................87
OPERATION ............................................................................................................63
MATCHING TRANSFORMER ..............................................................................87
DEPTH ......................................................................................................................87
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY (GENERAL) .....................................................63
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY (ORGAN Section) .........................................64
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY (MONO SYNTH Section) ...........................64
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY (ZONES) ..........................................................65
APP (APPLICATION) MENU ...............................................................................65
MENU MODE ................................................................................66
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY ............................................................................66
OPERATION IN THIS MODE ...............................................................................66
MENU MODE CONTENTS ..................................................................................67
LESLIE.......................................................................................................................88
REVERB ....................................................................................................................88
CABINET ..................................................................................................................88
MULTI EFFECT 1 ....................................................................................................89
OVERDRIVE ............................................................................................................89
MULTI EFFECT 2 ....................................................................................................89
EQUALIZER .............................................................................................................89
PIANO/ENSEMBLE ......................................................................90
EDITING THE PIANO/ENSEMBLE SECTIONS...............................................90
Introduction
8
PAGES AND CONTENTS .....................................................................................90
APP (APPLICATION) MENU ...............................................................................91
GENERAL.................................................................................................................91
LOUDNESS .............................................................................................................91
PITCH BEND ...........................................................................................................91
PORTAMENTO .......................................................................................................91
MONO/POLY..........................................................................................................91
LFO............................................................................................................................92
COMPONENT.........................................................................................................93
COMPONENT - BASIC .........................................................................................93
COMPONENT - OSCILLATOR ............................................................................94
COMPONENT - PITCH EG ..................................................................................95
COMPONENT - DELAY ........................................................................................95
COMPONENT - FILTER ........................................................................................96
COMPONENT - FILTER EG..................................................................................96
COMPONENT - AMPLITUDE .............................................................................96
COMPONENT - AMPLITUDE EG ......................................................................97
MULTI EFFECT 1 ....................................................................................................97
OVERDRIVE ............................................................................................................97
MULTI EFFECT 2 ....................................................................................................97
EQUALIZER .............................................................................................................97
COPYING A COMPONENT .................................................................................98
INITIALIZING A PATCH OR COMPONENT .....................................................98
COMPONENTS & POLYPHONY ........................................................................98
INITIALIZING A PATCH ........................................................................................99
INITIALIZING A COMPONENT ..........................................................................99
Phaser ................................................................................................................... 112
Flanger ................................................................................................................. 112
Chorus .................................................................................................................. 112
Delay ..................................................................................................................... 112
MULTI EFFECT 2................................................................................................. 112
Auto Pan .............................................................................................................. 112
Phaser ................................................................................................................... 113
Flanger ................................................................................................................. 113
Chorus .................................................................................................................. 114
Delay ..................................................................................................................... 115
EQUALIZER ................................................................................. 116
SECTION EQUALIZER ....................................................................................... 116
TO LOCATE THE EQUALIZER FOR EACH SECTION: ................................ 116
TO LOCATE THE MASTER EQUALIZER: ....................................................... 116
MASTER EQUALIZER ........................................................................................ 117
RECORDING A COMBINATION OR PATCH ........................ 118
EDITING CUSTOM PARAMETERS ........................................ 119
CUSTOM CONTENTS ........................................................................................ 119
APP (APPLICATION) MENU ............................................................................ 119
CUSTOM TONE WHEELS ........................................................ 120
SET ......................................................................................................................... 120
FOLD BACK ......................................................................................................... 120
EDITING EACH TONE WHEEL ........................................................................ 121
LEAKAGE WHEEL............................................................................................... 122
MATRIX LEVEL .................................................................................................... 122
MONO SYNTH ........................................................................... 100
CUSTOM PEDAL REG. ............................................................. 123
EDITING THE MONO SYNTH SECTION ....................................................... 100
PAGES AND PARAMETERS ............................................................................. 100
SET ......................................................................................................................... 123
EACH PEDAL DRAWBAR ................................................................................. 123
GENERAL (P. 101) .............................................................................................. 100
LFO (P. 102) ......................................................................................................... 100
OSCILLATOR (P. 103) ........................................................................................ 100
FILTER (P. 103)..................................................................................................... 100
PITCH&FILTER EG (P. 104) ............................................................................... 100
CUSTOM LESLIE ........................................................................ 124
APP (APPLICATION) MENU ............................................................................ 100
GENERAL.............................................................................................................. 101
CUSTOM PIPE ............................................................................ 126
LOUDNESS .......................................................................................................... 101
PITCH BEND ........................................................................................................ 101
PORTAMENTO .................................................................................................... 101
KEY ......................................................................................................................... 101
LFO......................................................................................................................... 102
OSCILLATOR ....................................................................................................... 103
FILTER .................................................................................................................... 103
PITCH & FILTER EG ............................................................................................ 104
AMPLITUDE......................................................................................................... 104
AMPLITUDE EG .................................................................................................. 104
MULTI EFFECT 1 ................................................................................................. 105
OVERDRIVE ......................................................................................................... 105
MULTI EFFECT 2 ................................................................................................. 105
EQUALIZER .......................................................................................................... 105
SECTION EFFECTS.................................................................... 106
MULTI EFFECT 1 ................................................................................................. 107
TREMOLO ............................................................................................................ 107
WAH-WAH ........................................................................................................... 107
RING MODULATOR ........................................................................................... 107
COMPRESSOR .................................................................................................... 107
MULTI EFFECT 1................................................................................................. 107
Tremolo ................................................................................................................ 107
Wah-Wah ............................................................................................................. 108
Ring Modulator (Ring Mod.) ......................................................................... 109
Compressor ........................................................................................................ 110
OVERDRIVE ......................................................................................................... 111
MULTI EFFECT 2 ................................................................................................. 112
AUTO Pan ............................................................................................................ 112
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
CABINET NUMBER ............................................................................................ 124
SPEAKER............................................................................................................... 124
ROTOR .................................................................................................................. 124
MICROPHONE SETTINGS ............................................................................... 125
SET ......................................................................................................................... 126
UPPER / LOWER / PEDAL STOP SET ............................................................ 126
RECORDING A CUSTOM SETTING ...................................... 128
SYSTEM........................................................................................ 129
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND CONTENTS ................................................... 129
SOUND ........................................................................................ 130
MASTER TUNE .................................................................................................... 130
MASTER TRANSPOSE ....................................................................................... 130
MASTER EQUALIZER ........................................................................................ 130
AUDIO .......................................................................................... 131
OUTPUT ............................................................................................................... 131
LESLIE.................................................................................................................... 131
CONTROL .................................................................................... 132
FOOT SWITCH 1/2............................................................................................. 132
EXPRESSION PEDAL ......................................................................................... 133
DAMPER ............................................................................................................... 134
USER ...................................................................................................................... 134
PITCH BEND ........................................................................................................ 135
TONE WHEEL BRAKE ........................................................................................ 135
DISPLAY................................................................................................................ 136
PANEL ................................................................................................................... 137
KEYBOARD .......................................................................................................... 138
PATCH LOAD .............................................................................. 139
ORGAN PATCH LOAD....................................................................................... 139
FAVORITE .................................................................................... 140
ACCESS ................................................................................................................. 140
BANK 1 - 10 ......................................................................................................... 140
9
DISPLAY................................................................................................................ 141
GLOBAL ....................................................................................... 142
POWER.................................................................................................................. 142
AUTO OFF ............................................................................................................ 142
USB ........................................................................................................................ 142
RECORDING SYSTEM PARAMETERS .................................. 143
DELETE ........................................................................................ 144
DEFAULT ...................................................................................... 145
INFORMATION .......................................................................... 146
STATUS DISPLAY ................................................................................................ 146
IS ACTIVE ............................................................................................................. 146
VERSION - FIRMWARE ..................................................................................... 146
VERSION - CONTENTS ..................................................................................... 146
UPDATE ................................................................................................................ 146
UPDATING THE SOFTWARE .................................................. 147
PREPARING OPERATING TIME ....................................................................... 147
PREPARING UPDATE FILE ............................................................................... 147
PREPARING MEDIA ........................................................................................... 147
USING USB FLASH DRIVE ............................................................................... 147
USING INTERNAL MEMORY........................................................................... 147
OPERATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................... 148
FORMAT ...................................................................................... 163
USB MASS STORAGE ............................................................... 164
WHAT IS “USB MASS STORAGE?” ................................................................. 164
SETTING USB MODE TO “MASS STORAGE”............................................... 164
USING SETUP FILES ................................................................. 165
SAVE ............................................................................................. 166
LOAD ............................................................................................ 167
DELETE ........................................................................................ 168
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................... 170
TROUBLES ........................................................................................................... 170
ERROR MESSAGES ............................................................................................ 170
APPENDIX ............................................. 171
FACTORY COMBINATIONS .................................................... 172
ORGAN PATCHES...................................................................... 173
PIANO/ENSEMBLE PATCHES ................................................ 174
MONO SYNTH PATCHES ........................................................ 177
WAVEFORM LIST....................................................................... 178
PIANO/ENSEMBLE ............................................................................................ 178
MIDI ...................................................... 149
PIPE ORGAN STOPS & ProChord VOICING ...................... 179
MIDI .............................................................................................. 150
MIDI TEMPLATES ...................................................................... 180
WHAT IS “MIDI”? ................................................................................................ 150
WHAT IS “USB”?.................................................................................................. 150
MIDI/USB JACKS ON THE SKX PRO ............................................................. 150
WHAT MIDI CAN DO ON THE SKX PRO...................................................... 150
USB TO HOST...................................................................................................... 150
MIDI CHANNEL .................................................................................................. 151
MAIN MIDI MESSAGE....................................................................................... 151
MIDI STRUCTURE OF THE SKX PRO ................................... 152
KEYBOARD (INTERNAL) CHANNELS ........................................................... 153
EXTERNAL ZONES............................................................................................. 153
EXPANDED KEYBOARDS................................................................................. 153
USING AN EXTERNAL SEQUENCER .................................... 154
RECORDING AND PLAYING BACK A PERFORMANCE ........................... 154
RECORD................................................................................................................ 154
PLAYBACK............................................................................................................ 154
RECORDING A PERFORMANCE VIA USB CABLE ..................................... 154
USING A MIDI SOUND MODULE......................................... 155
BASIC CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................... 155
SIMPLIFIED SETUP MODE .............................................................................. 155
RECORDING TO A SEQUENCER OR DAW ................................................. 156
USING THE MIDI PORTS .................................................................................. 156
PLAY BACK THE PERFORMANCE.................................................................. 156
USING USB MIDI ................................................................................................ 157
MIDI FUNCTION MODE.......................................................... 158
MIDI TEMPLATE ................................................................................................. 158
GENERAL.............................................................................................................. 158
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES ................................................................... 159
MIDI CHANNELS................................................................................................ 159
USING MEMORY ................................... 161
USING MEMORY ....................................................................... 162
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH MEMORY .......................................................... 162
ABOUT USB FLASH DRIVES ........................................................................... 162
COMPATIBLE USB FLASH DRIVES ................................................................ 162
USB CONNECTOR ............................................................................................. 162
FOLDER STRUCTURE ....................................................................................... 162
PIPE ORGAN STOPS.......................................................................................... 179
MIDI TEMPLATES ............................................................................................... 180
MIDI INFORMATION ................................................................ 182
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION.................................................................................. 182
CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES ....................................................................... 182
CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES ........................................................................ 182
DRAWBAR DATA LIST ....................................................................................... 183
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE ..................................................................... 183
MEMORY DUMP ................................................................................................ 183
DUMP REQUEST (Rx. Only) ........................................................................... 183
INDIVIDUAL PARAMETERS............................................................................. 183
DATA SET (RX. ONLY) ...................................................................................... 183
IDENTITY REQUEST (RX. ONLY) ................................................................... 183
IDENTITY REPLY (TX. ONLY) ......................................................................... 183
COMBINATION PARAMETERS ....................................................................... 184
ORGAN PATCH PARAMETERS........................................................................ 186
PIANO/ENSEMBLE PATCH PARAMETERS .................................................. 188
MONO SYNTH PATCH PARAMETERS .......................................................... 191
CUSTOM SETS .................................................................................................... 193
CUSTOM TONE WHEELS ................................................................................. 193
CUSTOM SUB DRAWBARS ............................................................................. 193
CUSTOM LESLIE CABINETS ............................................................................ 193
CUSTOM PIPES................................................................................................... 193
CUSTOM TONE WHEEL PARAMETERS ........................................................ 194
CUSTOM PEDAL REG. PARAMETERS .......................................................... 194
PIPE PARAMETERS ............................................................................................ 194
CUSTOM LESLIE PARAMETERS ..................................................................... 195
SYSTEM PARAMETERS ..................................................................................... 196
FAVORITES ........................................................................................................... 197
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART .......................................... 198
MIDI CHANNELS AND MESSAGES...................................... 199
SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 200
INDEX ........................................................................................... 201
SERVICE ....................................................................................... 203
Introduction
10
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
❽
⓫
⓭
⓲
⓮
⓳
⓴
❶
❾
❿
⓬
⓯
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
⓰
⓱
TOP PANEL
⓯ UPPER HARMONIC DRAWBARS
LEFT SIDE
⓱ LOWER HARMONIC DRAWBARS
❶ MASTER VOLUME knob
Controls the volume of the entire instrument.
❷ CONTROL button
Accesses a feature from the CONTROL page.
❸ PEDAL SUSTAIN button
❹
❺
❻
❼
Causes the Pedal tones to smoothly decay upon release, much
in the manner of a string bass (P. 55).
PEDAL TO LOWER button
Couples the entire Pedal registration, including Parameters, to
the Lower Manual (P. 55).
LOWER TO PEDAL button
Couples the entire Lower registration, including Parameters, to
the Pedalboard (P. 55).
USER button
Activates a user-assignable function.
PORTAMENTO button
Turns the PORTAMENTO “ON” or “OFF” (P. 28).
ORGAN SECTION
❽ ORGAN VOLUME knob
❾
❿
⓫
⓬
⓭
⓮
Controls the volume of the ORGAN Section (P. 31).
EDIT button
Opens the Function Mode for the Organ Section.
ORGAN SOLO button
Allocates all parts of the Organ Section and disables other
Sections for all the keyboards (P. 54).
VIBRATO & CHORUS MODE button
Selects the depth of the Vibrato or Chorus (P. 34).
VIBRATO UPPER, LOWER button
Turns the Vibrato/Chorus “ON” or “OFF” for the Upper or
Lower ORGAN Part (P. 34).
OVERDRIVE ON button
Turns the OVERDRIVE effect “ON” or “OFF” (P. 35).
OVERDRIVE knob
Adjusts the depth of the Overdrive effect (P. 35).
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
⓰ PEDAL HARMONIC DRAWBARS
Registers each Part of the ORGAN Section (P. 38).
UPPER PERCUSSION buttons
Adds Harmonic Percussion (decay) to the UPPER Part of the
ORGAN Section (P. 34).
PIANO / ENSEMBLE SECTION
⓲ VOLUME knob
Controls the volume of the Section (P. 47).
⓳ EDIT button
Opens the Function Mode for the Section.
⓴ CATEGORY button
Selects the Voice Category of the Section (P. 46).
ALLOCATE
PEDAL button
Allocates a Section to the Pedalboard when used in conjunction
with the SECTION buttons (P. 54).
SECTION buttons
1. Allocates each Section to the UPPER Keyboard (P. 54).
2. Allocates each External Zone to the UPPER Keyboard
while Press and Hold the [SHIFT] button . (P. 78)
LOWER button
Allocates a Section to the LOWER Keyboard when used in
conjunction with the SECTION buttons (P. 54).
FAVORITES
BANK button
Selects Favorite Banks by Press and Hold this button with one
of the NUMBER buttons .
MANUAL/APP button
1. Overrides the current Combination setting in favor of the
current Panel settings (P. 29).
2. Opens the APP (Application) Menu.
NUMBER buttons
1. Recall a Favorite assigned to a numbered button.
2. Input characters or numbers when Naming.
3. Turns each Component “ON” or “OFF” when editing the
11
PIANO or ENSEMBLE Sections.
CONTROL PANEL
VALUE knob
Increases or decreases Combination/Patch numbers while
performing, or adjusts values during editing.
RECORD button
Use this button to Record user-definable features such as
Combinations, Patches, Custom Parameters etc (P. 58).
DIRECTION / DEC / INC buttons
1. Moves the cursor in the display.
2. Increments or decrements a value while Press and Hold the
[SHIFT] button .
MENU / EXIT / SHIFT button
1. Opens the MENU Mode (P. 66).
2. Exit or back one level from the current Function Mode.
3. Allows alternate functions for designated buttons.
PAGE buttons
Use these buttons to navigate the Pages.
ENTER button
Use this button to confirm the current entry or procedure
when editing sounds or features.
PLAY button
Returns to the PLAY Mode.
TRANSPOSE button
Transposes the musical pitch of the entire keyboard when used
in conjunction with [UP] or [DOWN] buttons (P. 57).
OCTAVE PEDAL button
Moves the pitch of the Pedal tones “UP” or “DOWN” by
octaves when used in conjunction with the [UP] or [DOWN]
buttons .
OCTAVE DOWN/UP buttons
Moves the UPPER Keyboard pitch “UP” or “DOWN” +/- 2
octaves (P. 54).
OCTAVE LOWER button
Moves the LOWER Keyboard pitch “UP” or “DOWN” +/- 2
octaves when used in conjunction with the [UP]or [DOWN]
buttons .
MONO SYNTH Section
VOLUME knob
Controls the volume of the MONO SYNTH Section (P.
49).
SYNTH OCTAVE DOWN/UP buttons
Moves the musical pitch of the MONO SYNTH Section “UP”
or “DOWN” by one octave (P. 49).
OSCILLATOR TYPE button
1. Selects the Oscillator Type (P. 51).
2. Opens the MONO SYNTH Function Mode when pressed
and held.
OSCILLATOR PITCH, DEPTH knob
Modifies the selected Oscillator waveform (P. 51).
LFO RATE knob
Adjusts the rate of the Low Frequency Oscillator (P. 51).
PORTAMENTO RATE knob
Adjusts the rate of the Portamento feature (P. 51).
FILTER CUTOFF knob
Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect
on the waveform’s frequency components (P. 51).
FILTER RESONANCE knob
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff
frequency.(P. 51).
FILTER EG DEPTH knob
Adjusts the depth of the FILTER ENVELOPE to the Cutoff
Frequency (P. 51).
PITCH & FILTER ENVELOPE sliders
Adjusts the changing over time of the pitch and filter (P. 51).
AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE sliders
1. Adjusts the changing over time of the amplitude or volume
(P. 51).
2. Adjusts the Master Equalizer while Press and Hold the
[MASTER EQ] button (P. 56).
Introduction
12
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS - continued
RIGHT SIDE
REAR PANEL
❶ REVERB DEPTH knob
Adjusts the depth of the Reverb effect
(P. 56).
❷ REVERB ON button
Turns the Reverb “ON” or “OFF” (P.
56).
❸ MASTER EQ button
Turns the Master Equalizer. “ON” or
“OFF” (P. 56).
❶
❷
❶
❷
❸
LEFT SIDE OF THE KEYBOARD
POWER
❶ AC POWER RECEPTACLE
❶
Connect the female end of a grounded AC Power Cord here, and
the male end into a grounded AC power outlet.
❷ POWER switch
Turns the AC power to the instrument “ON” or “OFF.”
❷
AUDIO OUTPUT JACKS
❸ PHONES jack
Use this jack to connect a set of stereo headphones.
❸
❹
❺
NOTE: Connecting Headphones does NOT mute the LINE OUT or
LESLIE audio outputs. If you wish the sound to go through
the Headphones only, disconnect all other audio outputs.
❹ LINE OUT L/MONO jack
WHEELS
❶ PITCH BEND wheel
Bends the pitch of played notes “UP” or “DOWN” (P. 28).
❷ MODULATION wheel
1. Applies modulation to played notes (except ORGAN
Section) (P. 28).
2. Controls the speed of the Leslie rotors (ORGAN Section
only) (P. 76).
LESLIE
❸ LESLIE BYPASS button
Channels the sounds produced by the ORGAN Section from
the Rotary channel to the Stationary channel (P. 35).
❹ LESLIE STOP button
Stops the Leslie Rotors from turning when the [FAST] button
is OFF” (P. 35).
❺ LESLIE FAST button
Selects “FAST” Leslie Rotor speed (P. 35).
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
LINE OUT R jack
Use these jacks to connect external audio equipment.
If the connected mixer or monitor speaker is stereophonic,
connect both the L and R jacks. If it is monaural, connect only
the L/MONO jack.
❺
LESLIE 11 -PIN socket
Use to connect a Leslie Speaker Cabinet having an 11-pin
interface.
When a Leslie Speaker Cabinet is detected at via the 11-pin
socket, the inbuilt digital Leslie is disabled at the PHONES
jack and the LINE OUT jacks (P. 17).
❻ ROTARY OUT jack
Outputs the Rotary Channel of the ORGAN Section. Use this
jack to bypass the inbuilt digital Leslie if you want a “dry” audio
output from the ORGAN Section.
NOTE: Set the “ROTARY OUT” switch in the AUDIO portion of the
FUNCTION Mode at “Used” if you use this jack (P. 18).
❼ ORGAN PEDAL OUT jack
Outputs the PEDAL Part of the ORGAN Section. Use this
jack to connect a powered sub-woofer to increase the bass, or to
bypass the Leslie to the PEDAL Part (P. 18).
❽ INDIVIDUAL OUT 1 jack
INDIVIDUAL OUT 2 jack
Outputs the selected Section independently (P. 19).
13
⓯
⓱
⓮
⓭ ⓬
⓫
❿ ❾
❽
❼ ❻
❹
❸
❺
⓰
AUDIO INPUT JACK
lated pages for each item (P. 132).
❾ AUX IN jack
MIDI PORTS
Use this jack to connect an external audio source. When
connected, the sound will be mixed with the internal keyboard
sounds and sent out to the LINE OUT jacks and the Stationary
channel of a multi-channel Leslie Speaker via the 11-pin socket
(P. 19).
❿ AUX LEVEL knob
Adjusts the volume of the sound coming in from the AUX IN
jack.
⓮ MIDI OUT Port
CONTROLLER JACKS
Use to connect to a computer to transmit MIDI messages or
Load and Save files such as Setups or Update files.
⓱ USB FLASH DRIVE Port
Use to connect a USB Flash Drive to Load or Save files such as
Setup or Update files.
⓫ FOOT SWITCH 1 jack
FOOT SWITCH 2 jack
Use these jacks to connect Foot Switches to control a functions
such as Leslie speeds or change Combinations.
The recommended Foot Switches are listed below;
Transmits MIDI data to a connected MIDI device.
⓯ MIDI IN Port
Receives MIDI data from a connected MIDI device. This port
can be programmed for a LOWER Keyboard or a Pedalboard.
USB PORTS
⓰ USB TO HOST Port
HAMMOND ... FS-9H, VFP1
BOSS ................ FS-5U
YAMAHA......... FC4A, FC5
In addition, the Leslie Switch CU-1 / FS-10TL (not available
in Europe) can be connected to the FOOT SWITCH 1 jack.
NOTE: The FOOT SWITCH 2 jack cannot be used to connect a Leslie
Switch.
⓬ EXP PEDAL jack
Use this jack to connect an Expression Pedal to control volume
while playing.
The recommended Expression Pedals are listed below:
HAMMOND ... EXP-50J, EXP-20, V-20H, V-20R; NORM
KORG................ XVP-10, XVP-20; REV
ROLAND ......... EV-5; NORM
YAMAHA......... FC7; REV
⓭ DAMPER PEDAL jack
Use this jack to connect a Damper Pedal (Sustain Pedal) for
holding notes when keys are played and released.
The recommended Damper Pedals are listed below:
HAMMOND ... FS-9H, VFP1
ROLAND ......... DP-10
YAMAHA......... FC3A, FC4A, FC5
NOTE: The controllers require setting for correct operation. See re-
Introduction
14
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS - continued
KEYBOARD
❶ Keyboards
Two 61-note, square-front (“waterfall”
type), semi-weighted, velocity-sensitive
keyboards.
❶
ACCESSORY
❶ AC Power Cord
❶
Connects to the AC Power Receptacle of the SKX PRO.
ACCESSORIES (SOLD SEPARATELY)
Expression Pedal EXP-50J
Heavyweight pedal for durability, and
detachable cable to avoid breaking or
fraying.
Expression Pedal EXP-20
Light weight for touring usage.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Leslie Switch CU-1 / CU-1BK
Controls [SLOW/STOP/FAST] of the
Leslie Rotors.
Soft Bag SC-SKXPRO
Foot Switch FS-9H
Multi-purpose foot switch with
Momentary action.
Wooden Side Panel SBW-SKXPRO
15
MAKING THE
CONNECTIONS
16
BASIC CONNECTIONS
Connect audio cables and accessories as shown below.
The SKX PRO is not self-contained - an external amplifier/
speaker system is required in order to hear the sound. However,
if you connect a set of stereo headphones to the PHONES jack,
you can hear the sound through the headphones even if an
external amplifier is not connected.
Damper Pedal
VFP1 (optional)
NOTE: Be sure that both the instrument and amplifier are “OFF”
before connecting amplifiers or headphones.
Foot Switch
FS-9H (optional)
to AC Outlet
Expression Pedal
EXP-50J (optional)
Powered Speakers
(optional)
NOTE: The Expression Pedal, Foot Switch and Damper Pedal Parameters
must be set properly. This is explained in more detail starting on
page 132.
CAUTION
This instrument draws a slight amount of power even if the
[POWER] switch is “OFF.” Therefore, if the instrument will
not be used for a long period of time, disconnect the AC
plug from the outlet.
Do not place this instrument in direct sun light, near heat
sources, or in a hot location.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
CONNECTING A LESLIE SPEAKER
17
A Leslie Speaker Cabinet with an 11-pin interface can be directly connected to the SKX PRO.
NOTE: Be sure the power to the SKX PRO is “OFF” before connecting the Leslie Speaker.
Connecting a single-channel Leslie Speaker
Connecting a 3-channel Leslie Speaker
Audio Equipment
Organ Stationary and the
other sound
TW / Tr Organ
Rotary Sound
BASIC CONNECTION
3-CHANNEL TYPE (2101/mk2)
1. Connect the SKX PRO to the Leslie Speaker via an 11-pin Leslie cable (optional
LC-11-7M, not included).
2. Turn the power to the SKX PRO “ON” and set the EXT. LESLIE CH Parameter
to “3.”
3. Make sure a Hammond Tone Wheel Organ (A-100, B-3, C-3, or Mellow) is
selected.
4. Press the [BYPASS] button “ON” and set the [STATIONARY VOLUME] of the
Leslie Speaker at a desired level.
5. Press the [BYPASS] button “OFF” while playing, and set the [ROTARY
VOLUME] of the Leslie Speaker at the same audible level as the [STATIONARY]
Channel.
SINGLE-CHANNEL TYPE (122XB, 981 or 3300/W)
1. Connect the SKX PRO to the Leslie Speaker via an 11-pin Leslie cable (optional
LC-11-7M, not included). This will allow you to hear the Drawbar ORGAN
sounds.
2. Connect the SKX PRO to a keyboard amp or powered speakers via 1/4” audio
cables from the LINE OUT jacks of the SKX PRO.
3. Turn the power to the SKX PRO “ON” and set the EXT. LESLIE CH Parameter
at “1+LINE.”
4. Make sure a Tone Wheel Organ (A-100, B-3, C-3, or Mellow) is selected.
5. Press the [BYPASS] button “ON” and set the audio equipment at a desired level.
6. Press the [BYPASS] button “OFF” and set the Volume of the connected Leslie
Speaker at the same audible level as when the [BYPASS] button is “OFF.”
LESLIE SPEAKERS TO CONNECT
The SKX PRO is designed to connect with
3-channel Leslie Speakers such as the 2101/mk2.
It is also possible to connect a single-channel
Leslie Speaker such as a 122XB, 981 or 3300/W;
however, a single-channel Leslie will reproduce the
Drawbar ORGAN sounds only. To hear the PIANO/
ENSEMBLE/SYNTH voices, connect an additional
sound source such as a keyboard amp or powered
speakers via the LINE OUT jacks.
LESLIE CHANNELS
3-channel Leslie Speakers are equipped with
a stereo speaker system, independent of the
Rotary channel, to provide separate channels for
the Rotary (ORGAN) channel and the Stationary
(PIANO, ENSEMBLE and MONO SYNTH) channel.
A traditional single-channel Leslie Speaker, such as
a 122XB, 981 or 3300/W has no stationary speaker
system, thus requiring a separate amplifier/speaker
for other sounds such as PIANO, ENSEMBLE and
MONO SYNTH.
Making the Connections
18
OTHER AUDIO CONNECTIONS
OUTPUT DRY ORGAN SOUNDS
Powered Sub Woofer
(optional)
TW / Tr / Pipe Organ
Pedal
Non-Leslie
Rotary Speaker
Rotary
Stomp Box
TW / Tr Organ
Upper and Lower
ROTARY OUT jack
Use the [ROTARY OUT] jack if you want to output a “dry” organ signal without
the inbuilt digital Leslie.
NOTE: Set the “ROTARY OUT” switch in the AUDIO FUNCTION Mode at “Used” when using
this jack to mute the ORGAN Section from the [LINE OUT] jacks. This is explained in
more detail on page 131.
ORGAN PEDAL OUT jack
This jack outputs the PEDAL Part of the ORGAN Section.
Connect the [ORGAN PEDAL OUT] jack to a powered sub-woofer if you want to
reinforce the bass or bypass the Leslie to the PEDAL Part.
NOTE: Set the “ORGAN PEDAL OUT” switch in the AUDIO FUNCTION Mode at “Used” when
using this jack to mute the PEDAL Part from the [LINE OUT] jacks.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Audio Equipment
Other Sounds
19
USING AN EXTERNAL MIXER
LINE
INDIV.
PIANO
REVERB
ENS
MASTER
EQ
SYNTH
MASTER
VOLUME
INDIV. OUT
LINE OUT
INDIVIDUAL OUT jacks
Use the [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks to connect an external mixer or add effects
from external effects devices. You can choose the Voice Section which will be present
at each of these jacks.
NOTE: Use the INDIVIDUAL OUT switch in the AUDIO FUNCTION Mode to select the Sections
to assign to the [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks. This is explained in more detail on page
131.
NOTE: If a Voice Section is assigned to an [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jack, it will be muted from the
[LINE OUT] jacks.
NOTE: The sound from the [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks is not affected by Reverb, the Master
Equalizer, or the [MASTER VOLUME] knob.
NOTE: The ORGAN Section cannot be assigned to the INDIVIDUAL OUT jacks.
USING A MUSIC PLAYER
AUX IN jack
Use the [AUX IN] jack to connect a music player or phone.
Use the [AUX LEVEL] knob on the Rear Panel to control the volume of a device
connected via the [AUX IN] jack.
The audio signal via the [AUX IN] jack will combine with the output from the [LINE
OUT]jacks, [PHONES] jack and the Stationary Channel of the 11-pin Leslie socket.
NOTE: The [MASTER VOLUME] knob does not affect the audio signal coming into the [AUX
IN] jack.
Making the Connections
20
EXPANDING THE KEYBOARD
The SKX PRO can be expanded by connecting a MIDI pedalboard.
MIDI Cable
MIDI Cable
Phone Cable
STEREO Phone Cable
AC Adaptor
LIS-200
ADx-1210
MIDI Pedalboard
XPK-130G etc.
MIDI OUT
MIDI Channel: 3
MIDI Pedalboard
XPK-250W / mk2
MIDI Channel: 3
1. Connect as illustrated above.
NOTE: The above figures show connections only for the expanding keyboard. See page
16 for power supply or audio connections.
2. Turn the power to the SKX PRO “ON.”
3. Select MIDI Template “Pedal KBD.”
RECOMMENDED MIDI PEDALBOARDS
The following HAMMOND MIDI Pedalboards are recommended for use with the
SKX PRO:
- MIDI Sound Pedalboard XPK-130G (13 notes)
- MIDI Sound Pedalboard XPK-200G (20 notes)
- MIDI Sound Pedalboard XPK-200GL (long 20 notes)
- MIDI Pedalboard XPK-250W mk2 (25 notes)
NOTE: The SKX PRO can also be used with the following Hammond MIDI Pedalboard
models:
XPK-100, XPK-200, XPK-200L.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
CONNECTING THE CU-1 LESLIE SWITCH
21
The CU-1 switch will control the Leslie speeds exactly as a similar “halfmoon” switch found on a vintage Hammond Organ. Follow the instructions below to connect a CU-1 switch to the SKX PRO.
1 LOCATING THE MOUNTING HOLES
There are 5 mounting holes on the bottom of the instrument,
allowing you to select one of 4 possible positions for the CU-1
switch.
2 ATTACH THE LESLIE SWITCH
Use the screws provided with the CU-1 switch to attach the
switch to the instrument.
3 INSERT THE PLUG
Insert the plug of the Leslie Switch to the FOOT SW 1
(LESLIE SW) jack.
4 SET THE CONTROL DEVICE
Set the [MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - CONTROL - FOOT
SWITCH 1 - DEVICE at “Leslie Switch.”
Please see page 132 for detail.
Making the Connections
22
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
23
TURN ON AND
PLAY
24
POWERING ON
HOW TO POWER ON
After making the connections described on the previous pages, you are ready to turn the
SKX PRO power “ON.” Follow the procedure below to prevent malfunction or damage.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Before turning the power to the SKX PRO “ON,” make sure you have connected all
peripherals (Expression Pedal, Foot Switch(es), etc.) properly. Also be sure to set the
[MASTER VOLUME] knob to its minimum setting.
NOTE: The polarity of each Foot Controller will be detected automatically.
2. The Power Switch is located on the left side of the Accessory Panel (right side facing
the keyboard). Turn the power to the instrument “ON.” The display will show,
“Loading...” below the opening screen for approximately 1 minute while the system
software loads, then the PLAY Mode screen will display.
NOTE: If you have a Leslie Speaker connected to the instrument, the Leslie will turn “ON”
automatically.
NOTE: In order to protect the circuits, the SKX PRO will be ready to play approximately 1 minute
after the power is turned “ON.”
3. Turn the power to the connected amplifier “ON.”
4. Hold down a playing key and turn the [MASTER VOLUME] clockwise slowly.
Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] as needed.
NOTE: If the [MANUAL] button is pressed in the Default setting and the [ALLOCATE] buttons are
all “OFF,” no sound will be heard. You can press any of the [ALLOCATE] buttons or select
any of the [FAVORITE] ([1] to [10]) buttons to hear sounds.
5. Adjust the volume of the amplifier.
NOTE: To turn the SKX PRO power “OFF,” reverse the above procedure. Also, be sure to turn the
power to a connected amplifier “OFF” before turning the keyboard “OFF.” This will prevent
a loud “pop” from the amplifier.
BACKING UP THE INITIAL SETTINGS
The SKX PRO does not remember the status of the playing controls before the power is
turned “OFF.” The status of the default settings is the same as when the [FAVORITE]
[1] button is depressed.
AUTO POWER OFF
The SKX PRO has an “AUTO POWER OFF” feature which will automatically turn the
power to the instrument “OFF” if no keys or buttons are pressed for 30 minutes.
NOTE: Depending on the status of the instrument - while editing, for example - the power may
not turn “OFF” even if AUTO POWER OFF in enabled. Therefore, it is best to turn the
SKX PRO power “OFF” via the Power Switch after every use.
RESTORING THE FACTORY SETTINGS
To reset all Parameters of the SKX PRO to their default settings, do the following:
1. Turn the power to the SKX PRO “OFF.”
2. Press and Hold the red [RECORD] button.
3, While holding the red [RECORD] button, turn the [POWER] “ON.”
Continue to hold down the red [RECORD] button. When “Loading Default” is
displayed, release the red [RECORD] button. The system will load.
4. When the PLAY Mode is displayed, the factory settings have been restored.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
25
STRUCTURE OF THE SKX PRO
The illustration below shows the structure of the sound engine and memory.
FAVORITES
1
2
COMBINATION
ORGAN
3
U003
Allocation
Section
“Pelican Dance”
Sections and Patches
ORGAN: U012 All Nine
LOWER keyboard
PIANO:
ENS:
SYNTH:
REVERB:
ExZ1:
ExZ2:
ExZ3:
PEDALboard
Section
U034 Clav BC
U056 Finger Bs
U078 Funny
Hall 1
Sampler
Synth
Processor
Patches
PIANO
UPPER
LOWER
PEDAL
UPPER keyboard
and
ENSEMBLE
Section
SECTIONS
U034
“Clav BC”
U056
“Finger Bs”
Patches
MONO SYNTH
Section
U078
“Funny”
Patches
MIDI Equipment
The SKX PRO has four sound-producing divisions or
Sections. Each Section has sounds and Parameters which can
be Recorded as a Patch. In addition, Patches from the different
Sections can be combined to produce a Combination. This is
explained in more detail starting below.
U012
“All Nine”
MEMORY
PATCHES
A Patch is an individual unit of each Section. For example, the
PIANO Section contains Grand Pianos, Electric Pianos, etc.,
the ENSEMBLE Section contains Strings, Choir, and so on.
FACTORY, USER and BUNDLE
F001
There are four (4) Sections - ORGAN, PIANO, ENSEMBLE
and MONO SYNTH. These can be used individually or
together, as shown on the right side of the illustration at the
top of this page.
KEYBOARDS AND PARTS
KEYBOARDS
UPPER
LOWER
PEDAL
if expanded
To play a Section on the SKX PRO, “allocate” the Section to
a keyboard.
The SKX PRO has two keyboards, called UPPER and LOWER.
PEDAL refers to the bass tones which can be played from a
connected MIDI Pedalboard.
PARTS
The ORGAN Section has 3 Parts - UPPER, LOWER and
PEDAL. This replicates the performance of a classic Hammond
Organ with two manuals and pedals.
Factory Patches
U001
User Patches
B001
Bundle Patches
The Patches are grouped in three ways. “F” (Factory) Patches
are set at the factory and cannot be changed. “U” (User)
Patches can be changed by the player. “B” (Bundles) consist of
Combination Parameters plus ORGAN and MONO SYNTH
Sections grouped together. After you have Recorded a Bundle
(Bxxx), you can then include it in a Combination.
There are 100 Factory and 100 User Patches for the ORGAN
and MONO SYNTH Sections. The PIANO and ENSEMBLE
Sections share a common library of Factory and User Patches.
COMBINATIONS
A “Combination” is a unit which contains Patches as well as
other Parameters such as the Patch number of each Section,
keyboard allocations of each Section, etc. (see illustration at
the top of this page, center).
The SKX PRO contains a total of 100 Factory (“F”)
Combinations which can be used “as is” or changed to suit the
player.
For example, “ORGAN Section Patch #10, allocated to
LOWER Keyboard, soft Volume, Octave +1, PIANO Section
Patch #3, allocated to UPPER Keyboard at high Volume.”
FAVORITES
The [FAVORITE] buttons allow you to store and recall
frequently-used Combinations (see illustration at the top of this
page, upper-left side).
There are 10 [FAVORITE] buttons. In addition, there are 10
Banks of Favorites, bringing the total number of Favorites to
100. Use the [BANK] button to access the Favorite Banks.
Turn On And Play
26
USING COMBINATIONS
Combinations are the basic memory units of the SKX PRO. This is explained in more detail starting below.
WHAT IS A “COMBINATION?”
As explained previously, the SKX PRO has four sound-producing sections ORGAN, PIANO, ENSEMBLE, and MONO SYNTH. These, along with other
Parameters such as Control Panel settings, etc., can be combined into a single unit
called a Combination.
The SKX PRO comes with 100 pre-programmed Combinations. Starting below is
an example of how to use Combinations.
WHAT IS A “BUNDLE?”
In order to decrease the number of steps
necessary to create a Combination, you can
save Combination Parameters, ORGAN Patches
and MONO SYNTH Patches to a Bundle You
can then save the Bundle along with PIANO
and/or ENSEMBLE Patches to a Combination.
SELECT A COMBINATION
①
LOCATE THE PLAY MODE
Combination
B001
Bundle
Organ
Mono Synth
If the PLAY Mode is not displaying, press the [PLAY] button.
②
MOVE THE CURSOR TO THE COMBINATION NUMBER
“” INDICATES A LIST
If the cursor is not at the Combination Number (very top of the screen), move the
cursor to it using the DIRECTION buttons.
③
SELECT A COMBINATION
Use the [VALUE] knob to select a Combination.
NOTE: You can also select a Combination Number by direct numerical key input. This is
explained in more detail on page 140.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
The “ ” is shown on the right side of the
Combination Number etc. This indicates a List
window is available to choice a value or selection.
The List window is opened by press the [ENTER]
button with cursor on the “ ” item. Select the
value by [VALUE] knob or [ ]/[ ] buttons and
press the [ENTER] button. The value will decided
and the List window will closed.
FAVORITES-FREQUENTLY USED COMBINATIONS
27
To recall Combinations that are frequently used, follow the instructions below.
WHAT IS A “FAVORITE?”
A Favorite is simply a Combination which is stored to one
of the 10 numbered buttons in the [FAVORITE]S section,
allowing you to recall frequently used Combinations more
quickly than using the [VALUE] knob.
RECALLING A COMBINATION
USING A [FAVORITE] BUTTON
①
Hold
BANK AND NUMBER
Number
1
Bank
2
U012 Born Solo
Press
3
1
U011 Born Verse
U011 Born Verse
2
U024 MyLife Pf
U045 Lucy Org
U023 GetBack EP
3
P061 Classic
P062 Slow
P063 Contemp.
Press and Hold the [BANK] button and press the numbered
[FAVORITE] button representing the Bank where
the Combination you want to stored. The LED of the
[FAVORITE] button will flash several times.
There are 10 available Banks of Favorites, each of which contains
10 Favorites. This allows you to have 100 Combinations
readily available for quick access. The chart above shows an
example of compiling a Set List using different Favorite Banks.
LINKING A COMBINATION TO A
FAVORITE
①
SELECT THE BANK
②
SELECT THE [FAVORITE] BUTTON
Press
SELECT A COMBINATION
Select a Combination you want to link to a Favorite.
For this example, link Combination F002 to Favorite #2,
Bank #5.
②
SELECT A BANK
Hold
Press the numbered [FAVORITE] button where the
Combination you want is stored. The LED of the numbered
button will light and your Combination is selected.
Press
NOTE: You can view a list of Favorites by Press and Hold any number
button. This is explained in more detail on page 140.
Select the Bank. For this example, select Bank 5.
Press and Hold the [BANK] button and press the [5]
[FAVORITE] button. The LED of the selected number will
flash several times.
③
SELECT A NUMBERED [FAVORITE] BUTTON
Hold
Press
CONFIRM THE CURRENT BANK
Select a Favorite Number. For this example, Press and Hold
the red [RECORD] button and press the [FAVORITE] [2]
button. The LED of the numbered button will flash several
times. When the LED stops flashing the procedure is complete
and your Bank is selected.
Press and Hold the [BANK] button to determine
which Bank is selected. One of the numbered
[FAVORITE] buttons will light indicating which
Bank is currently active.
OMITTING BANK STEP
If the current Bank already contains the [FAVORITE]
you want, you can omit Step 1 above.
Turn On And Play
28
USING CONTROLLERS
The various Controllers of the SKX PRO are explained in detail starting below.
ON-BOARD CONTROLLERS
❶ PITCH BEND wheel
❹
❶
❸
❷
This allows you to bend the pitch “UP” or “DOWN” smoothly. Push the wheel away
from you to bend the pitch “UP,” and pull it toward you to bend the pitch “DOWN.”
When the wheel is released, it will automatically return to its center position.
❷ MODULATION wheel
This allows you to add Vibrato or Modulation to the sound. Push the wheel away
from you to increase the effect, and pull it toward you to decrease the effect.
NOTE: The effects controlled by the wheels may be somewhat different for each Combination
or Patch (P. 76).
❸ PORTAMENTO button
This allows you to turn the Portamento effect “ON” or “OFF.” When this button is
“ON” and Portamento is enabled for a particular Patch, the pitch will glide smoothly
from the last note played to the current note being played and held.
NOTE: The status of the PORTAMENTO button can be Recorded to a Combination.
NOTE: PORTAMENTO can be applied to the PIANO, ENSEMBLE or MONO SYNTH Voices. This
is explained in more detail on page 91 and 101.
a
❹ USER button
This allows you to assign a function for instant access.
EXPRESSION PEDAL
You can use an Expression Pedal to control the overall volume of the SKX PRO.
Press forward with the front of your foot to increase the volume and back with your
heel to decrease the volume.
EXP-50J (optional)
NOTE: You can adjust the minimum volume of the Expression Pedal. This is explained in
more detail on page 76.
NOTE: You can select whether or not the Expression Pedal will affect a particular Voice
Section. This is explained in more detail in later sections of this Manual.
FOOT SWITCH
FS-9H (optional)
You can use a Foot Switch to control various functions - for example, switching Leslie
rotor speeds.
NOTE: You can assign a Foot Switch to control various functions. This is explained in more
detail on page 132.
DAMPER PEDAL
You can use a Damper Pedal to hold or “cancel damp” notes while it is pressed and
held, similar to the damper pedal on an acoustic piano.
NOTE: You can assign the Damper effect to any of the Sections. This is explained in more
detail on page 134.
VFP1 (optional)
LESLIE SWITCH
You can use this switch to control the Leslie speeds exactly as a similar switch found
on a vintage Hammond Organ.
NOTE: See page 21 for instructions on how to install the CU-1 Leslie switch.
CU-1 (optional)
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
29
MANUAL
The SKX PRO incorporates an exclusive Hammond feature called MANUAL, which is explained
starting below.
④
SELECT “INITIALIZE MANUAL”
If “INITIALIZE [MANUAL]” is not already highlighted,
use the [][] buttons to select it, and press the [ENTER]
button. The screen shown below will display.
⑤
CHOOSE THE SECTION TO INITIALIZE
What is “MANUAL”?
Normally, one of the [FAVORITE] buttons is “ON” (LED
lit), indicating that a Combination is selected. However, if
you want to de-select Combinations and use the front panel
controls entirely to control the sound, turn the [MANUAL]
button “ON.” The [FAVORITE] buttons will all turn “OFF”
and all sounds and features of the SKX PRO will be controlled
by the front panel controls as well as by the settings from the
Menus.
Use the [VALUE] knob to select which Section to Initialize ALL, ORGAN or SYNTH.
⑥
COMPLETE THE PROCEDURE
INITIALIZE “MANUAL”
Some Menu Parameters may not be set the way you wish even
if [MANUAL] is selected. If you encounter this, you can
initialize all the MANUAL Parameters using the following
procedure.
①
LOCATE THE PLAY MODE
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to the
[INITIALIZE] icon, and press the [ENTER] button. The
screen will display “Initializing...” for approximately 1 second.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Initialize, press the [MENU/EXIT] or
[PLAY] button instead of the [ENTER] button.
If the PLAY Mode is not displaying, press the [PLAY] button
to display it.
②
SELECT MANUAL
Press the [MANUAL] button “ON” (LED lit).
③
OPEN THE APP (APPLICATION) MENU
RECORD THE MANUAL
If you turn off this instrument, the contents of
the “Manual” will lost. You can Record the current
“Manual” settings for keep same settings at next
power “ON.” (P. 118)
“MANUAL”
Press and Release the [㲇] button to open the APP Menu.
The “Manual” feature cancels all Combinations,
Patches, internal Parameters, etc. It works much
the same way as the “Adjust Presets” on Hammond
Organs with Preset Keys or the “Cancel” piston
on many classic organs or on electronic home
organs such as the Hammond XT/XH-series. The
Hammond 935 Church Organ has a feature called
“Panel Memory” which performs much the same
function.
Turn On And Play
30
USING ORGAN PATCHES
ORGAN Patches are explained in detail starting below.
ALLOCATING A SECTION TO A KEYBOARD
If the LED on the [ORGAN] button in the [ALLOCATE]
button is not “red” or “orange,” press the [ORGAN]
button repeatedly until the LED lights red or orange.
NOTE: If only the ORGAN Section is active (no other
[ALLOCATE] buttons lit), the PLAY Mode will display
only the ORGAN Parameters.
NOTE: See page 54 for instructions on allocating a Section
to another Keyboard.
PLAY Mode (Organ)
RECALLING A PATCH
For this example, recall “F011 Classic Gospel.”
①
MOVE THE CURSOR TO THE PATCH NUMBER
Use the DIRECTION buttons to move
the cursor to the Patch Number in the
ORGAN Section.
NOTE: The MANUAL feature is explained in
more detail on page 29.
PLAY Mode (General)
②
PLAY Mode (Organ)
OPEN THE PATCH LIST
You can use the Patch List to display
available Patches quickly. To open the
Patch List, press the [ENTER] button
when the Patch Number is highlighted in
the display.
③
SELECT THE PATCH
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the desired
Patch. For this example, select.“F011
Classic Gospel.”
Press the [PLAY] or [ENTER] button to
return from Patch List to PLAY Mode.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
31
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
Use the [VOLUME] knob in the ORGAN Section to adjust
the volume.
NOTE: You can also adjust the volume of the ORGAN Section in the
PLAY mode by moving the cursor to “VOL” (right side of the
screen) and turning the [VALUE] knob.
CHANGING THE OCTAVE
To change the Octave of the entire Keyboard (all Sections),
press the OCTAVE [UP] or [DOWN] button. The display
will show the current Octave setting.
NOTE: You can select from “-2” (up to two octaves down) through
+2” (up to two octaves up).
To change the Octave for the ORGAN Section only, use the
DIRECTION buttons to move the cursor to “PLAY Mode ORGAN Section - OCTAVE” and use the [VALUE] knob to
change the Octave. The display will show the current Octave
setting.
NOTE: You can select from “-2” (up to two octaves down) through
+2” (up to two octaves up).
Turn On And Play
32
CREATING AN ORGAN PATCH
The ORGAN Section can be registered for vintage Hammond Organ sounds, Combo Organs, and
Pipe Organs. This is explained in more detail starting below.
SELECT [MANUAL]
Normally, one of the [FAVORITE] buttons is “ON” (LED lit), indicating that a
Combination is selected. However, if you want to de-select Combinations and use
the front panel controls entirely to control the sound, turn the [MANUAL] button
“ON.” The [FAVORITE] buttons will all turn “OFF” and all sounds and features of
the SKX PRO will be controlled by the front panel controls as well as by the settings
from the Menus.
INITIALIZE “MANUAL”
Some Menu Parameters may not be set the way you wish even if [MANUAL] is
selected. If you encounter this, you can initialize the MANUAL Parameters See page
29 for instructions on how to do this.
NOTE: “MANUAL” is explained in more detail on page 29.
ALLOCATE THE SECTION TO A KEYBOARD
Press the [ORGAN] button in the [ALLOCATE] button group
“ON.” The LED will light and the ORGAN Section will play from
the UPPER keyboard.
NOTE: See page 54 for instructions on allocating a Section to another
Keyboard.
USING THE ORGAN SOLO BUTTON
The ORGAN Section has 3 Parts - UPPER, LOWER and PEDAL.
The [ORGAN SOLO] button turns all the Parts of the Organ
Section “ON,” and turns other Sections “OFF.” This allows you
to turn the SKX PRO into a vintage 2-keyboards-and-pedal
Hammond Organ instantly with one button press.
SELECT THE ORGAN TYPE
Select the ORGAN Type most appropriate to the musical style
you wish to play.
Use the DIRECTION buttons to move the cursor to “ORGAN
TYPE - UPPER&LOWER.”
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the ORGAN Type.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
33
ADD DRAWBARS
The Drawbars control the basic organ sounds. You can hear the
effect each Drawbar has on the sound by pulling out or pushing
in Drawbars while holding keys.
ADJUST THE VOLUME
Use the [VOLUME] knob in the ORGAN Section to adjust
the volume.
NOTE: You can also adjust the volume of the ORGAN Section in the
PLAY screen by moving the cursor to “VOL” (right side of the
screen) and turning the [VALUE] knob.
CHANGING THE OCTAVE
To change the Octave of the entire Keyboard (all Sections),
press the OCTAVE [UP] or [DOWN] button. The display will
show the current Octave setting.
To change the Octave for the ORGAN Section only, use the
DIRECTION buttons to move the cursor to “PLAY Mode ORGAN Section - OCTAVE” and use the [VALUE] knob to
change the Octave. The display will show the current Octave
setting.
NOTE: You can select from “-2” (up to two octaves down) through
+2” (up to two octaves up).
Turn On And Play
34
ADDING PERCUSSION
❶
❷
❸
❹
An important component of the Hammond Sound is “Touch-Response Percussion
Control™.” The Percussion controls on the SKX PRO consist of four separate buttons
(shown at left) which control harmonic Percussion tones. These four buttons control all
the same functions as the tilt tablets on a Tone Wheel Hammond.
❶ [ON] button
This button, when “ON” (LED lit), turns the Percussion effect “ON.” The Percussion
tone will sound in accordance with the settings for the other three Percussion controls.
NOTE: In the “ON” position, all of the Upper Manual Drawbars will be effective except the 1’
(fourth white) Drawbar. This duplicates the performance of a vintage Tone Wheel organ
such as a B-3/C-3/A-100. In the “OFF” position, the 1’ Drawbar is effective as usual.
However, you can change this Parameter if you wish.
❷ [SOFT] button
This button regulates the volume of the Percussion tone. When it is “OFF” (LED not
lit), the Percussion effect will be very prominent. The Drawbar tones will also be reduced
in volume to compensate for the addition of the Percussion tones. When this button
is “ON” (LED lit), the Percussion effect is much less prominent. The volume of the
Drawbar tones remains unaffected by the addition of the Soft Percussion effect.
❸ [FAST] button
When this button is “OFF” (LED not lit) the Percussion tone will decay slowly like a bell.
When it is “ON” (LED is lit) the Percussion tone will decay rapidly like a xylophone.
❹ [THIRD] button
This button determines the pitch at which the Percussion tone sounds. When set at
“SECOND” (LED not lit), the pitch is up one octave with respect to the Fundamental
(8’) Drawbar; when set at “THIRD” the Percussion pitch is up an octave and a fifth with
respect to the Fundamental Drawbar.
NOTE: The Percussion features works with the “ A-100,” “B-3,” “C-3” and “Mellow” Organ types
only, and on the UPPER Part only.
NOTE: You can adjust the Parameters of the Percussion to your liking. This is explained in more
detail on page 126.
ADDING EFFECTS TO THE ORGAN SECTION
VIBRATO & CHORUS
“Vibrato & Chorus” allows you to add “Vibrato” (a periodic raising and lowering of
pitch) or “Chorus” (a “shimmering” effect having the periodicity of Vibrato) to your
Drawbar registrations.
❶ [UPPER], [LOWER] buttons
❷
❶
These allow you to turn Vibrato & Chorus “ON” or “OFF” for each Part. When “ON”
the red LEDs will light.
❷ [MODE] button
This allows you to select from three degrees of Vibrato and three degrees of Chorus. Each
successive press of this button selects a different amount of Vibrato or Chorus.
Organ Type
A-100, B-3, C-3, Mellow
Vx, Farf, Ace
Pipe
Effect
Vibrato & Chorus
Vibrato
Tremulant
MODE
V: Vibrato
C: Chorus
number: depth of the Vibrato or Chorus effect.
Six degrees of Vibrato increasing in intensity from V-1
through C-3.
Six degrees of Vibrato increasing in intensity from V-1
through C-3.
NOTE: You can adjust the Vibrato & Chorus effect to your liking. This is explained in more detail
on page 86.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
35
LESLIE
LESLIE BUTTONS AND MODES
The SKX PRO has an inbuilt digital Leslie that replicates the sound of a twin-rotor
Leslie Speaker Cabinet. In addition, the instrument can also be used with a variety
of different Leslie Speaker Cabinets.
❶
❷
❸
❶ [BYPASS] button
BUTTON
MODE
FAST
CH=3 or
digital Leslie
BYPASS
STOP
Off
Off
On
Fast
Off
Off
Off
Slow
Off
On
On
Fast
Off
On
Off
Stop
On
On
On
Fast
CH=1
On
On
Off
Stop
On
Off
On
Fast
On
Off
Off
Slow
Bypass
Disables the digital Leslie, producing a “dry” organ sound.
❷ [STOP] button
To toggle between “FAST” and “SLOW” when the [FAST] button is pressed, turn
this button “OFF” (LED not lit).
To toggle between “FAST” and “STOP” when the [FAST] button is pressed, turn
this button “ON” (LED lit).
❸ [FAST] button
Toggles between “FAST” (LED lit) and “SLOW” (LED not lit).
NOTE: The digital Leslie is not available for the Pipe Organ.
NOTE: These controls perform the same functions when a Leslie Speaker Cabinet is
connected via the 11-pin socket.
NOTE: You can fine-tune the Parameters of the inbuilt digital Leslie. This is explained in
more detail starting on pages 88 and 124.
OVERDRIVE
“Overdrive” adds distortion to the sound by increasing the pre-amplifier input gain.
❷
WHAT IS THE LESLIE EFFECT?
When the Hammond Organ was first introduced in
the mid 30’s, the sound-producing apparatus was
not contained within the console. A separate “tone
cabinet” had to be connected to the organ console
via a special cable. For many years, Hammond
manufactured tone cabinets specifically for use
with Hammond Organs. The best known of these
is probably the PR-40 model.
In the late 30’s, an independent engineer and
organ enthusiast named Donald J. Leslie found
that rotating a baffle in front of a stationary speaker
created the effect of a tremulant (the well-known
“Doppler effect) and called the subsequent speaker
the “Vibratone.” (The “Vibratone” designation
was eventually dropped and subsequent models
would be known simply as Leslie Speakers.) The
figure below shows the configuration of a “twinrotor and stationary” Leslie Speaker Cabinet.
The inbuilt digital Leslie on the SKX PRO
reproduces all three modes - “FAST,” “SLOW” and
“OFF.” In addition, all three modes are available
when the SKX PRO is connected to an 11-pin Leslie
Speaker Cabinet.
❶
❶ [ON] button
Press the OVERDRIVE button to turn the Overdrive effect “ON” (LED lit) or
“OFF” (LED not lit).
❷ [OVERDRIVE] knob
Adjust the amount of the Overdrive effect.
Horn
Rotor
OTHER EFFECTS
-
800Hz
MULTI-EFFECTS
There are several Multi Effects which you can use to enhance the sound.
REVERB
The SKX PRO has built-in Reverb (reverberation) which allows you to simulate
several different acoustic profiles.
Horn
Driver
Stationary
Speaker
Woofer
Amplifier
Drum
Rotor
Turn On And Play
36
ORGAN SECTION IN DETAIL
KEYBOARDS AND PARTS
The classic Hammond Organ has two manuals or keyboards and a pedal keyboard
(or pedal clavier). Commonly, the two keyboards will be registered differently - for
example, the Upper Keyboard will have a registration appropriate for Melody while
the Lower Keyboard will have an Accompaniment registration to provide harmonic
backing for the Melody. In addition, the Pedals will have a setting appropriate for
bass notes.
The SKX PRO has two keyboards; UPPER and LOWER for each Part. In addition,
the PEDAL Part can be played either from a connected MIDI pedalboard, or from
the keyboard by using the PEDAL TO LOWER feature.
ORGAN TYPES
Upper
or, Swell
Lower
or, Great
Pedal
The Drawbars on your SKX PRO can be made to control organ sounds other than
traditional Hammond Drawbars. Several makes of combo organs, for example, also
used Drawbar-type controls to register the sounds, which were actual organ voices
rather than individual harmonics as with Hammond Drawbars.
TONE WHEEL (A-100, B-3, C-3)
The Hammond Organ’s original purpose was to duplicate the pipe organ, however,
they became famous for producing a unique sound of their own.
Tone Wheels are the method by which Tone Wheel Hammond Organs generate
sound. Each frequency is generated by a steel disk 1 7/8” in diameter and containing
a number of high spots on its outer edge. (See the illustration above.) These disks are
the Tone Wheels. The most common Tone Wheel generator has a total of 96 tone
wheels, all with different numbers of teeth - some wheels have 2 teeth, others have
4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, up to 192 teeth. The classic Tone Wheel design uses 91 tone
wheels to generate the musical tones.
A-100, B-3 and C-3 are traditional Tone Wheel sounds.
MELLOW
The Mellow setting replicates the non-mechanical electronic Hammond tone
generators such as the Concorde, the X-5 combo organ and the later “multiplex”
organs such as the B-3000 and 340 series Elegante.
TRANSISTOR (Vx, Farf, Ace)
PEDAL ORGAN TYPES
As transistors gradually replaced vacuum tubes in electronic circuits it became
possible to produce light-weight combo organs. These have been used extensively in
rock and popular music since the early 60’s. The type of circuitry is different from
maker to maker or model by model. We have replicated 3 representative types here.
Vx replicates a British combo organ which combines triangle waves and square waves
using several footages. “Farf ” and “Ace” both replicate combo organs (Italian and
Japanese) which use tablets to combine sound waves which are filtered to produce
different tones.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
When using the Tone Wheel Organs (A-100, B-3,
C-3 or Mellow) for the UPPER & LOWER Parts, you
can select two different PEDAL Voicings - Normal
and Muted. Normal replicates the Pedal Drawbars
of a vintage Hammond Organ while Muted more
nearly duplicates the mellow Pedal Drawbar tones
of an electronic Hammond.
On the Transistor Organs (Vx., Farf., and Ace.),
the PEDAL Voicing is automatically set to Muted.
For Pipe, the PEDAL Drawbars register Pipe organ
voices to complement the UPPER and LOWER Pipe
Voices.
37
PIPE
A pipe organ produces sounds by pushing pressurized air through sets of wood or
metal pipes called Ranks or Stops. There are many different types of Pipe Stops
which produce sounds of different pitches, timbres and levels of volume. Each Stop
is identified by a unique Name indicating what type of sound it will produce when
selected.
The Pipe Organ replicates several different types of pipe organs by using the
Drawbars as drawstops or stop tablets to create pipe organ registrations.
Turn On And Play
38
HARMONIC DRAWBARS™
The Harmonic Drawbars are the heart of the renowned Hammond Sound and have been used
since the first Hammond Organ Model A was introduced in 1935. There are approximately
253,000,000 possible sound combinations that can be produced by these Drawbars. The
illustration below shows how each Drawbar relates to the keyboard when middle “C” is pressed.
NOTE: When recalling Combinations or ORGAN Patches, the positions of the Drawbars will change
internally, but not physically. When a Drawbar is moved, the Patch setting will update to that
Drawbar’s current position. You can also match the entire Drawbar registration to the physical
Drawbar setting. See page 45 for more information.
DRAWBARS (Tone Wheel Organs: A-100, B-3, C-3, Mellow)
Sub
Harmonic: Fund.
16'
Footage:
Sub
3rd
51/3'
Fundamental
8'
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
8th
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
Middle “C”
Each Drawbar may be set in eight different positions in addition to the silent or “0”
position. Each position, as marked on the Drawbars, represents a different degree of
intensity of the harmonic it controls. When drawn out to position “1,” the harmonic
it represents will be present with minimum intensity, when drawn out to position 2
with greater intensity, and so on up to position “8.”
If you pull the fundamental (8´), the third harmonic (2⅔´) plus the fifth harmonic
(13/5´) Drawbars out completely and play the keyboard you will notice the sound
resembles a clarinet.
If you push the 8´ Drawbar half-way, you’ll notice the sound becomes more highpitched and a bit “harder.” Now pull the 8´ Drawbar back out fully and push the
2⅔´ and 13/5´ in halfway. Notice how the sound becomes mellower.
Experiment with the Drawbars to obtain your own favorite registrations.
DRAWBAR REGISTRATION
Below is an example of using Drawbars to create
different sounds.
16'
51/3'
8'
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
Example of “Clarinet”
For “Tone Wheel” Organs, the relationship between each
Drawbar and its footage is shown on the “TW” legends directly
in front of the Drawbars.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
39
DRAWBARS FOR THE UPPER AND LOWER PARTS
The Colors of the Drawbars are traditional to Hammond, and were established to provide a quick visual guide to the harmonics
generated by the Drawbars.
WHITE DRAWBARS
16'
51/3'
8'
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
The first white Drawbar represents the “fundamental” or “8´
base” tone. All of the other white Drawbars are octave intervals
or harmonics of the fundamental tone. The tonal brilliance is
greatly increased by adding white Drawbars, but the harmonics
added are always in “consonance” or harmony.
BLACK DRAWBARS
16'
51/3'
8'
4'
The black Drawbars represent the “dissonant” harmonics which
are also necessary in building rich tone colors. The mellowness
of a horn, the pungency of strings, and the brilliance of reed
voices owe much of their character to the presence of these
harmonics in different degrees.
BROWN DRAWBARS
16'
51/3'
8'
4'
The two brown Drawbars on the far left give depth and richness
to the sound. The left 16´ is one octave lower than the 8´, and
5⅓´ is the third harmonic of the 16´ fundamental. Normally,
the tones are built on the 8’ fundamental, but, if you want to
add depth to the tone or to expand the playing range by one
octave lower, build your tones on the 16´ fundamental.
PEDAL DRAWBARS
16'
8'
The 16´ and 8´ Drawbars control the sounds produced by the
Pedal part. The first brown Drawbar produces a composite
tone at 16´ pitch for a deep foundation bass, while the first
white Drawbar produces a composite tone at 8´ pitch, or one
octave higher.
Turn On And Play
40
HARMONIC DRAWBARS™ - continued
DRAWBAR REGISTRATION PATTERNS
Regardless of the size of a pipe organ or its number of stops, all of its voices are
related to four basic families of tone. The four basic families - Flute, Reed, String and
Diapason - can be quickly set up on the Drawbars by relating a pattern or shape to
each family.
Flute family (2 step pattern)
16'
51/3'
8'
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
Diapason family (check mark pattern)
1'
Accompaniment Flute 8´ I .............. 00 8460 000
Accompaniment Flute 8´ II ............. 00 3220 000
Accompaniment Flute 8´ III ........... 00 8600 000
Chorus of Flutes 16´ ....................... 80 8605 002
Orchestral Flute 8´ .......................... 00 3831 000
Piccolo 2´ ........................................ 00 0006 003
Stopped Flute 8´ ............................. 00 5020 000
Tibia 8´ ........................................... 00 7030 000
Tibia 4´ ........................................... 00 0700 030
Tibia (Theater) 16´ .......................... 80 8605 004
Wooden Open Flute 8´ ................... 00 8840 000
51/3'
8'
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
51/3'
11/3'
Bassoon 16´ .................................... 44 7000 000
Clarinet 8´ ...................................... 00 6070 540
English Horn 8´ .............................. 00 3682 210
Flugel Horn 8´ ................................ 00 5777 530
French Horn ................................... 00 7654 321
Kinura 8´ ........................................ 00 0172 786
Oboe 8´ .......................................... 00 4764 210
Trombone 8´ ................................... 01 8777 530
Trumpet 8´...................................... 00 6788 650
Tuba Sonora 8´ ............................... 02 7788 640
Vox Humana 8´ .............................. 00 4720 123
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
11/3'
1'
String family (bow pattern)
1'
16'
51/3'
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
8'
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
Cello 8´ ........................................... 00 3564 534
Dulciana 8´ ..................................... 00 7770 000
Gamba 8´ I ..................................... 00 3484 443
Gemshorn 8´................................... 00 4741 321
Orchestral String 8´......................... 00 1464 321
Salicional 8´ .................................... 00 2453 321
Solo Viola 8´ ................................... 00 2474 341
Solo Violin 8´.................................. 00 3654 324
Viola da Gamba 8´ .......................... 00 2465 432
Violina 4´........................................ 00 0103 064
Violone 16´ ..................................... 26 3431 000
Notice that Drawbar registrations are expressed in number groups of 2, 4 and 3.
This “2-4-3” number formula for Drawbar Registration has been a Hammond
convention since the beginning. It has been found to be the easiest way to convey
a specific setting. The first two numbers correspond to the two brown Drawbars of
either manual. The middle four numbers designate the 8´, 4´, 2⅔´, 2´ Drawbars,
and the remaining three numbers refer to the last three Drawbars.
*#1
8'
Accomp. Diapason 8´..................... 00 8874 210
Chorus Diapason 8´ ........................ 00 8686 310
Diapason 8´ .................................... 00 7785 321
Echo Diapason 8´ ........................... 00 4434 210
Harmonic Diapason 16´ ................. 85 8524 100
Harmonic Diapason 8´ ................... 00 8877 760
Harmonic Diapason 4´ ................... 00 0606 045
Horn Diapason 8´ ........................... 00 8887 480
Open Diapason 8´ .......................... 01 8866 430
Solo Diapason ................................. 01 8855 331
Wood Diapason 8´ .......................... 00 7754 321
Reed family (triangle pattern)
16'
16'
41
MODERN DRAWBAR REGISTRATIONS
The Drawbar registration patterns shown on the previous page are intended to
simulate the four basic families of tone found on a classical pipe organ, since this
was the original intention of the Hammond Organ. Later on, as the Hammond
Organ began to be used in Jazz, Pop and Rock music, other sounds became identified
with the “Hammond Sound.” The figures below illustrate some of these modern
registrations.
Jazz
16'
Bluesy
51/3'
8'
4'
2'
22/3'
ON
ON
13/5'
ON
11/3'
1'
51/3'
8'
51/3'
8'
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
8'
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
ON
Groovy & Funky
16'
16'
Max Power
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
16'
51/3'
SQUABBLE (“Erroll Garner” Registration)
16'
51/3'
8'
4'
22/3'
2'
13/5'
11/3'
1'
APPLICATION OF PERCUSSION
When Percussion is used, the sound of the 1´
Drawbar is cancelled just as it is on vintage
organs (B-3/C-3, etc.). Some jazz organists have
taken advantage of this idiosyncrasy by keeping
the 1’ Drawbar pulled out and turning Percussion
“ON” and “OFF” while playing. The result is an
instantaneous registration change with a single
motion.
Turn On And Play
42
HARMONIC DRAWBARS™ - continued
DRAWBARS (Vx)
16´
"
X
4´
8´
X
X
2´
X
III
II
X
X
IV
— X ­ X
XX
XX
X
at Middle “C”
16´
8´
Oscillators
4´
Filter
2´
to output
The type of British combo organ replicated
by the “Vx” ORGAN Type had Drawbartype controls, but they functioned differently
from Hammond Harmonic Drawbars.
The first four Drawbars control individual
pitches, while the next three are “Mixture”
Drawbars which cause multiple pitches
to sound. “II,” “III” and “IV” refer to
the number of pitches represented by that
Drawbar.
The last two Drawbars control the type of
tone produced by the first seven Drawbars.
The “
” Drawbar causes mellow tones
to sound while the “
” Drawbar causes
brighter and more harmonically complex
tones to sound.
NOTE: The first seven Drawbars WILL NOT
sound unless one or both of the right
two Drawbars are also “out.” These two
Drawbars regulate the overall volume
as well as timbre of the total Drawbar
registration, and can be used separately
or together.
II
III
IV
Last
DRAWBAR COLORS
For the Vx, Farf, Ace and Pipe Organ Types, the
Drawbar icons in the display will change color
according to the sound registered for each
Drawbar.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
XX
X
XX
X
XX
X
16´
16´
16´
8´
Oscillators
FOOTAGE INDICATOR
The last manipulated Drawbar will be shown in
the “Drawbar Registration” dialog box or the PLAY
Mode for the ORGAN Section.
Strings
8´IV
16´
4´
2´
III
8´
II
Strings 8´
Strin
Trumpet 8´
Bass 16´
Clarinet
Trumpet 8´
Strings
16´
Oboe 8´8´
Piccolo Strin
4´
Flute 16´
16´
Flute 8´
8´
Sax 8´
Bass
Flute
Flute 4´Flute 4´
"
"
"
Oscillators
Oscillators
FOOTAGE
“Footage” is a term inherited from the pipe organ.
It is used to designate the pitch at which a
particular organ stop will sound. The number
refers to the length of pipe necessary to produce
the lowest note of that particular stop.
For example, if a stop is marked “8’” it means that
the lowest note on a standard 5-octave organ
keyboard “C” will require a pipe 8 feet long.
4´
8´
8´
2´
II
III
IV
4´
4´
X
XX
X
X
XX
XX
X
XX
X
XX—
X ­ X
XXX
XX
at
at Middle
Middle ““
Filters
Filters
Flute16´
Bass 16´
Bass 16´
Strings
16´
Flute
8´
Flute 8´
Clarinet
Oboe 8´8´
Filter
Sax 8´ 8´
Trumpet
Trumpet
Strings 8´8´
Strings 8´
Flute 4´
Flute 4´4´
Piccolo
Strings 4´
4´
Strings
at Middle “C
to output
to output
to output
43
DRAWBARS (Farf, Ace)
Farf
Strings 8´
Strings 4´
Trumpet 8´
Piccolo 4´
Strings 16´
Oboe 8´
Flute 4´
Bass 16´
Flute 8´
"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TABLET
at Middle “C”
Filters
Bass 16´
16´
X
The figures to the left follow the layout of the
Italian “Combo Compact” and the “TOP
7” combo organs, which used rocker-type
tilt tablets rather than Drawbars to turn
voices “ON” and “OFF.” On the SKX PRO,
the Drawbars are used to control the same
sounds.
To replicate the effect of tablets, simply pull
the Drawbar(s) representing the tone(s) you
want “out” all the way. Or, you can create
shadings of tones by using the Drawbars in
the more traditional fashion.
The word “tablet” refers to a tilting or “rocker”-type
control used on many analog organs to turn voices
“ON” and “OFF” as well as to add effects (see figure
below).
Strings 16´
Flute 8´
Oscillators
Oboe 8´
8´
Trumpet 8´
to output
Strings 8´
Flute 4´
4´
Piccolo 4´
Strings 4´
Ace
Strings 8´
Strings 4´
Bass 16´
Clarinet 8´
Trumpet 8´
Flute 16´
Flute 8´
Sax 8´
Flute 4´
"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
at Middle “C”
Filters
Flute16´
16´
X
Bass 16´
Flute 8´
Oscillators
8´
Clarinet 8´
Sax 8´
to output
Trumpet 8´
Strings 8´
4´
Flute 4´
Strings 4´
Turn On And Play
44
HARMONIC DRAWBARS™ - continued
DRAWBARS (Pipe)
F1: Classic
UPPER:
LOWER:
PEDAL:
Open
Viole
Bourdon Diapason Gedeckt Celeste
16´
8´
8´
II
Principal Principal Melodia
16´
8´
8´
Sub Bass 16´
+
Gedeckt 8´
Rohr
Flute
8´
Octave
4´
Flauto
Dolce
4´
Flute
2´
Prestant
4´
Flute
4´
Super
Octave
2´
Mixture Hautbois
8´
III
Mixture
IV
Trompette
8´
Diapason 8´
+
Flute 4´
F2: Theatre 1
UPPER:
LOWER:
PEDAL:
Style “D” Tibia
Tibia
Vox
Clausa Humana Trumpet Clausa
8´
16´
8´
8´
Style “D” Open
Trumpet Diapason Clarinet
8´
8´
8´
Tibia 16´
+
Flute 8´
Clarinet
8´
Viol
d’Orch
8´
Flute
8´
Viol
Vox
Tibia
d’Orch Humana Clausa
8´
8´
4´
Tibia
Clausa
2´
Open
Vox
Vox
Tibia
Humana Diapason Clausa Humana
4´
4´
8´
4´
LOWER:
Brass
Viol
Trumpet Diapason Clarinet Celeste
8´
8´
8´
8´
Vox
Tibia
Clarinet Humana Clausa
8´
8´
4´
Oboe
8´
Flute
8´
Tibia
Clausa
22⁄3´
Vox
Viol
Humana Celeste
8´
4´
NOTE: The labels “F1,” “F2” etc., refer to Custom
Pipes.
NOTE: The digital Leslie is not available on
the Pipe Voices. However, the Vibrato/
Chorus feature becomes a pipe organ
Tremulant when the PIPE Organ Type is
selected.
Tibia
Clausa
2´
Flute
4´
NOTE: When “Theatre 1” or “Theatre 2”is
activated, the Drawbars will function
similar to tablets on a theatre organ
console.
F3: Theatre 2
Tibia
Brass
English
Tibia
Clausa Post Horn Trumpet Clausa
16´
8´
16´
8´
NOTE: Wh e n “Cl a s s i c ” i s a c t i vate d, t h e
Drawbars will function in a manner
similar to drawstops on a traditional
pipe organ - pulling a Drawbar “out”
will turn the associated Pipe Voice “ON”
while pushing the Drawbar “in” will turn
the Pipe Voice “OFF.” The Pipe Voices do
not have gradations of volume - they are
either “ON” or “OFF.”
The Theatre 1 and Theatre 2 PIPE settings
provide a complement of organ stops
characteristic of a theatre or “cinema” organ.
“Theatre 1” is a stop complement similar to
a Wurlitzer “Style 210” while “Theatre 2”
is derived from the stops from a Wurlitzer
“Style 260 Special,” including English Post
Horn. The figures on the left show the stop
complements for the Theatre 1 and Theatre
2 Custom Pipe sets.
Diapason 8´
+
Flute 4´
UPPER:
When using the Pipe Organ, the stops
are registered through the Drawbars. The
Classic type follows the classic organ layout
left to right as follows: Flue, Mixture and
Reed.
On the UPPER and LOWER Parts, each
Drawbar corresponds with a pipe organ
rank or stop.
On the PEDAL part, two stops sound with
one Drawbar (Complex Stop).
STOP
A single voice or sound on a pipe organ is referred
to as a “Stop” due to the fact that air flow is “stopped”
(or started) by manipulating the individual controls
which turn sounds “ON” or “OFF.”
PEDAL:
Tibia 16´
+
Flute 8´
*#1
Diapason 8´
+
Flute 4´
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
45
ORGAN SECTION OPERATION
MATCHING THE REGISTRATION TO THE DRAWBAR SETTING
Physical Drawbars
Blink
Physical Drawbars
not equal
equal
Sounding Registration
Sounding Registration
Press and Hold
When you recall an ORGAN Patch, the Drawbar registration of the Recorded Patch
is heard, instead of the physical Drawbar setting. If you move any Drawbar, its
position takes precedence over the Recorded registration, although the Patch is not
changed.
If you want to switch to the physical Drawbar setting immediately, Press and Hold
the [ORGAN SOLO] button until the button LED blinks then release it. The
physical registration now becomes “current.”
SHOWING CURRENT SETTINGS
When you are in PLAY Mode, a page similar to the one shown at left will display if
the ORGAN Section only is selected via the [ALLOCATE] button or by repeatedly
touching the [PLAY] button.
NOTE: The MANUAL feature is explained in more detail on page 29.
Turn On And Play
46
USING PIANO AND ENSEMBLE PATCHES
The PIANO and ENSEMBLE Sections allow you to play various instrumental and vocal sounds such
as Piano, Strings, Trumpet, Choir, etc. This is explained in more detail starting below.
ALLOCATING THE SECTION TO THE KEYBOARD
To play a PIANO or ENSEMBLE Patch on the UPPER
keyboard, simply press the [PIANO] or [ENSEMBLE]
button in the [ALLOCATE] button group. The LED will
light red and the PIANO or ENSEMBLE Section in the
display will be highlighted.
NOTE: See page 54 for instructions on allocating a Section
to another Keyboard.
PLAY Mode (General)
RECALLING A PATCH
For this example, recall “EP Tine Mk2”
① SELECT A Category
Select a Voice Category from the PIANO or ENSEMBLE
Section. For this example, press the [E. PIANO] button in the
PIANO Category. The display will show the Patch List for the
selected category.
USING THE “OTHER” PATCH Category
Both the PIANO and ENSEMBLE Sections have a category
called [OTHER]. These include various groups of Patches not
represented by buttons on the Control Panel.
To select a Patch in the [OTHER] Category:
1. Press the [OTHER] button to display the Patch List.
2. Use the PAGE [ ]/[ ] buttons to select among the
available Voice Categories.
3. Use the DIRECTION []/[] buttons to select a Voice
from the selected Category. Press [ENTER] to select the
Patch you wish.
② Select the Patch
Use the [VALUE] knob to scroll through the Patch List.
NOTE: You can also use the PAGE []/[] buttons to scroll through
the Patch List.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
47
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
Use the [VOLUME] knob in the PIANO or ENSEMBLE
Section to adjust the volume of the selected Section. For this
example, use the [VOLUME] knob in the PIANO Section.
NOTE: You can also adjust the volume of the PIANO and ENSEMBLE
Sections in the PLAY screen by moving the cursor to “VOL”
(right side of screen) and using the [VALUE] knob.
NOTE: The word “MANUAL” is explained in more detail on page
29.
ADJUST THE VELOCITY SENSITIVITY
Use the DIRECTION buttons to move the cursor to “VEL,”
and use the [VALUE] knob to select the Velocity Curve. The
setting range is “Off” and “1” to “4.”
“Off” is standard organ touch - the notes sound at the same
volume regardless of a light or heavy key pressure. “1” is the
most exaggerated velocity curve while “4” is a gentler curve. “2”
and “3” are curves in between.
NOTE: The Velocity setting will vary from Patch to Patch.
CHANGING THE OCTAVE
To change the Octave of the entire UPPER Keyboard (all
Sections), press the OCTAVE [UP] or [DOWN] button. The
display will show the current Octave setting.
NOTE: You can select “-2” (up to two octaves down) through +2” (up
to two octaves up).
To change the Octave for the PIANO Section only, use the
DIRECTION buttons to move the cursor to “PLAY Mode
- PIANO Section - OCTAVE” and use the [VALUE] knob to
change the Octave. The display will show the current Octave
setting.
NOTE: You can select “-2” (up to two octaves down) through +2” (up
to two octaves up).
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PIANO AND ENSEMBLE
The PIANO and ENSEMBLE Sections contain the same voices; however,
to make registration of certain types of sounds easier, the inbuilt voices
are separated into PIANO and ENSEMBLE Sections. The PIANO Section
consists of Category buttons appropriate for keyboard and other
Percussion voices, while the ENSEMBLE Section consists of voices such
as Strings, Choir, Wind instruments, Synth voices and other primarily
instrumental and vocal sounds. However, all inbuilt voices can be played
from either the PIANO or ENSEMBLE Categories - if desired, the PIANO
Section can play Strings, the ENSEMBLE Category can play Electric Piano,
and so on.
Turn On And Play
48
USING MONO SYNTH PATCHES
MONO SYNTH Patches are explained in detail starting below.
ALLOCATING THE SECTION TO THE KEYBOARD
If the LED on the [SYNTH] button in the
[ALLOCATE] button group is not “red,”
press the [SYNTH] button. The LED will
light red.
NOTE: If only the MONO SYNTH Section is active
(no other [ALLOCATE] buttons lit), the
PLAY Mode will display only the MONO
SYNTH Parameters.
NOTE: S e e p a g e 5 4 f o r i n s t r u c t i o n s o n
allocating a Section to another Keyboard.
PLAY Mode (Mono Synth)
RECALLING A PATCH
For this example, recall MONO SYNTH Patch F048 (“4th Saw Ld”).
①
MOVE THE CURSOR TO THE MONO SYNTH PATCH NUMBER
PLAY Mode (General)
②
PLAY Mode (Mono Synth)
Use the DIRECTION buttons to move
the cursor to the MONO SYNTH Patch
Number.
OPEN THE PATCH LIST
The Patch List allows you to scroll through the Patches quickly to
find the Patch you want.
With the cursor highlighting the Patch Number, press [ENTER]
to open the Patch List. You will see a screen similar to the one
shown at the left.
③
SELECT THE PATCH
Use the [VALUE] knob to scroll through the Patch List.
For this example, when you have located Patch F048 (“4th Saw
Ld”), press either the [PLAY] or [ENTER] button to return from
Patch List to PLAY Mode.
NOTE: You can also use the PAGE []/[] buttons to scroll through the
Patch List.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
49
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
Use the [VOLUME] knob in the MONO SYNTH Section to
adjust the volume.
NOTE: You can also adjust the volume of the MONO SYNTH Section
in the PLAY screen by moving the cursor to “VOL” (right side of
screen) and turning the [VALUE] knob.
NOTE: The word “MANUAL” is explained in more detail on page 29.
CHANGING THE OCTAVE
To change the Octave of the entire UPPER Keyboard (all
Sections), press the OCTAVE [UP] or [DOWN] button. The
display will show the current Octave setting.
NOTE: You can select “-2” (up to two octaves down) through +2” (up to
two octaves up).
To change the Octave for the MONO SYNTH Section only, use
the DIRECTION buttons to move the cursor to “PLAY Mode
- MONO SYNTH Section - OCTAVE” and use the [VALUE]
knob to change the Octave. The display will show the current
Octave setting.
NOTE: You can select “-2” (up to two octaves down) through +2” (up to
two octaves up).
To change the Octave of the Oscillator, press the OCTAVE [UP]
or [DOWN] buttons in the MONO SYNTH Section. The
display will show the current Octave setting.
NOTE: You can select “-2” (up to two octaves down) through +2” (up to
two octaves up).
Turn On And Play
50
CREATING A MONO SYNTH PATCH
These pages show an example of how to create a MONO SYNTH Patch.
SELECT [MANUAL]
Normally, one of the [FAVORITE] buttons is “ON” (LED lit), indicating that a
Combination has been selected. However, if you want to deselect Combinations and
use the front panel controls entirely to control the sound, turn the [MANUAL] button
“ON.” The [FAVORITE] buttons will all turn “OFF” and all sounds and features of
the SKX PRO will be controlled by the front panel controls as well as by the Advanced
Feature settings from the Menus.
INITIALIZE “MANUAL”
Some Menu Parameters may not be set the way you wish even if [MANUAL] is selected.
If you encounter this, you can initialize the MANUAL Parameters (P. 29).
ALLOCATE THE SECTION TO THE KEYBOARD
Press the [SYNTH] button in the [ALLOCATE] button group “ON.” The LED will
light and the SYNTH Section will play from the UPPER keyboard.
NOTE: Allocating the Section to the other keyboard  P. 54
LOCATE THE MONO SYNTH CONTROLS
Use the controls in the MONO SYNTH portion of the Control
Panel to create a MONO SYNTH Patch.
NOTE: For maximum ease of operation, set the MONO SYNTH knobs
and slider controls in the positions shown on the illustration at
left.
ADJUST THE VOLUME
Use the [VOLUME] knob in the MONO SYNTH Section to adjust the volume of the
MONO SYNTH. Turn to the right to increase the volume and to the left to decrease
the volume.
CHANGING THE OCTAVE
To change the Octave for the MONO SYNTH Section only, use the DIRECTION
buttons to move the cursor to “PLAY Mode - MONO SYNTH Section - OCTAVE”
and use the [VALUE] knob to change the Octave. The display will show the current
Octave setting.
To change the Octave of the Oscillator, press the OCTAVE [UP] or [DOWN] buttons in
the MONO SYNTH Section. The display will show the current Octave setting.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
51
SELECT AN OSCILLATOR
SELECT THE WAVEFORM (OSCILLATOR TYPE)
Use the [OSC TYPE] button to select the basic waveform.
ADJUST THE WAVEFORM (MODIFY)
Use the [PITCH] and [DEPTH] sliders to modify the Pitch and Depth of the
waveform you have selected.
NOTE: The Oscillator Types are explained in more detail on page 53.
SLIDE THE PITCH (PORTAMENTO)
Use the PORTAMENTO [RATE] knob to adjust the rate of the Portamento.
NOTE: In order to hear the PORTAMENTO effect, both the [PORTAMENTO] button and the
Portamento Patch Parameter must be “ON.”
PORTAMENTO
“Portamento” allows you to slide smoothly from
one note to another. It is often used in vocal
performances or on instruments such as violin or
trombone.
ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS (FILTER)
❶ [CUTOFF] knob
❶
❷
This allows you to adjust the Cutoff Frequency of the filter, making the sound either
brighter or more mellow.
❷ [RESONANCE] knob
This allows you to add coloration to the sound by emphasizing the Cutoff Frequency.
❸ [EG DEPTH] knob
This allows you to adjust how the Cutoff Frequency is modulated by the Pitch &
Filter Envelope.
❸
CHANGING THE SOUND OVER TIME (ENVELOPE)
The Envelope Generator allow you to change the sound over time.
Amplitude......................... Adjust the [AMPLITUDE] Envelope.
Filter .................................... Adjust the [PITCH&FILTER] Envelope, and set the changing depth ([EG
DEPTH]) in the FILTER group.
Pitch..................................... Adjust the [PITCH&FILTER] Envelope, and set the changing depth ([PITCH
EG DEPTH]) in the Patch Parameters.
❶ [ATTACK] slider
❶
❷
❸
❹
❶
❷
❸
❹
This allows you to adjust the rate at which the value rises from zero to maximum,
beginning when a key is first pressed.
❷ [DECAY] slider
This allows you to adjust the rate at which the value changes from the Attack level to
the Sustain level.
❸ [SUSTAIN] slider
This allows you to adjust the final level when a key is depressed and held.
❹ [RELEASE] slider
This allows you to adjust the rate at which the value decays to zero when a key is
released.
ADDING PERIODIC CHANGING (LFO)
Use the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) to add periodic audio effects such as Vibrato
or Tremolo.
NOTE: In the default state, you can use the [MODULATION] wheel to control the LFO.
Also, you can change various characteristics of the LFO such as Waveform, etc.
See the Owner's Manual for more details.
Turn On And Play
52
CREATING A MONO SYNTH PATCH
ADDING EFFECTS
You can add Multi Effects such as Chorus, Delay, Overdrive, etc., to the MONO
SYNTH sound. This is explained in more detail under “Setting the Parameters” “Mono Synth.”
SHOWING CURRENT SETTINGS
When you are in PLAY Mode, a page similar to the one shown at
left will display if the MONO SYNTH Section only is selected via
the [ALLOCATE] button or by repeatedly touching the [PLAY]
button.
NOTE: The MANUAL feature is explained in more detail on page 29.
WHAT IS AN “OSCILLATOR?”
An Oscillator is the basic sound-producing unit of a synthesizer. There are several
different types which produce different waveforms having different harmonic
structures. These in turn can be manipulated in various ways to produce a wide
variety of different musical effects.
The MONO SYNTH on the SKX PRO follows the pattern of classic analog
synthesizers. “Mono” is an abbreviation for “Monophonic,” meaning that this Voice
Section plays one note at a time. If multiple notes are played on the keyboard, only
one note will sound. The Oscillator types available on the SKX PRO are explained
starting on the next page.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
53
O S C I L L AT O R T Y P E S A N D
CHARACTERISTICS
Sync
OSC2
The SKX PRO has 6 audio oscillator settings which can be
manipulated to produce a wide variety of tones. These are
explained starting below.
OSC1
Duo
This setting utilizes two Oscillators which synchronize against
each other to produce overtone effects.
OSC1
Parameter
OSC2
OSC1 PITCH
MOD DEPTH
MOD
SOURCE
This setting utilizes two different pitched Oscillators. OSC1
sounds at “true pitch,” while OSC2 can be transposed up or
down by one (1) octave in half-step increments. If the OSC2
LEVEL is set to “0,” only OSC1 will sound.
This Oscillator type is useful for Bass, Lead and “chord” effects.
Parameter
Control
Description
PITCH
Shift the OSC2 pitch (-12 ~ 0 ~ +12 by semitones)
OSC2 PITCH
OSC2 VOLUME DEPTH Volume of the OSC2 (0 ~ 127)
[TYPE] + Waveform of the OSC1 (Sawtooth, Square, Saw+Sqr)
OSC1 WAVE
OSC2 WAVE
PITCH
[TYPE] +
DEPTH
Waveform of the OSC2 (same as above)
Unison
OSCs
Control
PITCH
DEPTH
[TYPE] +
DEPTH
FM
OSC2
Parameter
Control
PITCH
DEPTH
[TYPE] +
PITCH
UNISON WAVE [TYPE] +
DEPTH
DETUNE
NUMBER
OSC1 WAVE
Description
Detune depth (0 ~ 127)
Numbers of Oscillators (1 ~ 7)
Waveform of the OSC1 (Sawtooth, Square, Saw+Sqr)
Control
OSC2 PITCH PITCH
MOD DEPTH DEPTH
[TYPE] +
FEEDBACK
Description
Multiply of the OSC2 (0.5, 1 ~ 16)
Modulation depth OSC2 to OSC1 (0 ~ 127)
Feedback Level (Off, Half, Full)
DEPTH
Noise
OSC
Waveform of the OSC2 (same as above)
This setting creates unpitched sounds or “noise.” The sound
changes from “noise” to “random pitched tones” by controlling
the sampling rate.
A high sampling rate creates “seashore” type effects, a slightly
lower rate yields a “noisy percussion,” and a still lower rate
creates effcts suggestive of a “retro sience fiction movie.”
Pulse
OSC
A Pulse (or rectangular) waveform has a variable width known
as the “duty cycle.” The sound can be modified by changing
the pulse width or duty cycle. For example, a duty cycle of
50% will produce a clarinet-like sound while a duty cycle of
6% will yield a bright, brass-like tone quality.
Parameter
OSC1
This setting utilizes two Oscillators or “operators.” OSC1 is
is the “carrier tone” and OSC2 is the “modulating tone. You
can use this to create both “harmonic” and “inharmonic” tonal
effects.
Adjusting the OSC2 pitch down ctreates wind-instrument
sounds such as flute, brass,etc., while adjust the OSC2 pitch up
is suitable for bell-like or “metallic” tones.
Setting the FB (feedback) at “Half ” allows you to create stringtype tones while “Full” is useful for unpitched or “noisy” tones.
Parameter
This setting utilizes from one to seven Oscillators, one of which
can be detuned against the other. It can be used for celeste,
chorus, or other purposely “out-of-tune” effects.
Description
Detune depth of the OSC1 (0 ~ 127)
Modulation depth of the OSC1 (0 ~ 127)
Modulating source (Pitch EG, LFO, Note)
Control
PULSE WIDTH PITCH
MOD DEPTH DEPTH
MOD SOURCE [TYPE] +
Description
Parameter
Control
SMPL FREQ PITCH
MOD DEPTH DEPTH
NOISE TYPE [TYPE] +
MOD
SOURCE
PITCH
[TYPE] +
DEPTH
Description
Sampling Rate (0 ~ 127)
Modulation depth to the sampling rate (0 ~ 127)
Noise color (Red, Pink, White)
Modulating source (Pitch EG, LFO, Note)
Pulse Width (0 ~ 127 as 50 ~ 90 [%])
Depth of the Pulse Width Modulation (0 ~ 127)
Modulating source (Pitch EG, LFO, Note)
DEPTH
Turn On And Play
54
COMBINING THE SECTIONS AND PARTS
You can play in a variety of different styles by allocating the 4 Sections to each
keyboard. This is explained in more detail starting below.
SECTIONS AND KEYBOARDS
Keyboards
Upper
Allocate Switches
or, Swell
UPPER
LOWER
Lower
PEDAL
Sections
or, Great
Organ
U/L/P
Piano
Ens.
Mono
Synth
The SKX PRO contains 4 Sections - ORGAN, PIANO, ENSEMBLE and MONO
SYNTH. These can be played by turning the [ALLOCATE] button for each Section
“ON.” In addition, the ORGAN Section has 3 Parts - UPPER, LOWER and
PEDAL to replicate the performance of a classic Hammond Organ with two manuals
and pedals.
ALLOCATING THE SECTIONS
UPPER.............. Press the [ALLOCATE] button for the desired Section “ON.” The LED will light red.
LOWER............. Press and Hold the [LOWER] button and press the [ALLOCATE] button for the desired
Section “ON.” The LED will light green.
PEDAL.............. Press and Hold the [PEDAL] button and press the [ALLOCATE] button for the desired
Section “ON.” The LED will light green while the [PEDAL] button is pressed.
The [ORGAN SOLO] button turns all Parts of the Organ Section “ON,” and
turns other Sections “OFF.” This allows you to turn the SKX PRO into a vintage
2-keyboards-and-pedal Hammond Organ instantly with one button press.
CHANGING THE OCTAVE
To change the Octave for each keyboard,
UPPER........Press the OCTAVE [DOWN] or [UP] button.
LOWER ......Press and Hold the [LOWER] button and press the OCTAVE [DOWN] or [UP]
button.
PEDAL........Press and Hold the [PEDAL] button and press the OCTAVE [DOWN] or [UP]
button.
The current Octave setting is shown in the display. The button LEDs on the buttons
will light if the Octave setting is not “0.”
NOTE: You can set the Octave for each section. This is explained in more detail on page
75.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Pedal
[ORGAN] BUTTON LIGHTS ORANGE
The ORGAN Section can be allocated to multiple
keyboards. In this case, the LED in the [ALLOCATE]
button in the ORGAN Section will light orange.
A L L O C AT I N G T W O O R M O R E
SECTIONS TO THE SAME KEYBOARD
Press the desired Section buttons simultaneously.
The above figure shows switching on both PIANO
and ENSEMBLE Sections.
RETURN FROM ORGAN SOLO
If you press the [ORGAN SOLO] button “OFF” after
pressing it to turn it “ON,” the instrument will return
to however it was set before [ORGAN SOLO] was
turned “ON.”
If you record a Combination with the [ORGAN
SOLO] “ON,” the current Sections Allocation will
recorded as [ORGAN SOLO] is at “OFF.”
55
PEDAL TO LOWER
Played
Lower
Sounds
Pedal
"
C
E
C
inverted
"
Lowest
Poly
Chord
The PEDAL TO LOWER feature allows you to play the PEDAL Part from the
LOWER Keyboard.
To engage PEDAL TO LOWER, press the [PEDAL TO LOWER] button so the
LED lights “ON.”
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN “ALLOCATE”
AND “PEDAL TO LOWER”
When you allocate a Section to Lower, it works as
typically keyboard instrument as same as Upper.
The PEDAL TO LOWER features for “sounding bass
note with chord playing.”
You can sounding the Pedal part for lowest note or
root note of the chord, and ranging the Pedal part
for playing by both hands on the keyboard.
NOTE: You can adjust the setting of the PEDAL TO LOWER feature. This is explained in more
detail on page 78.
LOWER TO PEDAL
Sounds
Lower
Played
Pedal
"
"
The LOWER TO PEDAL feature allows you to play the LOWER Part from the
MIDI Pedalboard.
To engage LOWER TO PEDAL, press the [PEDAL TO LOWER] button so the
LED lights “ON.”
PEDAL SUSTAIN
Playing
Duration
The SKX PRO incorporates a feature called Pedal Sustain. When this feature is
active, the Pedal tones will smoothly decay upon release, much in the manner of a
string bass.
To engage PEDAL SUSTAIN, press the [PEDAL SUSTAIN] button so the LED
lights “ON.”
NOTE: You can adjust the condition of the PEDAL SUSTAIN feature. This is explained in more
detail on page 78.
NOTE: The Parameters described on this page
are Combination Parameters, meaning
that different settings can be Recorded
to different Combinations.
Turn On And Play
56
ADJUSTING THE SOUND DURING PERFORMANCE
There are a number of adjustments you can make to the sound during performance.
This is explained in more detail starting below.
❷
❶
❹
❺
❻
❼
❸
REVERB
MASTER EQUALIZER
REVERB (or Reverberation) is the prolongation or persistence
of sound caused by sound bouncing or reflecting off of hard
surfaces such as floors, walls or ceilings. It is measurable by the
interval of time required for the sound to decay to inaudibility
after the source of the sound has been stopped.
The SKX PRO has built-in Digital Reverb which allows you
to simulate several different acoustic profiles representing
different sizes and types of enclosures.
❶ [REVERB ON] button (Com)
This allows you to turn Reverb “ON”(LED lit) and “OFF.”
❷ [REVERB DEPTH] knob (Com)
This allows you to adjust the overall depth of the entire Reverb
effect.
The MASTER EQUALIZER allows you to adjust the overall
tonal quality for all Sections of the entire instrument.
❸ [MASTER EQ ON] button (Sys)
To enable the MASTER EQUALIZER, press the [MASTER
EQ] button “ON.” The LED will light.
NOTE: You can adjust the Reverb Level for the ORGAN, PIANO,
ENSEMBLE and MONO SYNTH Sections separately. This is
explained in more detail on page 77.
You can adjust the MASTER EQUALIZER Parameters by
Pressing and Holding the [MASTER EQ] button and moving
the AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE Slider Controls in the
MONO SYNTH Section (see the illustration at the top of this
page).
[ATTACK] (BASS GAIN) slider (Sys)
[DECAY) (MID FREQUENCY) slider (Sys)
[SUSTAIN] (MID GAIN) slider (Sys)
[RELEASE] (TREBLE GAIN) slider (Sys)
The pop-up screen shown above will display while adjusting
the MASTER EQUALIZER Parameters.
NOTE: You can adjust the Reverb Type for the ORGAN and PIANO/
ENSEMBLE/MONO SYNTH Sections separately. This is
explained in more detail on page 77.
NOTE: These Parameters are marked “Com,” meaning they are
Combination Parameters.
❹
❺
❻
❼
NOTE: You can “shortcut” to the MASTER EQUALIZER FUNCTION
Mode Page to adjust the Parameters in depth by Pressing and
Holding the [MASTER EQ] button (P. 117).
In addition, each Section has an EQUALIZER Page in its
FUNCTION Mode if you wish to adjust the tone quality of
an individual Section (P. 116).
NOTE: This Parameters are marked “Sys, ” meaning they are System
Parameters common to all Combinations and Patches.
You must Record these Parameters if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time the instrument is turned
“ON.” See page143 for instructions on how to do this.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
57
TRANSPOSE, TUNE
These Parameters allows you to shift the musical key and the overall tuning of the entire instrument.
TR ANSPOSING THE ENTIRE MASTER TUNE
This Parameter changes the overall tuning pitch of the entire
KEYBOARD
instrument. The reference pitch is “A=440[Hz].” The selectable
TRANSPOSE will step either up or down six (6) semitones or
half-steps from the center position. This is useful if you have
a piece of music written in one key but which needs to sound
in another key. The TRANSPOSE feature consists of the
[TRANSPOSE] button, plus the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons
to the right of the [TRANSPOSE] button. The [DOWN]
button allows you to transpose lower and the [UP] button
allows you to transpose higher.
range is from “A=430” through “A=450.”
①
LOCATE “MASTER TUNE”
❶
❶ [TRANSPOSE] button
-
1. From the PLAY Mode, press the [MENU/EXIT] button to
enter MENU Mode.
2. Press the [] button two times to locate the SYSTEM
Menu. “SOUND” should be highlighted.
3. Press the [ENTER] button to see the MASTER TUNE
page.
To raise the pitch, press the [UP] button, while holding
down the [TRANSPOSE] button.
To lower the pitch, press the [DOWN] button, while
holding down the [TRANSPOSE] button.
②
SELECT THE VALUE
Use the VALUE Rotary Control to the right to raise the pitch.
Use the VALUE Rotary Control to the left to lower the pitch.
③
RECORD THE SETTING
In the above example, the TRANSPOSE value is set at “+5” if a “C” key is depressed, a note five (5) half-steps higher will
sound (“F”).
When performing this operation, the status of the transposition
is shown in the display. The [TRANSPOSE] LED will light
“ON” if the value is not “0.”
You can Record this setting to be remembered the next time the
power is turned “ON.” To do this:
1. Press the red [RECORD] button from the MASTER
TUNE page. You will see “System” highlighted.
2. Press the [ENTER] button. The MASTER TUNE
Parameter has been Recorded.
NOTE: The MANUAL feature is explained in more detail on page
29.
WHAT IS AFFECTED BY THE TRANSPOSE
FUNCTION?
TRANSPOSE will affect:
1. The internal sounds of the instrument.
2. MIDI IN Note Data.
3. MIDI Note Data sent OUT to the External Zones.
NOTE: Though TRANSPOSE is a System parameter, when the power
to the instrument is turned “OFF,” it resets to 0. And it does
not recorded to a Combination.
④
RETURN TO PLAY MODE
PLAY
NOTE: You can select whether Transpose changes while notes are
being held or when the next note is pressed after releasing
the notes being held.
See thier Owner’s Manual for more details.
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the PLAY Mode.
Turn On And Play
58
RECORDING EXAMPLE: BUNDLE
To Record the current settings to a BUNDLE, do the following:
①
PRESS [RECORD]
④
NAME THE CUSTOM SETTING
Enter the Name.
[Aa1]................. Changes the character type.
[1] - [10] .......... Selects the highlighted character.
[Insert] ............ Inserts a space at the cursor.
[Delete] ........... Deletes a letter at the cursor.
[VALUE]........... Changes the letter at the cursor.
Press the red [ RECORD] button at each Section or
Combination page. The screen shown above will appear.
②
SELECT THE CONTENT
⑤
DECIDE
After you are finished Naming, press the [ENTER] button.
The message shown below will display for approximately 1
second:
NOTE: Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is
displaying.
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the content to Record.
For this example, select Bundle, which Records multiple
contents simultaneously.
NOTE: Combinations, Patches and Voice Sections are explained
starting on pages 73 and 129.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Record, press the [MENU/EXIT] or
[PLAY] button instead of the [ENTER] button.
⑥
RETURN TO PLAY MODE
NOTE: If edits have been made to a Combination or Patch, an “E” will
appear to the right of the CONTENTS icon.
③
SELECT THE NUMBER TO RECORD
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the PLAY Mode.
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
“TO.”
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the number to Record, or use
the numbered [FAVORITE] buttons to type in the number as
shown above and press the [ENTER] button.
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
the [RECORD] icon, and press the [ENTER] button. The
Naming screen will display.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
RECORDING METHOD
Each portion of the SKX PRO is Recorded separately.
Combination Records Combination Parameters
and Voices. Bundle Records Combination
Parameters as well as ORGAN and MONO SYNTH
Patches simultaneously. Patch Records changes
to individual Patches and Custom Records Tone
Wheel Organs, Leslie Cabinets, Pedal Registrations
and Pipe Organs. If you wish to Record the entire
contents of the instrument, you can save them as
a Setup.
59
RECORDING BUNDLES QUICKLY
To make Recording BUNDLEs easier, do the following:
SET THE ACCESS MODE AT
“BUNDLE”
①
②
SET THE MODE AT BUNDLE
LOCATE THE EDIT PAGE
Turn the [VALUE] knob to set the MODE at “Bundle.”
Press the [MENU/EXIT] button
to enter the MENU Mode.
③
RECORD THE CURRENT SETTING
Press the [RECORD] button to open the “RECORD” dialog
box.
Select the SYSTEM page by pressing the
[PAGE] button.
Press the [ENTER] button to Record the
current setting.
Select the FAVORITE icon by pressing the
[] button.
Press the [PLAY] button to return to
the PLAY mode.
The next page explains how to Record and recall your
BUNDLEs.
Press the [ENTER] button. You are now in the
ACCESS FUNCTION Mode Page.
NOTE: See page 140 for a fuller explanation of the ACCESS FUNCTION Mode Page.
Turn On And Play
60
RECORDING BUNDLES QUICKLY - continued
R E CO R D I N G T H E C U R R E N T RECALL A BUNDLE
To recall a BUNDLE you have Recorded, do the following:
SETTINGS TO A BUNDLE
① SELECT THE BANK
You can record up to 100 BUNDLEs from “1-1” to “10-10.”
The first digits are the BANK Number and the last digits are
the BUNDLE Number. The first and last digits are separated
by a hyphen.
①
SELECT THE BANK
Press and Hold the [BANK] button and press a [NUMBER]
button to select a “BANK.”
NOTE: You can skip this step if you want to recall the Bank already
selected (shown following “FAV.” on the display).
Press and Hold the [BANK] button and press a [NUMBER]
button to select a “BANK.”
The LEDs of the [NUMBER] buttons will all flash.
②
SELECT THE NUMBER
NOTE: You can skip this step if you want to record to the Bank already selected (shown following “FAV.” on the display).
The LEDs of the [NUMBER] buttons will all flash.
②
SELECT THE NUMBER
Press a [NUMBER] button to recall the “NUMBER.”
The BANK and NUMBER have been selected and the selected
BUNDLE will be recalled.
Press and Hold the [RECORD] button and press a [NUMBER]
button to record as “NUMBER.” This is where your setting
will be stored.
The NAME dialog box will open.
③
NAME THE BUNDLE
Enter the Name.
[Aa1]................. Changes the character type.
[1] - [10] .......... Selects the highlighted character.
[Insert] ............ Inserts a space at the cursor.
[Delete] ........... Deletes a letter at the cursor.
[VALUE]........... Changes the letter at the cursor.
After you are finished Naming, press the [ENTER] button.
The message shown above will display for approximately 1
second.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
61
USING THE
DISPLAY
62
USING THE DISPLAY
The display has three (3) Modes - PLAY Mode, MENU Mode and FUNCTION Mode.
The next pages explain how to read the display in each Mode.
PLAY Mode
The PLAY Mode allows you to see or
modify the current basic settings such as
Drawbar settings, Combination Numbers,
Patch Numbers and other information.
MENU Mode
The MENU Mode allows you to see the
different FUNCTION Modes where you
can customize the instrument.
FUNCTION Mode
The FUNCTION Mode allows you to
change specific Parameters within each
MENU Mode.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
63
PLAY MODE
The PLAY Mode is the normal performance mode. The information necessary for ordinary
performance will be displayed.
TO LOCATE THIS MODE:
The PLAY Mode is automatically displayed when the instrument is first powered “ON” and the
opening screen disappears. If another mode is displayed, press the [PLAY] button.
PLAY MODES
General
ORGAN Section
MONO SYNTH Section
Zones
OPERATION
Each PLAY Mode allows you to
select the Combinations or Patches
and adjust the Parameters most
frequently used.
The PLAY Modes are selected by the
[PLAY] or PAGE []/[] buttons.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY (GENERAL)
When two or more Sections are “ON,” the Names will be highlighted in the display. If a Section is “OFF” ([ALLOCATE] button
LED not lit), the Name will still display but will be “greyed out.” In addition, Parameters such as Octave, etc., will only display if
their values are different from their default settings.
E: edit
Changed
g from stored settings
g
Octave
Octa
Oc
tave
ta
ve
e
Master
Mast
Ma
ast
ster
e Transpose
er
Tra
rans
ans
nspo
spo
pose
Volume
Volu
Vo
V
lume
lu
me
C bi i Number
Combination
N b and
d Name
N
Favorites Number
Patch Number and Name
(Dims if disabled)
Allocate to the Keyboard
Octave
(UPPER Keyboard)
y
Status of Coupler
p
Upper limit of LOWER TO PEDAL
Octave
(PEDAL keyboard)
keybo
y ard)
Octave
((LOWER
(L
OWER Keyboard)
Ke
eyb
y oard))
Upper
Up
ppe
p r lilimi
limit
mitt of P
mi
PEDAL
EDAL
ED
AL TO
TO LOWER
LOWE
LO
WER
WE
R
Using the Display
64
PLAY MODE - continued
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY (ORGAN Section)
If only the ORGAN Section is used (ORGAN [ALLOCATE] button “ON”), a screen similar to the one below will display.
Octave and
Allocate
Volume
Volu
Vo
lume
lu
me
Patch Number and Name
ORGAN Type
(UPPER
and LOWER Parts))
(
Drawbar Registration
ORGAN Type
((PEDAL
D part)
pa t))
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY (MONO SYNTH Section)
If only the MONO SYNTH Section is used (SYNTH [ALLOCATE] button “ON”), a screen similar to the one below will display.
Patch
Pa
atcch Number
Nu
umb
ber
e aand
nd
dN
Name
a e
am
Various
Vari
Va
ari
riou
ouss Synth
ou
Synth
Sy
ntth Parameters
P ra
Pa
rame
mete
me
mete
ters
rs
NOTE: Many MONO SYNTH parameters are not listed. See page 100 for more details.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
65
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY (ZONES)
To locate this PLAY mode, press the [PLAY] or PAGE[]/[] buttons several times.
Zone Outline
Various Zone Parameters (scrolls by using
DIRECTION []/[] buttons)
The Internal Zones and the External Zones are advanced features for controlling
internal sound engine or external MIDI equipment. See “Combination” of the page
74 for details.
When the [ZONE] Play Page is displayed, you can select whether you want each
External Zone to transmit MIDI data by Press and Hold the [SHIFT] button
and pressing the [PIANO], [ENSEMBLE] or [SYNTH] buttons to turn MIDI
transmission “ON” or “OFF” for each External Zone (see the illustration on the
right).
To allocate a Zone to the LOWER or PEDAL, operating with Press and Hold
[LOWER] or [PEDAL] buttons. For example, to allocate the External Zone 3 to the
PEDAL, Press and Hold both [SHIFT] and [PEDAL], press the [SYNTH] button
and LED lights at green.
EXZ1 EXZ2 EXZ3
APP (APPLICATION) MENU
The APP (Application) Menu allows you to select various Menu Pages quickly or
using special function. To display the APP Menu:
1. Select a PLAY Mode.
2. Press and Release the [≡] button. The following Menu options will display:
INITIALIZE [MANUAL] ...........Initialize the MANUAL Parameters.
EDIT COMBINATION ...............Enter the Combination edit page.
EDIT ORGAN ..............................Enter the Organ edit page.
EDIT PIANO ................................Enter the Piano edit page.
EDIT ENSEMBLE .......................Enter the Ensemble edit page.
EDIT SYNTH................................Enter the Mono Synth edit page.
DELETE COMBINATION.........Delete the selected Combination.
To select an option:
1. Use the DIRECTION []/[] buttons to highlight the option you want.
2. Press the [ENTER] button to select the desired option.
NOTE: The “MANUAL” feature is explained in more detail on page 29.
Using the Display
66
MENU MODE
As explained earlier, the MENU Mode allows you to see the different FUNCTION Modes where you
can customize the instrument.
To locate this mode:
Press the [MENU/EXIT] button.
The MENU Mode has four Pages. Use the PAGE []/[] buttons to scroll through the Pages,
select the item using the DIRECTION buttons, and the [ENTER] button to enter the desired
FUNCTION Mode.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY
Items
Pages
OPERATION IN THIS MODE
Select the item in the page.
Change the page.
Enter the selected FUNCTION Mode.
RETURN TO PLAY MODE.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
67
active and which version of software is currently installed.
Also allows you to update the software.
MENU MODE CONTENTS
PATCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
COMBINATION (P. 74)
This allows you to edit the current Combination.
ORGAN
This allows you to edit the current ORGAN Patch.
PIANO
This allows you to edit the current PIANO Patch.
ENSEMBLE
This allows you to edit the current ENSEMBLE Patch.
SYNTH
This allows you to edit the current MONO SYNTH Patch.
CUSTOM
TONE WHEEL (P. 120)
This allows you to edit the characteristics of the Tone Wheel Organ.
2. PEDAL REG. (P. 123)
This allows you to edit the harmonics used by the Pedal Drawbars of
the Tone Wheel Organ.
3. LESLIE (P. 124)
This allows you to edit the inbuilt digital Leslie.
4. PIPE (P. 126)
This allows you to select and edit each Pipe Organ Stop.
1.
FILE
LOAD (P. 167)
This allows you to Load Setups, Patches or Custom File
from either an external data storage device such as a USB
Flash Drive or the Internal Memory into the instrument.
2. SAVE (P. 166)
This allows you to Save Setups, Patches or Custom Files to
either an external data storage device such as a USB Flash
Drive or the Internal Memory into the instrument.
3. DELETE (P. 168)
This allows you to Delete Setups, Patches or Custom
Files, from either an external data storage device such as
a USB Flash Drive or from the Internal Memory of the
instrument.
4. FORMAT (P. 163)
This allows you to initialize either an external data storage
device such as a USB Flash Drive or the Internal Memory
of the instrument.
1.
SYSTEM
SOUND (P. 130)
This allows you to adjust Master Tune, Transpose, and Master
Equalizer.
2. AUDIO (P. 131)
This allows you to adjust the audio configuration between Voice
Sections and output jacks.
3. CONTROL (P. 132)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters for the various controllers
such as Foot Switch, Expression Pedal, Display and Keyboard.
4. PATCH LOAD (P. 139)
This allows you to select which contents are loaded when a
Combination is selected.
5. FAVORITE (P. 140)
Allows you select and edit Favorites.
6. MIDI (P. 158)
This allows you to adjust MIDI Channels, and various messages for
the MIDI port and the USB MIDI.
7. GLOBAL (P. 142)
This allows you to adjust the Auto Power Off time and select USB
Mass Storage.
8. DELETE (P. 144)
This allows you to delete “U” (User) contents.
9. DEFAULT (P. 145)
This allows you to initialize all or part of the SKX PRO to factory
settings.
10. INFORMATION (P. 146)
This allows you to see which jacks on the Rear Panel are currently
1.
Using the Display
68
FUNCTION MODE
The FUNCTION Mode allows you to see and adjust the various Parameters.
This is explained in more detail starting below.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAY
Section, E(Edited) Mark, Combination/Patch Number and Name.
Level in this mode
Parameter
Value
Cursor
Page
LIST SELECTION
A “ “ shown in a value indicates a
List containing multiple selections is
available.
To see a list of settings for these
Parameters, move the cursor to the
Parameter you wish and press the
[ENTER] button. A pop-up screen will
appear showing the available options.
To select the option you wish, turn the
[VALUE] knob or Press and Hold the
[SHIFT] button and press the [DEC] or
[INC] buttons.
After you have made your selection,
press the [ENTER] button and the popup will close.
OPERATION IN THIS MODE
Adjusts the value.
Selects an item in the page.
Increases/decreases the value by steps
by pressing the [INC] / [DEC] buttons
while holding the [SHIFT] button.
Moves the pages.
Moves up one level in this mode.
Selects the icon in the page.
RETURN TO PLAY MODE.
APP (APPLICATION) MENU
The PLAY Mode and several of the FUNCTION Mode Pages contain an additional APP
Menu which you can use to access various functions quickly.
Press the [≡] button to see the APP Menu for the FUNCTION Modes.
Press and Release the [≡] button to see the APP Menu in PLAY or MANUAL Mode.
To select an item in an APP Menu:
1. Use the []/[] buttons to highlight the option you want.
2. Press and Release the [ENTER] button to select the desired option.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
69
EXAMPLE OF OPERATION
①
GO TO THE MENU MODE
This example will show you how to adjust
the Percussion Decay Time when the
[FAST] button is selected.
Press the [MENU/EXIT] button. The
MENU Mode will appear.
②
MOVE THE PAGE IN THE MENU MODE
Use the PAGE []/[] buttons to select
the different Pages in each Menu.
For this example, the PATCH Edit Menu
is already displayed so it is not necessary to
touch either of the PAGE []/[] buttons.
③
SELECT THE ITEM IN THE PAGE
Use the DIRECTION buttons to select the
item to edit.
For this example, press the [] button to
select “ORGAN.”
Press the [ENTER] button to select each
FUNCTION Mode. For this example,
touch [ENTER] after selecting “ORGAN”
above.
④
MOVE THE PAGE IN THE FUNCTION MODE
Use the PAGE []/[] buttons to select
the individual FUNCTION Mode Page
you want to edit.
For this example, press the [] button three
times to select the PERCUSS (Percussion)
Menu Page.
Using the Display
70
⑤
MOVE THE CURSOR TO THE PARAMETER
Use the DIRECTION buttons to move the
cursor to the Parameter you wish to adjust.
For this example, select “DECAY FAST.”
⑥
CHANGE THE VALUE
Use the [VALUE] knob to change the selected
value. For this example, decrease the value by
turning the [VALUE] knob to the left.
NOTE: You can also change values by using the
[DEC] / [INC] buttons while Press and Hold
the [SHIFT] button.
NOTE: To change other Parameters, repeat steps
1 through 6 above.
⑦
RECORD THE CONTENT
These settings are “temporary,” and will not be
remembered if another Patch or Combination
is selected, or if the instrument is turned
“OFF.”
To Record your settings:
1. Press the red [RECORD] button. You
will see the selected item appear in the
display (“Organ Patch” in this example).
2. Press the [] button two times to select
RECORD icon and press the [ENTER]
button. Your settings have been Recorded.
⑧
RETURN TO PLAY MODE
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the
PLAY Mode.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
71
“SHORTCUTS”
To make programming quicker and easier, many of the buttons on the Control Panel can be used to access the
FUNCTION Mode associated with that button instantaneously. Press and Hold any of the buttons on the
Control Panel automatically “shortcuts” the display to the related FUNCTION Mode.
SHORTCUT EXAMPLE:
LOCATE THE PERCUSSION FUNCTION Mode
Press and Hold
If you wish to edit the Percussion settings, Press and Hold
any of the four Percussion buttons ([ON], [SOFT], [FAST],
or [THIRD]) and the display will immediately show the
Percussion FUNCTION Mode.
NOTE: You can change the Display Shortcut time. This is explained
in more detail on page 141.
IF YOU FREQUENTLY USE A CERTAIN PAGE...
You can assign a frequently-used FUNCTION Mode to one of the [FAVORITE] buttons for immediate access,
even if that particular FUNCTION Mode is not normally accessible via a Shortcut.
REGISTER
①
LOCATE THE PAGE
Press the [MENU/EXIT] button to enter
MENU Mode and use the DIRECTION
and PAGE buttons to locate the specific
FUNCTION Mode you want.
②
SET THE FAVORITE NUMBER TO LOAD THE PAGE
Press and Hold
Press
1. Touch and Hold the [SHIFT] and
[RECORD] buttons together.
2. While holding the two buttons, touch
any of the numbered [FAVORITE]
buttons. The display will show,
“Recording Assign” for approximately 1
second.
DISPLAY THE RECORDED PAGE
Press
Press and Hold
To display the Recorded Page, Press and
Hold the [SHIFT] button and press the
numbered [FAVORITE] button.
Using the Display
72
LOCKING THE DISPLAY
You can Lock the display in order to prevent accidental changes during live performance, or when more than one musician will be using the same instrument.
To Lock the display, do the following:
1. With the SKX PRO power “OFF,” Press and Hold the two
PAGE [][] buttons.
2. While holding the PAGE buttons, turn the SKX PRO
power “ON.” Continue to hold the PAGE buttons until
“Confirming Display Locked/Unlocked” is shown in the
display.
After approximately 5 seconds, “Display Locked” will show
at the bottom of the display. You can then release the PAGE
buttons.
To Unlock the display, follow the above two steps. You will see
“Display Unlocked” in the display.
When the display is Locked:
1. [MENU/EXIT] is disabled.
2. [RECORD] is disabled.
3. The “Shortcut” feature is disabled.
4. Combinations and Patches can still be recalled.
NOTE: If the display is Locked, you will see a message in the display
when the instrument is first turned “ON:” “Loading...Display
Locked.”
NOTE: If the display is Locked, holding the red [RECORD] button
and applying power will not Unlock it. Follow the procedure
described above to Unlock the display.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
73
EDITING
PARAMETERS
As explained previously, the display on the SKX PRO has three (3) Modes - PLAY Mode, MENU Mode and FUNCTION
Mode. This chapter explains how to use FUNCTION Mode to adjust Parameters to customize the instrument.
Editing Parameters
74
COMBINATION
As explained previously, the four sound-producing Sections of the SKX PRO - ORGAN, PIANO, ENSEMBLE and
MONO SYNTH - along with other Parameters such as Control Panel settings, etc., can be combined into a single
unit called a Combination. This FUNCTION Mode allows you to adjust the Combination Parameters which are
included in a Combination.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - PATCH - COMBI - [ENTER]
FAVORITES
1
2
COMBINATION
ORGAN
3
U003
Allocation
Section
“Pelican Dance”
Sections and Patches
ORGAN: U012 All Nine
LOWER keyboard
PIANO:
ENS:
SYNTH:
REVERB:
ExZ1:
ExZ2:
ExZ3:
PEDALboard
Section
U034 Clav BC
U056 Finger Bs
U078 Funny
Hall 1
Sampler
Synth
Processor
Section
MONO SYNTH
Section
SETTING (P. 75)
This allows you to adjust the basic Parameters such as Patch or Volume for each
Section.
CONTROL (P. 76)
This allows you to select whether each Voice Section receives a Controller value.
REVERB (P. 77)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters for the Reverb.
INTERNAL ZONES (P. 78)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters for the Keyboard Channels for each Section.
EXTERNAL ZONES (P. 78)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters for controlling external MIDI equipment.
APP (APPLICATION) MENU
The APP (Application) Menu allows you to select various Menu Pages quickly. To
display the APP Menu:
1. Select the COMBINATION FUNCTION Mode.
2. Press and Release the [≡] button. The Menu option shown to the right will
display:
INITIALIZE COMBINATION .. Initialize all the Combination Parameters in the current Combination.
REGISTER PAGE TO FAV ........Register the current Page to a Favorite.
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
U034
“Clav BC”
U056
“Finger Bs”
Patches
EDITING PAGES AND PARAMETERS
*#1
and
ENSEMBLE
MIDI Equipment
To select an option:
1. Use the []/[] buttons to highlight the option you want.
2. Press the [ENTER] button to select the desired option.
Patches
PIANO
UPPER
LOWER
PEDAL
UPPER keyboard
U012
“All Nine”
U078
“Funny”
Patches
75
SETTING
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
These Pages allow you to adjust the basic Parameters such as Patch or Volume for
each Section.
❶ PATCH
Setting Range: B001 ~ B100 (Bundle)
F001 ~ F100, U001 ~ U100 (Organ / Mono Synth)
F001 ~ F300, U001 ~ U400 (Piano / Ensemble)
This allows you to select Patch Numbers for the currently selected Combination.
❷ ALLOC (Allocate)
Settings: Off, Upper, Lower, Pedal
This allows you to assign the Sections to each Keyboard.
NOTE: This Parameter is linked to the [ALLOCATE] buttons on the Control Panel.
❸ VOL (Volume)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the Volume of the selected Section.
❹ VEL (Velocity Curve)
Setting Range: Off, 1 ~ 4
This allows you to select how the selected Section will respond to key velocity.
“Off” is standard organ touch - the notes play at a fixed velocity (“100”) regardless of
a light or heavy key pressure. “1” is the most exaggerated velocity curve while “4” is
a gentler curve. “2” and “3” are curves in between.
❺ OCT (Octave)
Setting Range: -2 ~ ±0 ~ +2
This allows you to select the Octave or pitch at which the selected Section will sound.
At “0” the selected Section will sound at unison or actual pitch. “-2” will sound two
octaves lower and “+2” will sound two octaves higher.
NOTE: The actual sounding octave will be the sum of this Parameter plus the “Octave”
setting in the Internal Zones (Keyboards). See page 78 for more details.
❻ XPOSE (Transpose)
Setting Range: -6 ~ ±0 ~ +6
This allows you to shift the musical key of the selected Section.
NOTE: This Parameter can be Saved as part of a Combination (the [TRANSPOSE] function
controlled by the buttons on the Control Panel transposes the entire instrument and
its setting is not Saved).
❼ KEY LO (Key Range Low)
❽ KEY HI (Key Range High)
Setting Range: -2C ~ 8G
These two Parameters allow you to set the Low and High note ranges for the selected
Section.
Editing Parameters
76
COMBINATION - continued
CONTROL
❶
❷
❸
❹
This Page allows you to select which Parameters of each Voice Section will be
Recorded as part of a Combination.
❶ EXPRESSION MINIMUM LEVEL
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the Minimum volume when the Expression Pedal is
“closed” or set at its minimum position. At “0” no sound will be heard.
❷ DAMPER
This allows you to adjust whether or not a Section will receive Damper information.
Off ..................... A connected Damper Pedal will not affect the selected Section.
On...................... A connected Damper Pedal will sustain or “damp” the selected Section.
❸ PITCH BEND
This allows you to adjust the range of the [PITCH BEND] wheel.
Patch ................ A separate Pitch Bend Range is set for each Voice Section.
0 ~ 12 ............... A Pitch Bend Range setting is applied to all Voice Sections universally.
❹ MODULATION
This allows you to select the function for the [MODULATION] wheel for each
Section.
Off ..................... No function.
Mod .................. (ORGAN Section excluded) Adds Modulation to the selected Section.
Les ..................... (ORGAN Section only) Controls the speed of the Leslie.
OD ..................... Controls the amount of Overdrive.
MFX1 ................ Controls the amount of the Multi Effects 1 setting.
MFX2 ................ Controls the amount of the Multi Effects 2 setting.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
LESLIE SPEED
When “Les” is selected as a function for the
Modulation Wheel, the speed of the digital Leslie
rotors can be varied continuously. This means that
when the Wheel is all the way forward the digital
Leslie will be in Fast Mode and Slow Mode will
result when the Wheel is all the way back; but if
the Wheel is in an intermediate position the digital
Leslie rotors will be at an intermediate speed in
accordance with the position of the Wheel. The
speed will gradually increase when the Wheel is
pushed forward and decrease when the Wheel is
moved back. This greatly increases the versatility
of the in-built digital Leslie.
77
REVERB
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the [REVERB] button.
❶
❷
❸
❼
❾
⓫
❹
❽
❿
⓬
❺
❻
This Page allows you to select the REVERB effect for each Section.
❶ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to turn REVERB “ON” or “OFF.”
NOTE: This Parameter is linked to the REVERB [ON] button on the Control Panel.
❷ DEPTH
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to set the overall depth of the entire Reverb effect.
NOTE: This Parameter is linked to the [REVERB DEPTH] knob on the Control Panel.
❸❹❺❻ LEVEL (ORGAN, PIANO, ENSEMBLE, SYNTH)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
These allows you to select the depth of the Reverb (= send level) for each Section.
❼ TYPE (ORGAN)
❽ TYPE (PIANO/ENSEMBLE/SYNTH)
This allows you to select Reverb Types.
Room 1 ............ Large room.
Room 2 ............ Small room.
Live ................... Ambient room.
Hall 1 ................ Dark Hall, similar to a theatre.
Hall 2 ................ Bright Hall, similar to an auditorium.
Church............. Church.
Plate ................. Iron-plate Reverb.
Spring.............. Spring Reverb.
NOTE: You can select different Reverb Types for the ORGAN and PIANO/ENSEMBLE/MONO
SYNTH Sections.
❾ TIME (ORGAN)
❿ TIME (PIANO/ENSEMBLE/SYNTH)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the decay of the Reverb.
A higher value results in a longer decay.
NOTE: You can select different Reverb Times for the ORGAN and PIANO/ENSEMBLE/MONO
SYNTH Sections.
⓫ PRE-LPF (ORGAN)
⓬ PRE-LPF (PIANO/ENSEMBLE/SYNTH)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the tone quality of the Reverb.
Higher values simulate a harder floor/wall/ceiling material.
NOTE: You can select different settings for the ORGAN and PIANO/ENSEMBLE/MONO SYNTH
Sections.
NOTE: The Parameters described on this
page are Combination Parameters
and can be Recorded to individual
Combinations. For a complete listing
of all Combination Parameters, please
consult “COMBINATION PARAMETERS”
starting on page 184.
Editing Parameters
78
COMBINATION - continued
INTERNAL ZONE
EXTERNAL ZONE
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the [PEDAL TO LOWER], [LOWER TO PEDAL]
or [PEDAL SUSTAIN] button.
External Zones allow you to control external MIDI equipment
either from the SKX PRO keyboard or expanded keyboards.
There are three External Zones on the SKX PRO, each of which
can be allocated to UPPER, LOWER or PEDAL Keyboards.
NOTE: External Zones are explained more fully starting on page
152.
NOTE: Using External Zones requires setting the MIDI Parameters
correctly. This can be done easily using a MIDI Template
provided for that purpose. See page 158 for more
information about MIDI Templates.
❶
❷
❸
❹
❻
❺
❼
❽
This Page allows you to adjust the Parameters for each Internal
Zone.
❶ OCTAVE (UPPER)
❷ OCTAVE (LOWER)
❸ OCTAVE (PEDAL)
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
❾
❿
⓫
⓬
⓭
⓮
⓯
⓰
⓱
⓲
⓳
⓴
Setting Range: -2 ~ ±0 ~ +2
These allows you to select the Octave or pitch at which the
selected Keyboard will sound.
NOTE: These Parameters are linked with the [OCTAVE] buttons on
the Control Panel.
❹ PEDAL KEY MONO/POLY
This allows you to adjust whether the Pedals play single notes
(“Mono”) or multiple notes (“Poly”).
Mono ............... If more than one note is played, the lowest note will sound
Poly................... If more than one note is played, all notes will sound
❺ PEDAL SUSTAIN LENGTH
Setting Range: 1 ~ 5
This allows you to adjust the decay length of the Pedal Sustain.
NOTE: For more information about Pedal Sustain, see page 55.
❻ LOWER TO PEDAL LIMIT
Setting Range: 0C ~ 6C
This allows you to adjust the highest note of the PEDAL
Keyboard if the [LOWER TO PEDAL] feature is “ON.”
❼ PEDAL TO LOWER LIMIT
Setting Range: 0C ~ 6C
This allows you to adjust the highest note of the LOWER
Keyboard if the [PEDAL TO LOWER] feature is “ON.”
❽ PEDAL TO LOWER MODE
Lower
"
Pedal
"
C
E
C
This allows you to turn the selected Zone “ON” or “OFF.”
EXZ1 EXZ2 EXZ3
inverted
You can allocate External Zones by Press and Hold the
[SHIFT] button and pressing [PIANO] for External Zone 1,
[ENSEMBLE] for External Zone 2 or [SYNTH] for External
Zone 3 (see the illustration above).
❷ CH (MIDI Channel)
Lowest
Poly
Chord
This allows you to select how the PEDAL TO LOWER responds
to notes played (see the illustration above).
Lowest ............. Sounds lowest note.
Poly................... Sounds polyphonic notes.
Chord ............... Sounds the root of the chord.
*#1
❶ SW (Switch)
Settings: Off, On
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Setting Range: 1 ~ 16
This allows you to select the MIDI Channel on which the
selected Zone will transmit.
79
❸ BNK.M (Bank MSB)
❹ BNK.L (Bank LSB)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
❺ PROG (Program Change)
Setting Range: 1 ~ 128
This allows you to select the Bank Select and Program Change
messages transmitted by the selected Zone.
NOTE: For more specific information about the connected MIDI
keyboard, please refer to the Owner’s Manual for the specific
MIDI equipment you are using.
❻ ALC (Allocate)
Setting Range: Off, Upper, Lower, Pedal
This allows you to select which Keyboard will control the
selected External Zone.
❼ OCT (Octave)
Setting Range: -2 ~ ±0 ~ +2
This allows you to select the Octave or pitch at which the selected
External Zone will sound. Adjust this Parameter if an external
sound plays in an octave other than the one you need for a
particular application.
❽ XPOSE (Transpose)
Setting Range: -6 ~ ±0 ~ +6
This allows you to shift the musical key of the selected Zone.
❾ LOW (Key Range Low)
❿ HIGH (Key Range High)
Setting Range: -2C ~ 8G
This allows you to adjust the Upper and Lower note limits for
the selected Zone.
⓫ VOL (Volume)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to control the Volume (Controller #7) of the
sound controlled by the selected Zone.
⓬ PAN
Setting Range: L64 ~ C ~ R63
This allows you to adjust the directionality or Pan setting
(Controller #10) for the selected Zone.
⓭ VEL (Velocity Curve)
Setting Range: Off, 1 ~ 4
This allows you to select how the selected External Zone will
respond to key velocity.
“Off” is standard organ touch - the notes play at a fixed velocity
(“100”) regardless of a light or heavy key pressure. “1” is the
most exaggerated velocity curve while “4” is a gentler curve. “2”
and “3” are curves in between.
⓮ DAMP (Damper)
Settings: On, Off
This allows you to select whether a Damper pedal will affect the
selected Zone.
⓯ BEND (Pitch Bend)
Settings: On, Off
This allows you to select whether the [PITCH BEND] wheel will
affect the selected Zone.
⓰ MOD (Modulation)
⓱ EXP (Expression)
Settings: On, Off
This allows you to select whether a connected Expression Pedal
will affect the selected Zone.
⓲ E.MIN (Expression Minimum)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 63
This allows you to adjust the volume level when the Expression
Pedal is “closed” or set at its minimum position. At “0” no sound
will be heard.
⓳ E.MAX (Expression Maximum)
Setting Range: 64 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the volume level when the Expression
Pedal is all the way “open,” or set at maximum.
⓴ E.CC (Expression Control Change)
Setting Range: Off, 7, 11
This allows you to select how you want to control the level of the
selected External Zone. You can select either “VOL” (Volume or
Controller #7) or “EXP” (Expression or Controller #11).
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN “VOLUME” AND
“EXPRESSION”
In purely technical terms, Volume and Expression are identical
- both control loudness or sound level. The difference lies with
how they are customarily used in MIDI applications, particularly
in creating and playing back MIDI sequences.
The generally accepted protocol is to use Controller #7 (Volume)
to set the overall or absolute level of a voice or sound, and use
Controller #11 (Expression) to make variations (such as crescendi
or diminuendi) against the overall level set by Controller #7. This
is recommended particularly if you want to use your SKX PRO
as a MIDI input device to record a sequence.
NOTE: In order for the External Zone Volume feature to work, the
Expression Control Number must be set to “7:VOL.” If this Parameter is set to “11:EXP,” changing the External Zone Volume
setting will have no effect.
PANIC FUNCTION / PARAMETER RELOAD
MIDI plays notes from an external instrument by sending two
commands - “Note On” which starts the note playing, and
“Note Off” which releases the note and stops it from playing.
These two commands are always sent in pairs.
Once in a while, a Note Off command may not follow a Note
On command, causing a note or notes to cipher, or sound
continuously (the phenomenon popularly referred to a “stuck
notes”). In this case, you need to send a MIDI command to the
receiving instrument to clear the ciphering notes.
To do this, press the DIRECTION [ ][ ] buttons
simultaneously. Doing this will send a “MIDI All Notes
Off” as well as a “MIDI Reset All Controllers” command to
the receiving instruments. The stuck notes will be turned off
and the settings for the External Zones will be reset, then the
External Zone settings will be re-sent. Normal playing can then
be resumed.
Settings: On, Off
This allows you to select whether the [MODULATION] wheel
will affect the selected Zone.
Editing Parameters
80
ORGAN
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to adjust the Patch Parameters for the ORGAN Section.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - PATCH - ORGAN - [ENTER]
or press the [EDIT] button in the ORGAN Section.
Pedal
Exclusive
Oscillator
Pedalboard
Virtual
Tonewheel Set
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
Percussion
Pedal
Drawbars
Upper
Drawbars
Lower
Drawbars
Upper&Lower
Pedal
Matching
Transformer
Pedal
V&C
On
Exp.
Off
Multi Effects 1
Vibrato & Chorus
Expression
Overdrive
(Pre)
switched by Leslie on Reverb
Multi Effects 2
TC & Equalizer
Section Vol.
Digital
Leslie
Reverb
Stationary ch.,
Line Out
Rotary ch.,
Rotary Out
(Post)
bypass for Rotary Out
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Pedal Out
81
EDITING THE ORGAN SECTION
The ORGAN Section can produce several different types of Organ tones - four
Tone Wheel Organs, three Transistor Organs, and Pipe Organ. The Pipe Organ
contains both Classical and Theatre pipe ranks.
You can set basic registrations using the Drawbars and make fine adjustments using the
Parameters which are explained starting below.
PAGES AND PARAMETERS
GENERAL (P. 82)
This allows you to adjust the overall Parameters for each ORGAN Patch.
DRAWBARS (P. 82)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters affecting the Drawbars for each Part.
CONTACT / SUSTAIN (P. 84)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters affecting the Virtual Multi-Contacts and the
Sustain effect for the UPPER and LOWER Parts.
PERCUSSION (P. 85)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters affecting the Percussion section of the
Tone Wheel Organs.
VIBRATO&CHORUS (P. 86)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters affecting the Vibrato and Chorus for the
Tone Wheel Organs, Vibrato for the Transistor Organs, and Tremulant for the Pipe
Organ.
MATCHING TRANSFORMER (P. 87)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters affecting the Matching Transformer for the
Tone Wheel and Transistor Organs.
LESLIE (P. 88)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters affecting the inbuilt digital Leslie for the
Tone Wheel and Transistor Organs.
MULTI EFFECT 1 (P. 89)
This allows you to adjust the Multi Effects 1 (Tremolo, Wah-Wah, Ring Modulator,
Compressor) for the Tone Wheel and Transistor Organs.
OVERDRIVE (P. 89)
This allows you to adjust the Overdrive settings for each ORGAN Patch.
MULTI EFFECT 2 (P. 89)
This allows you to adjust the Multi Effects 2 (AutoPan, Phaser, Flanger, Chorus,
Delay) for each ORGAN Patch.
EQUALIZER (P. 89)
This allows you to adjust the Equalizer and Tone Control settings for each ORGAN
Patch.
APP (APPLICATION) MENU
The APP (Application) Menu which appears by touhcing the [≡] button allows you
to execute some jobs.
INITIALIZE ORGAN .................. Initialize all the Patch Parameters in the current Patch.
SNAPSHOT ORGAN ................Capture the current physical Drawbar registrations and Overdrive
settings.
REGISTER PAGE TO FAV ........Register the current Page to a Favorite.
To select an option:
1. Use the DIRECTION []/[] buttons to select the option you want.
2. Press the [ENTER] button to select the desired option.
Editing Parameters
82
ORGAN - continued
GENERAL
SHORTCUT: Press the [EDIT] button in the ORGAN Section.
❶
❷
❸
WHERE THE VOLUME AFFECTS FOR?
This Page allows you to adjust Parameters common to the ORGAN Patches.
LOUDNESS
audio
❶ VOLUME
Setting Range: 0 - 127
Expression
This allows you to adjust the maximum volume of the selected Patch.
PITCH BEND
“Volume” in the
Combination
These allow you to adjust the number of semitones the pitch of the selected ORGAN
Patch will bend “Up” or“Down” using the [PITCH BEND] wheel.
DRAWBARS
output
DISABLED PARAMETERS
This allows you to adjust the Drawbars Parameters for each Part.
❷
❸
❹
❺
❽
❾
❻
❿
❼
❶ UPPER Registration
❷ PEDAL Registration
❷ LOWER Registration
This allows you to see the Drawbar Registrations for each Part.
*#1
Overdrive, Multi Effects
“Volume” in the Patch
(LOUDENESS Parameter)
❷ RANGE UP
Setting Range: 0 - 12 [semitones]
❸ RANGE DOWN
Setting Range: 0 - 24 [semitones]
❶
The LOUDNESS - VOLUME adjusts the volume
which end of the Multi Effects or Overdrive Effects,
unlike the Expression. This is used for adjusting
volume of the current Patch.
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
All of the ORGAN Parameters affect the Tone Wheel
Organs; however, some of the ORGAN Parameters
do not affect the Transistor or Pipe Organs - for
example, Leakage Level, Pedal Type and Custom
Tone Wheels. If a particular Parameter does not
affect the selected Organ Type, it will be “greyed
out” or darkened in the display (see the example
below). However, the value of a disabled Parameter
can still be adjusted using the [VALUE] knob.
83
UPPER & LOWER DRAWBARS
❹ TYPE
This allows you to select the ORGAN Type.
A-100 ............... Tone Wheel Organ, A-102 No. 35564.
B-3 ..................... Tone Wheel Organ, B-3 No. A27563.
C-3 ..................... Tone Wheel Organ, C-3 No. C155596.
Mellow ............ Pure sine waves with no harmonic development.
Vx ...................... Reproduces the sound of a vintage British combo organ.
Farf ................... Reproduces the sound of a vintage Italian combo organ.
Ace .................... Reproduces the sound of a vintage Japanese combo organ.
Pipe .................. Pipe Organ.
❺ ENVELOPE
Setting Range: Con, R1 ~ R15, AR1 ~ AR15
This allows you to adjust the rate of Attack (when a key is depressed) and Release (when
the key is released).
“Con” is the envelope of the key-click(s) generated with the Virtual Multi-Contacts.
“1 -- 15” is the rate of Attack without the Virtual Multi-Contacts. The greater the
value, the slower the Attack (the speed at the which the Drawbar registration sounds
when a key is depressed).
The “R” Parameter changes the Release rate. The Attack rate is that provided by the
Virtual Multi-Contacts. This means that the onset of the tone will be instantaneous
while the Release rate is regulated by the numerical setting.
The “AR” Parameter disables the Virtual Multi-Contacts and allows you to change both
the Attack and Release rate. At higher numerical settings the Attack and Release will be
slow, similar to that of a pipe organ.
❻ LEAKAGE LEVEL
Setting Range: 0 (no Leakage tone) ~ 127 (maximum Leakage tone)
This allows you to adjust the total volume of the leakage tone.
❼ CUSTOM SET
Setting Range: F1 ~ F3, U1 ~ U3
This allows you to select a customized set for each Tone Wheel Organ and Pipe
Organ.
NOTE: See page 120 “Custom Tone Wheel” or page 126 “Custom Pipe” for more details.
NOTE: This Parameter is not available for the Transistor Organs.
ENVELOPE
The variation of a sound over time, as is used in
sound synthesis.
Loudness
ENV is “Con”
Damping
Contact Time
Note On
Loudness
Note Off
Time
ENV is “AR”
Attack
Rate
Release
Rate
Note On
Note Off
Time
KEY CLICK
On Tone Wheel organs such as the B-3/C-3/A-100,
each time a key is depressed 9 electrical switch
contacts are closed by means of 9 horizontal flat
springs which touch 9 busbars. Each time a contact
is closed or released, a “key click” was produced.
This characteristic is replicated on the SKX PRO.
EXAMPLES OF KEY-CLICK SETTINGS
Simulation of a classic multi-contact Hammond
Organ such as B-3/C-3/A-100:
ENV=CON
Simulation of a PCM synthesizer to produce the
“key click” only at the attack:
ENV=R1
Slow envelope similar to that of a pipe organ:
ENV=AR15
PEDAL
❽ TYPE
Settings: Normal, Muted
This allows you to select the ORGAN Type for the PEDAL Part.
Normal ......Traditional Tone Wheel registration of the B-3/C-3/A-100.
Muted ........Analog pedal tones as on the classic X-5.
NOTE: When one of the Transistor Organs (Vx., Farf. or Ace.) is selected for the UPPER &
LOWER, Muted is automatically selected for the PEDAL Part.
NOTE: When the Pipe Organ Type is selected for the UPPER & LOWER Parts, Pipe is automatically selected for the PEDAL Part and the other PEDAL Parameters are unavailable.
❾ ENVELOPE
Setting Range: Con, R1 ~ R15, AR1 ~ AR15
This allows you to set the Attack and Release characteristics of the PEDAL tones.
NOTE: See paragraph ❺ on this page for more information.
NOTE: This Parameter is available on Tone Wheel Organs A-100, B-3, C-3 and Mellow.
❿ SUB DRAWBARS
Setting Range: F1 ~ F3, U1 ~ U3
This allows you to select the harmonic settings for the PEDAL or Sub Drawbars
when the “Normal” Type is selected.
NOTE: This Parameter is available on Tone Wheel Organs “A-100,” “B-3,” ” C-3” and “Mellow.”
Editing Parameters
84
ORGAN - continued
CONTACT / SUSTAIN
Attack
Release
❺
❻
❶
❷
❸
❹
❼
❾
❽
This Page allows you to adjust the Parameters which affect the Virtual MultiContacts and the Sustain effect for the UPPER and LOWER Parts.
VIRTUAL MULTI-CONTACT
❶ OFFSET TIME
Setting Range: -64 ~ ±0 ~ +63
This allows you to set the time when a note is “ON”until complete contact is made.
A higher value causes a longer Attack time and a shorter Release time.
❷ DAMPING
Setting Range: 0 ~ 31
This allows you to control the damping rate of the Virtual Multi-Contacts.
The higher the value, the more pronounced the Key Click.
❸ MODE
This allows you to select how the Virtual Multi-Contacts (“VMC’s”) will sound when
keys are depressed.
Random .......... When a key is depressed, each contact of the VMC’s will connect in a random order
at the shallow point, and all the contacts are fully made when the key reaches its
deep point.
Velocity........... When a key is depressed to its deep point, each contact of the VMC’s is made by a
time difference depending on the velocity.
❹ DEPTH
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the amount of time for each VMC to sound when a key is
depressed.
At “0” all the VMC’s sound simultaneously. The higher the value, the longer the
time interval between contacts.
UPPER & LOWER SUSTAIN
This allows you to add a smooth decay to the UPPER & LOWER Drawbars tone.
❺❻ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to turn Sustain “ON” or “OFF” on the selected Part.
❼❽ LENGTH
Setting Range: 1 ~ 5
This allows you to adjust the length of the Sustain effect for the selected Part.
IMPEDANCE
❾ AMOUNT
This allows you to adjust the amount of volume reduction when keys are depressed
and held and other keys are depressed on a Tone Wheel organ.
Off ...............No volume reduction.
Half .............The volume will be reduced by a small amount.
Full ..............The volume will be reduced by the full amount.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
WHAT ARE CONTACTS?
When a key is depressed on a Tone Wheel
Hammond Organ, it closes 9 small electrical
switch contacts. These 9 contacts represent the
9 pitches provided by the Drawbars. The contacts
are closed and opened by means of 9 horizontal
flat springs which touch 9 busbars. When a flat
spring touches a busbar, electrical contact is
made and the harmonic is permitted to sound.
Since the 9 busbars are physically separated, the
harmonics do not all sound simultaneously, but
in succession. This can be heard most clearly by
selecting one of the four Manual Drawbar sets of
a Tone Wheel organ, pulling all of the Drawbars
out to their maximum volume setting and slowly
pressing a playing key. Each of the harmonics will
add in a sequence from highest to lowest until all
9 frequencies will be heard when the key is at the
bottom of its travel. The “Key-Click” on Tone Wheel
Hammond Organs is due to these physical
characteristics. Also, if a key is released quickly
it will bounce at the time of contact, creating an
effect known as “Key Bounce” or “Chattering.”
WHY LESS RELEASE KEY CLICK?
One of the characteristics of the key contacts
on a Tone Wheel organ is, the Release “click” is
somewhat softer and less intense than the Attack
“click.” This characteristic is replicated on the
SKX PRO.
SUSTAIN
The word “Sustain” has a different meaning for
an electronic organ than for a synthesizer. On an
electronic organ, “Sustain” refers to a note or noes
continuing to sound and smoothly decaying after
the key is released. This is called “Release” on a
synthesizer.
WHERE IS THE PEDAL SUSTAIN?
The Pedal Sustain is controlled by using [PEDAL
S U S TA I N ] b u t to n , o r t h e I N T E R N A L ZO N E
FUNC TION Mode in the COMBINATION Edit
Mode due to the fact that Pedal Sustain affects
any Voice Section allocated to the PEDAL Part
and not only the ORGAN Section. See page 78
for more details.
85
PERCUSSION
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold any of the four [UPPER PERCUSSION] buttons.
❶
❷
❺
❸
❹
❻
❼
This Page allows you to make changes to the Percussion tones.
LEVEL
❶ SOFT
❷ NORMAL
Setting Range: -22.0 ~ +10.5 dB
This allows you to adjust the Percussion Volume levels.
NORMAL.....Level when the [SOFT] button is “OFF.”
SOFT............Level when the [SOFT] button is “ON.”
DECAY
❸ SLOW
❹ FAST
Setting Range: 1 ~ 24, Cont
This allows you to adjust the Percussion Decay time.
A higher value will result in a slower Decay.
SLOW...................Decay rate when the [FAST] button is “OFF.”
FAST.....................Decay rate when the [FAST] button is “ON.”
C (continuous).....No decay, The Percussion tone is sustained while keys are depressed.
KEYBOARD
❺ TOUCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to set the Touch Response of the Percussion.
Off ..................... Percussion will sound only if you play the keys in a detached manner (non-legato). Any degree of
detachment is sufficient.
On...................... Each key will sound when played regardless of whether other keys are being held.
DRAWBARS
❻ 1´ CANCEL
Settings: On, Off
This allows you to cancel the Upper 1´ Drawbar while using Percussion.
On...................... The 1’ Drawbar will be canceled when Percussion is “ON.”
Off ..................... The 1’ Drawbar will continue to sound when Percussion is “ON.”
❼ DRAWBAR - SOFT
Settings: On, Off
TOUCH
The percussion generator on the
B-3/C-3 had a single envelope, which
would not recycle until all keys
were raised. Originally thought to
be a defect, the resulting response
became a desired trait.
1´ CANCEL
The B-3/C-3 had no exclusive key
contact for the Percussion, but,
used the 1´ contact. The SKX PRO
replicates this feature.
SOFT
On a vintage B-3/C-3, when
Percussion was turned “ON” and
the Volume setting was “NORMAL,”
the Upper Manual Drawbars were
slightly reduced in volume. The
SKX PRO replicates this feature.
This allows you to reduce the Upper Drawbar volume while using the Percussion if the [SOFT]
button is “OFF” (LED not lit).
On...................... The volume level of the Drawbars will be reduced by a small amount when Percussion is “ON” at
Normal volume.
Off ..................... The volume of the Drawbars will remain at the same level when Percussion is “ON” at Normal
volume.
Editing Parameters
86
ORGAN - continued
VIBRATO & CHORUS
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the VIBRATO and CHORUS [MODE], [UPPER] or [LOWER] buttons.
Sections Of Vibrato DelayLine
Amplifier
❶
❷
❸
❺
Scanner
Amplifier
❹
❻
This Page allows you to adjust the Vibrato & Chorus of the Tone Wheel Organs,
Vibrato for the Transistor Organs, and Tremulant for the Pipe Organ.
TONE WHEEL ORGAN
❶ TYPE
Settings: See below
This allows you to select the Vibrato Delay Line type.
’55-57 ........Metal Box (1955 - 1957).
’57-59 ........Big Silver Box (1957 - 1959).
’59+ ............Small Silver Box (1959 or later).
❷ RATE
Setting Range: 5.78 ~ 7.90 Hz (349 ~ 475 rpm)
This allows you to adjust the rate of the Vibrato & Chorus.
❸ MIX
Setting Range: D64 ~ Even ~ 63V
This allows you to adjust the intensity of the Chorus (C1 to C3).
“D” = direct or dry sound. “V” = Vibrato sound.
PEDAL
❹ PEDAL
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to select whether the Vibrato & Chorus affects the PEDAL Part
when the Vibrato & Chorus [LOWER] button is “ON.”
TRANSISTOR ORGAN
❺ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate of the Vibrato.
PIPE ORGAN
❻ TREMULANT RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate of the Tremulant.
VIBRATO & CHORUS
The illustration above shows the vibrato
equipment of a Tone Wheel Hammond Organ such
as a B-3/C-3/A-100.
On a Tone Wheel Hammond Organ equipped with
Vibrato & Chorus, the vibrato circuitry consists of
a series of plural coils or low-pass filter sections
called a “delay line” or “line box” and a motordriven “scanner” which scans the delay line and
progressively retards the phase, creating the
Vibrato effect.
VIBRATO TYPE
Hammond Tone Wheel organs with Vibrato &
Chorus were manufactured from 1949 through
1975. During that time, several different types of
vibrato circuits were employed, particularly line
boxes of different constructions. The Vibrato TYPE
feature replicates the effect of different types of
Vibrato delay lines.
MIX
“Vibrato Chorus,” is obtained when the vibrato
output signal is mixed with a portion of signal
without vibrato. This creates a “shimmering”
effect much used by jazz, blues and rock organists.
This Parameter allows you to adjust the balance
between the Vibrato and non-Vibrato signals to
create the type of Chorus effect you want.
PEDAL
On the B-3/C-3/A-100, the Vibrato and Chorus
affects the Pedal tones in addition to the Lower
Manual Drawbar tones. Also, starting with the
B-2/C-2, vintage Hammonds had Selective
Vibrato, meaning that Vibrato could be had on
Upper and Lower Manuals/Pedal independently
(on previous models the Vibrato and Chorus
affected the entire organ). These are replicated on
the SKX PRO.
VIBRATO (TRANSISTOR ORGAN)
On an electronic organ, Vibrato is accomplished
by modulating the frequency of the master
oscillator(s.) This effect is replicated on the
SKX PRO.
TREMULANT
On a pipe organ, a Tremulant varies the air
pressure the air pressure to the pipes periodically,
producing a vibrato or tremolo effect. On the
SKX PRO, Tremulant can be applied to the Pipe
Voices.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
87
MATCHING TRANSFORMER
WHAT IS A “MATCHING TRANSFORMER?”
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
The purpose of the Matching Transformer in a
Hammond Tone Wheel organ is to “match” the low
Impedance of the generator and key circuits to the
high impedance amplifier input.
It combines the individual tones from each
Drawbar into one complex musical tone.
Doing this imparts some unique characteristics
to the sound (see the illustrations below), which
are part of the tonal characteristics of a Hammond
Tone Wheel organ such as the B-3.
Even though transistor organs do not have a
Matching Transformer, these Parameters can also
be used for the Transistor Organs.
This Page allows you to adjust the Parameters affecting the Matching Transformer for
the Tone Wheel and Transistor Organs.
MATCHING TRANSFORMER
❶ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
Output
Drive
This allows you to turn the Matching Transformer effect “ON” or “OFF.”
❷ DRIVE
Drive
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to set the saturation level of the Matching Transformer.
A higher value will result in more saturation at low volume levels.
❸ HYSTERESIS
Input
How the Trans - Drive works
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to set the strength of the hysteresis characteristics.
The higher the value, the more “asymmetrical” the sound.
Output
positive
slope
Hysteresis
DEPTH
❹ UPPER DRAWBARS
❺ PERCUSSION
negative
slope
❻ LOWER DRAWBARS
❼ PEDAL DRAWBARS
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to set the amount of the Matching Transformer modeling for each
Part and for the Percussion.
The higher the value, the deeper the effect.
Input
How the Trans - Hysteresis works
Editing Parameters
88
ORGAN - continued
LESLIE
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the LESLIE [BYPASS], [STOP] or [FAST] buttons.
❶
❷
This Page allows you to adjust the Parameters affecting the inbuilt digital Leslie for
the Tone Wheel and Transistor Organs.
REVERB
❶ LESLIE ON REVERB
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to adjust the routing of the Reverb.
Off ..................... The digital Leslie modulates the ORGAN sounds only.
On...................... The digital Leslie modulates both the ORGAN sounds and the Reverb.
NOTE: This Parameter does NOT affect a connected Leslie Speaker Cabinet.
CABINET
❷ CUSTOM CABINET
Setting Range: F1 ~ F8, U1 ~ U8
This allows you to select a Custom Leslie Cabinet.
NOTE: See page 124 for more information about Custom Leslie Cabinets.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
LESLIE ON REVERB
When an audio signal containing Reverb is sent to
a Leslie Cabinet, the Reverb is modulated along
with the main signal. This characteristic can be
replicated using this Parameter.
When this Parameter is “OFF,” the effect is that
of a Leslie Cabinet speaking into an auditorium
or a large live room, or a Leslie Cabinet having a
separate Reverb amplifier and speakers such as a
vintage 122RV - the Organ tones are affected by
the Leslie rotors but not the Reverb.
When this Parameter is “ON,” the effect is that of
an audio signal containing both Organ tones and
Reverb being fed into a single-channel Leslie - the
rotors will modulate the Reverb as well as the basic
Organ tones.
89
MULTI EFFECT 1
See “Multi Effects 1” (P. 106).
OVERDRIVE
See “Overdrive.” (P. 111)
MULTI EFFECT 2
See “Multi Effects 2.” (P. 112)
EQUALIZER
See “Equalizer.” (P. 116)
Editing Parameters
90
PIANO/ENSEMBLE
These FUNCTION Modes allow you to adjust the Patch Parameters for the PIANO
and ENSEMBLE Sections.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - PATCH - PIANO/ENSEMBLE - [ENTER]
or press the [EDIT] button in each Section.
LFO2
LFO1
On/Off
Note
LFO EG2
LFO EG 1
Expression
CC
COMPONENT 4
COMPONENT 3
COMPONENT 2
COMPONENT 1
Pitch EG
Env
Note#,Velocity
Trig
Delay
Filter EG
Amp EG
Mod.
Modulation
CC
Section Effect
(Mfx1 - Exp - OD - Mfx2)
Trig
Pitch Bend
Mod.
Oscillator
Mod.
Audio
Filter
Mod.
Audio
Mod.
EDITING THE PIANO/ENSEMBLE
SECTIONS
Both the PIANO and ENSEMBLE Sections contain 4 sounding
units called Components.
The waveform generated by the oscillator in each Component
can be modified by the Filter (timber), Amplitude (volume),
Section Effects (Multi Effects and Overdrive) and the Equalizer.
Timed characteristics such as LFO and Envelope Generators for
Pitch, Filter and Amplitude are also provided.
PAGES AND CONTENTS
Amplitude
Pan
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GENERAL (P. 91)
1.
2.
3.
4.
This allows you to adjust the common Parameters in a PIANO
or ENSEMBLE Patch.
VOLUME
This allows you to adjust the volume.
PORTAMENTO
This allows you to slide the pitch between last and current notes
smoothly.
MONO/POLY
This allows you to adjust the monophonic or polyphonic, and
sounding priority.
PITCH BEND
This allows you to adjust the length of the Pitch Bend.
ProChord™ (P. 91)
This allows you to play complex harmonic patterns which
regarding played chord by the four Components as the players.
LFO (P. 92)
This allows you to adjust the LFO - Low Frequency Oscillators
which makes vibrato or tremolo effect, and their depth.
COMPONENT (P. 93)
This allows you to adjust the Parameters with regarding each
Component.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
6.
7.
8.
Mod.
Exp
Section
Equalizer
Section
Volume
BASIC
This allows you to adjust the basic Parameters such as sounding,
volume, “ON” or “OFF” the Section Effects, sounding note
range, and sounding velocity range.
OSCILLATOR
This allows you to adjust the Waveform and the pitch.
PITCH EG
This allows you to adjust the Pitch Envelope.
DELAY
This allows you to adjust the Delay for sounding “ON” or
“OFF” by playing or other Component.
FILTER
This allows you to adjust the Filter.
FILTER EG
This allows you to adjust the Filter Envelope.
AMPLITUDE
This allows you to adjust the Amplitude and the Panning.
AMPLITUDE EG
This allows you to set the Amplitude Envelope.
MULTI EFFECT 1 (P. 97)
This allows you to adjust the Multi Effects 1 (Tremolo,
Wah-Wah, Ring Modulator, Compressor) for each PIANO/
ENSEMBLE Patch.
OVERDRIVE (P. 97)
This allows you to adjust the Overdrive effect in this Section.
MULTI EFFECT 2 (P. 97)
This allows you to adjust the Multi Effects 2 (AutoPan, Phaser,
Flanger, Chorus, Delay) for each PIANO/ENSEMBLE Patch.
EQUALIZER (P. 97)
This allows you to adjust the Equalizer in this Section.
91
APP (APPLICATION) MENU
The APP (Application) Menu allows you to select various Menu
Pages quickly. To display the APP Menu:
1. Select the PIANO or ENSEMBLE FUNCTION Mode.
2. Press and Release the [≡] button. The Menu options
shown below will display:
PITCH BEND
❷ RANGE UP
Setting Range: 0 - 12 [semitones]
❸
RANGE DOWN
Setting Range: 0 - 24 [semitones]
These allow you to adjust the number of semitones the pitch of
the selected Patch will bend “Up” or“Down” using the [PITCH
BEND] wheel.
PORTAMENTO
❹ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
INITIALIZE PIANO/ENS..........Initializes the Patch Parameters in the
current Patch.
INITIALIZE COMPONENT ....Initializes the Component Parameters in
the current Patch.
COPY COMPONENT ................Copies the Parameters in one Component
to another Component.
REGISTER PAGE TO FAV ........Register the current Page to a Favorite.
To select an option:
1. Use the DIRECTION [ ]/[ ] buttons to select the
option you want.
2. Press the [ENTER] button to select the desired option.
GENERAL
This allows you to turn the Portamento effect “ON” or “OFF.”
❺ MODE
This allows you to adjust how to control the Portamento effect
from the keyboard
Every ................ The Portamento will be heard with every keypress.
Legato ............. The Portamento will be heard only when keys are played
‘legato” (a key is depressed while another key is held).
❻ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate at which the pitch changes
using Portamento. The higher the value, the more slowly the
pitch rises or falls.
MONO/POLY
SHORTCUT: Press the [EDIT] button in the PIANO or ENSEMBLE
Section.
❼ MONO/POLY
This allows you to adjust whether the selected Patch will play
single notes (“Mono”) or multiple notes (“Poly”).
Poly................... If more than one note is played, all notes will sound.
Mono ............... If more than one note is played, only one note will sound.
M/P.................... More than one note can be played; however, the last note
released will be erased by the next note played.
❹
❺
❻
❶
❽ MONO PRIORITY
This allows you to adjust which note will sound on the selected
Patch if more than one note is played in MONO Mode.
❷
❸
Auto.................. The highest note played will sound when this Section is
used with other Sections. The last played note will sound
when this Section is used alone.
Last ................... The last played note will sound.
Lowest ............. The lowest note played will sound.
Highest ........... The highest note played will sound.
First................... The first played note will sound.
❼
❽
LOUDNESS
❶ VOLUME
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the overall volume of the selected
Patch.
NOTE: This Parameter adjusts the volume of the Patch after Multi
Effects and Overdrive are added, unlike Expression which
regulates the volume before these effects are added (see the
illustration below).
audio
Expression
Overdrive,
Multi
Effects
“Volume” in the
Patch (LOUDNESS
Parameter)
“Volume” in
the
Combination
output
Editing Parameters
92
PIANO/ENSEMBLE - continued
ProChord™
LFO
1. Play LOWER as Chord
2. Play UPPER as Melody
C7
D
D
" D
D
D O
D
D
D
❶
❷
❸
O
❼
❽
3. The Harmony sounds together.
This allows you to reproduce complex harmonies by playing
a single-note melody with the right hand and chords with the
left hand. The four Components provide both the Melody and
Harmony notes in different configurations depending on the
specific ProChord Type or harmony pattern selected.
NOTE: The ProChord feature works on the UPPER Keyboard only.
Both the PIANO and ENSEMBLE Voices Sections have two
LFOs (Low Frequency Oscillators). These can be used to
modulate various Components or Parameters.
❶ TRIGGER MODE
Settings: Note, Free
This allows you to adjust whether the phase of the LFO will reset
each time a key is depressed.
Note.................. The LFO of each note oscillates individually. Each LFO will
start its cycle when a key is depressed.
Free................... Pressing a key will intercept the LFO at whatever point it
happens to be in its cycle.
❶
❷ WAVEFORM
Settings: See below
❷
❸
This allows you to select the waveform of the LFO.
❹
❶ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
Triangle .......... Triangle wave.
Square ............. Square wave Positive and Negative.
Rectangle ...... Square wave Positive and Zero.
Saw Up ............ Sawtooth Upward wave.
Saw Down...... Sawtooth Downward wave.
S/H .................... Sample and Hold.
Fluctuation ... Random.
Delay
Attack
Rate
This allows you to turn ProChord “ON” or “OFF.”
❷ MODE
Settings: Closed, Open, Duet, Block, Big Band Sax, Big Band,
Small Combo, Theatre, Hymn, Quartet 1, Quartet
2, Jazz Brass, Strings, Harmonic Chime, Old Time, 4
Part Closed, 5 Part Open
This allows you to select the ProChord Type or harmony pattern.
❸ DISABLED
Settings: Single, Unison
This allows you to select how ProChord works when it is disabled
(no chord outlined by the left hand or disabled by the Foot
Switch.)
Single............... Sounds Component 1.
Unison ............. Sounds all selected Components.
On
❸ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the Oscillation Rate of the LFO.
❹ DELAY TIME
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the amount of time after the initial
keypress before the LFO begins oscillating.
❺ ATTACK RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the amount of time for the LFO to
build to its full amount when using Delay Time.
❻ ATTACK KEY TRACK
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust how the Attack Rate is modulated by
the note or pitch.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
93
❼ PITCH DEPTH
❽ PITCH MOD DEPTH
❾ FILTER DEPTH
❿ FILTER MOD DEPTH
⓫ AMPLITUDE DEPTH
⓬ AMPLITUDE MOD DEPTH
These Parameters allow you to adjust the LFO depth for each
Component. “MOD DEPTH” sets the maximum LFO depth
using the [MODULATION] wheel.
COMPONENT
❸ OUTPUT BUS
Settings: Dry, Effect
This allows you to select whether Section Effects are enabled or
disabled for this Component.
Dry .................... Disabled
Effect ................ Enabled
❹❺ KEY RANGE LOW, HIGH
Setting Range: -2C ~ 8G
This allows you to adjust the sounding range of the selected
Component by note number.
❻❼ VELOCITY RANGE LOW, HIGH
Range
127
96
64
32
0
32
64
96 127
Value
Setting Range: 1 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the sounding range of the selected
Component.
❽ VELOCITY OFFSET
Output
To edit a Component, select the COMPONENT - EDIT icon and
press the [ENTER] button.
COMPONENT - BASIC
127
+32
±0
-32
96
64
32
0
32
64
96 127
Input
Setting Range: -64 ~ ±0 ~ +63
❶
❷
❸
❹
This allows you to adjust the relative loudness of notes played
using the selected Component.
❾ VELOCITY DEPTH
Output
127
200%
100%
50%
96
64
0%
32
❶ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to turn the selected Component “ON” or
“OFF.”
Off ...............No Sound.
On................Sound.
Use the COMPONENT [1] [2] [3] and [4] buttons to turn
each individual Component “ON” or “OFF” while editing.
❷ VOLUME
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the Volume of the selected Component.
0
32
64
96 127
Input
Setting Range: 0 ~ 200 [%]
This allows you to adjust the response of the selected
Component to key velocity.
At “0” there is no change in velocity. At “127,” the volume
is changed by the maximum amount in proportion to the
velocity.
WHAT IS A “COMPONENT?”
There are 300 pre-programmed Patches for the PIANO and ENSEMBLE
Voices Sections. Several of these contain multiple waveforms, such as
“Nylon&Steel Gtrs” and “Section Str. Oct.” This is possible because each
individual Patch can contain up to four (4) sounding Components. Each
Component can contain a Waveform and can be edited separately,
though it is not necessary for each Component to be active as part of a
Patch. The Component Parameters are explained starting on this page.
Editing Parameters
94
PIANO/ENSEMBLE - continued
COMPONENT - OSCILLATOR
Cent
+30
+20
+10
±0
-10
-20
-30
❶
❷
❸
❹
Note
Middle A
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
❶ WAVEFORM CATEGORY
This allows you to select the Waveform Category.
1 ......................... A. Piano
2 ......................... E. Piano
3 ......................... Harpsichord
4 ......................... Clav.
5 ......................... Chromatic Percussion
6 ......................... Guitar
7 ......................... Ethnic
8 ......................... SFX
9 ......................... Wind
10....................... Strings
11....................... Choir
12....................... Synth Pad
13....................... Bass
14....................... Synth Lead
15....................... Free Reed
16....................... Percussion
❷ WAVEFORM NUMBER
This allows you to select a specific Waveform Number.
NOTE: See page 178 for a list of Waveform Numbers.
❸ TRANSPOSE
Setting Range: -63 ~ ±0 ~ +63 [semitones]
This allows you to adjust the sounding pitch of the selected
Component by half-steps or semitones.
❹ PITCH BEND SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to select whether the selected Component will
receive Pitch Bend.
Off ..................... Does not receive.
On...................... Receives.
❺ PITCH KEY TRACK
Setting Range: -100 ~ ±0 ~ +100 [%]
This allows you to adjust the amount of pitch change between
keys on the keyboard for the selected Component.
At “+100” the musical distance between any two adjacent notes
will be 100 cents or one half-step. This is the normal setting. At
“+50,” the notes will be one quarter-step apart.
At “0” every note on the keyboard will sound the same pitch.
❻ FINE TUNE
Setting Range: -100 ~ ±0 ~ +100 [cents]
This allows you to adjust the sounding pitch of the selected
Component by cents.
At “-100” the pitch will be one half-step flat. At “+100” the
pitch will be one half-step sharp.
*#1
❼ STRETCH TUNE DEPTH
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
This allows you to adjust the depth of the Stretch Tuning for
the selected Component.
“0” is Equal Temperament. If the value is increased, the bass
will sound lower and the treble will sound higher.
NOTE: “Stretch tuning” is a method of tuning stringed instruments
(notably piano) to compensate for their inherent
inharmonicity. This characteristic can differ from instrument
to instrument.
❽ PITCH EG DEPTH
Setting Range: -64 ~ ±0 ~ +63
This allows you to adjust the depth of the pitch changing of the
Pitch EG (Envelope Generator) for the selected Component.
At “0” there is no pitch change. At “-64” or “+63,” the pitch
will change down or up by one octave.
NOTE: A large amount of pitch change may produce artifacts such as
“step noise.”
❾ PITCH EG VEL TRACK
Setting Range: 0 ~ 100(%)
This allows you to adjust the depth of the pitch changing of the
Pitch EG for the selected Component by keyboard velocity.
At “0” there is no change by key velocity. At “100” the pitch
will change by a wide amount.
NOTE: The Pitch EG is explained in more detail on the next page.
95
COMPONENT - PITCH EG
Attack Decay Slope
Release
Breakpoint
Sustain
On
❼
❽
❾
❿
KEY TRACK ATTACK
KEY TRACK DECAY
KEY TRACK SLOPE
KEY TRACK RELEASE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
Off
The EG (Envelope Generator) allows you to control how the
sound changes over time by playing notes on the keyboard.
The illustration above illustrates the structure of the Envelope
Generators for the PIANO/ENSEMBLE Section.
There are three (3) EG’s: Pitch, Filter and Amplitude.
NOTE: The PITCH EG DEPTH Parameter must be set to some value
other than “0” to hear the effect produced by the PITCH EG.
NOTE: Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the screen down to
see the additional Parameters.
These allows you to adjust the rate and amount of the Pitch EG
by note.
At “0” each note will sound the same Pitch EG. At “1 ~ 127”
the rate and amount of Pitch EQ will be determined by the note
being played. “127” will cause the envelope to respond by the
maximum amount.
⓫ VEL TRACK ATTACK
⓬ VEL TRACK RELEASE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
These allows you to adjust the rate and amount of the Pitch EG
by key velocity.
A higher velocity will result in a more pronounced EQ.
NOTE: The Velocity Parameter in the COMBINATION Function Mode
must be “ON” (values 1 ~ 4) in order to hear the effect of
Velocity Tracking.
COMPONENT - DELAY
❶
❷
❸
❹
This allows you to adjust the note delay characteristics of the
selected Component.
❶
❷
❸
❹
❶ ATTACK RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the time for the pitch to increase to its
peak value beginning when a key is depressed.
❷ DECAY RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the time from the peak amount to the
Breakpoint Level (explained below).
❸ BREAKPOINT LEVEL
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the level of the point immediately
following the Attack.
A higher value will set a higher pitch as the Breakpoint.
❹ SLOPE RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the time from the Breakpoint Level to
the Sustain Level (explained below).
A higher value decreases the time required for the sound to
return to the base frequency. A lower value increases the time.
❺ SUSTAIN LEVEL
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the main level which will remain until
the key is released.
A higher value will set a higher pitch as the Breakpoint.
❻ RELEASE RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the time for the level to fade from the
Sustain Level to zero after the key is released.
A higher value will result in a longer Release time.
❶ MODE
On
Off
Trigger
Input
Delay Mode
Note ON
Delay Mode
Note OFF
This allows you to select how the notes will sound.
Note On .......... When the note is “ON,” the selected Component sounds at
the Note On Delay Time. When the note is “OFF” the sound
will stop after the Note Off Delay Time.
Note Off Vel .. The selected Component does not sound even if the
note is “ON.” If the note is “OFF,” it will sounds if the
Amplitude EG level of the referenced Component is above
the Note Off Threshold Level. The velocity of the note
will be determined by the velocity with which the key is
depressed.
Note Off EG ... Similar to Note Off Vel, except that the velocity of the note
will be determined by the level of the Amplitude EG of the
referenced Component.
NOTE: Using one of the “Note Off ” settings may cause played notes
to cipher or “stick on” To avoid this, set the Sustain Level of
the Amplitude EG at “0” if you are using one of the “Note Off ”
settings.
Editing Parameters
96
PIANO/ENSEMBLE - continued
❷ SOURCE
Settings: Cmp1, Cmp2, Cmp3, Cmp4
❷ CUTOFF FREQUENCY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to select the reference Component for the Delay
settings.
The “Normal” setting is, the same Component selected as the
one currently sounding.
❸ NOTE OFF THRESHOLD LEVEL
This allows you to adjust the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter.
❸ RESONANCE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127 : -∞ ~ 0 [dB]
This allows you to adjust the Note Off level of the Amplitude EG
of the reference Component.
❹ NOTE ON DELAY TIME
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127 : 0 ~ 5 [s]
This allows you to adjust the time to sound the note after a key
is depressed.
❺ NOTE OFF DELAY TIME
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127 : 0 ~ 5 [s]
This allows you to adjust the time to hold the note before it stops
sounding after the key is released.
COMPONENT - FILTER
The Filter allows you to control the basic timbre of the sound
by selectively blocking some frequencies while allowing others
to sound.
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to add a controlled amplification to the Cutoff
Frequency, coloring the sound.
❹ CUTOFF KEY TRACK
Setting Range: -100 ~ ±0 ~ +100 %
This allows you to adjust the amount the Cutoff Frequency will
change by note.
❺ EG DEPTH
Setting Range: -100 ~ ±0 ~ +100 %
This allows you to adjust the amount the Cutoff Frequency will
change by the Filter EG. At “0” the Cutoff Frequency does not
change. At “100%,” the Cutoff Frequency changes by a wide
amount.
❻ EG VEL KEY TRACK
Setting Range: 0 ~ +100 %
This allows you to adjust the amount of the Filter EG by Note
“ON” or “OFF” velocities.
A lower key velocity will produce less of a Filter EQ. A higher
velocity will produce a more pronounced EQ.
COMPONENT - FILTER EG
The Filter Envelope Generator allows you to control how the
Filter will change the sound over time.
❶
❷
❸
❹
❶
❷
❸
❹
❶ MODE
This allows you to select the filter method.
Level[dB]
Resonance
0
-6
The Filter EG works in a manner similar to the Pitch EG (see
page 95).
+1 oct
CutOff
Frequency
COMPONENT - AMPLITUDE
LP12 ................. Low-Pass 12dB; It reduces above Cutoff Frequency at
12dB/octave.
Level[dB]
❶
❷
❸
Resonance
0
-6
-1 oct
CutOff
Frequency
HP12................. High-Pass 12dB; It reduces under Cutoff Frequency at
12dB/octave.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
97
❶ VEL DEPTH
Setting Range: -100 ~ +100 %
MULTI EFFECT 1
This allows you to adjust the amount of volume in response to
key velocity.
At “0” there is no change in volume. At “+100%”, the volume
is changed by the maximum amount corresponding to velocity.
❷ PAN
Setting Range: L64 ~ C ~ R63
This allows you to adjust the directionality or Pan setting for the
selected Component.
At “-C-” the sound is located in the center. At “L64” the sound
will be in the Left channel only. At “R63” the sound will be in
the Right channel only.
❸ PAN IMAGE
This allows you to adjust the panning by the note.
Fixed ................ No panning - all notes come from the center.
L-R ..................... Playing notes chromatically going up on the keyboard will
cause the notes on the left to sound first.
R-L ..................... Playing notes chromatically going up on the keyboard will
cause the notes on the right to sound first.
Pyramid .......... Notes played chromatically going up on the keyboard will
start in the center and alternate between left and right.
Inverted .......... Notes played chromatically going up on the keyboard will
start at one end and alternate between left and right until
they meet in the center.
See “Multi Effects 1” (P. 106).
OVERDRIVE
See “Overdrive.” (P. 111)
MULTI EFFECT 2
COMPONENT - AMPLITUDE EG
The Amplitude EG is an Envelope Generator affecting Volume.
See “Multi Effects 2.” (P. 112)
EQUALIZER
❶
❷
❸
❹
See “Equalizer.” (P. 116)
The Amplitude EG works similarly to the Pitch EG; however it
has some additional Parameters which are explained below.
NOTE: Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the screen down to
see the additional Parameters.
⓭ ATTACK COEFFICIENT
⓮ DECAY COEFFICIENT
⓯ RELEASE COEFFICIENT
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the contour for each envelope zone.
Level
by Decibel
Attack
Decay, Slope and
Release
Coef = 127
Coef = 0
Time
Time
A higher value creates a linear taper suitable for an “upward”
level. A lower value creates an exponential taper suitable for a
“downward” level.
NOTE: The Decay Coefficient controls both Decay and Slope zones.
Editing Parameters
98
PIANO/ENSEMBLE - continued
COPYING A COMPONENT
To Copy all the Parameters from one Component to another,
do the following.
1. OPEN THE patch Function Mode
❹
❺
❻
❶
❷
❸
❼
❽
Press the [EDIT] button to open the FUNCTION Mode for
the Voice Section you want.
2. OPEN THE APP (APPLICATION) MENU
❶ COPY
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the Source (the Component
to Copy from).
❷ TO
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the Destination (the
Component to Copy to).
❸ COPY
After doing the above, use the DIRECTION [] button to
move the cursor to the COPY icon and press the [ENTER]
button.
I N I T I A L I Z I N G A PATC H O R
COMPONENT
Usually, the best way to create a custom Patch is to find a Patch
which already contains most of what you want and edit only
the Parameters necessary to create your custom Patch.
However, in some cases you may find it useful to clear the
contents of a Patch or Component within a Patch completely
and start with a “blank slate.” In this case you can Initialize
either a complete Patch or one of the four Components within
a Patch. This is explained starting on the next page.
COMPONENTS & POLYPHONY
Press and Release the [㲇] button to open the Application
Menu.
2. SELECT “COPY COMPONENT”
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
“COPY COMPONENT” and press the [ENTER] button.
3. SELECT SOURCE AND DESTINATION
❶
❷
❸
Select the Source and Destination to copy and press the
[ENTER] button.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Polyphony refers to the number of notes that can be played
simultaneously. The PIANO and ENSEMBLE Sections
combined have a total polyphony of 128 notes. Also, the
number of Components utilized in a Patch will affect the
number of keys that can be played at one time before the 128note limit is reached.
For example, Patches using a single Component can play 128
notes in response to 128 keypresses. However, some Patches
utilize more than one Component. Patch #F209 “Soundtrack,”
for example, utilizes three (3) Components, meaning that
pressing one key will cause 3 notes to play. Therefore, if 42 keys
are pressed simultaneously the note limit will be reached. If the
128-note limit is exceeded, previously played notes will cancel
or “drop out” so that the additional notes can be heard.
Even though some very dramatic effects can be created using
more than one Component to create a custom Patch, it is
recommended to be aware that using multiple Components
will result in fewer keys that can be pressed simultaneously
before the 128-note limit is reached.
99
INITIALIZING A PATCH
To Initialize an entire Patch prior to editing, do the following:
1. OPEN THE patch Function Mode
INITIALIZING A COMPONENT
To Initialize an individual Component, do the following:
1. OPEN THE patch Function Mode
❶
❹
❺
❻
❶
❹
❺
❻
❷
❸
❼
❽
❷
❸
❼
❽
Press the [EDIT] button to open the FUNCTION Mode for
the Voice Section you want.
2. OPEN THE APP (APPLICATION) MENU
Press and Release the [㲇] button to open the Application
Menu.
3. SELEC T “INITIALIZE (PIANO OR
ENSEMBLE)”
Press the [EDIT] button to open the FUNCTION Mode for
the Voice Section you want.
2. OPEN THE APP (APPLICATION) MENU
Press and Release the [㲇] button to open the Application
Menu.
3. SELECT “INITIALIZE COMPONENT”
Press the [ENTER] button.
4. SELECT PARAMETERS TO INITIALIZE
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the Parameters to initialize.
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to the
[INITIALIZE] icon and press the [ENTER] button.
Common......... Parameters such as General, LFO, etc., excluding
Components.
All ...................... All Parameters including Components.
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to
[INITIALIZE COMPONENT] and press the [ENTER]
button.
4. S E L E C T T H E C O M P O N E N T T O
INITIALIZE
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the Component to initialize
and press the [ENTER] button.
1 to 4 ................ Each Component.
All ...................... All the Components.
Editing Parameters
100
MONO SYNTH
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to adjust the Patch Parameters for the MONO SYNTH Section.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - PATCH - SYNTH - [ENTER]
or Press and Hold the [OSC TYPE] button.
LFO
Note
LFO EG
Note#,Velocity
On/Off
Expression
CC
Trig
Trig
Pitch & Filter EG
Amp EG
Env
Env
Modulation
CC
P. Bend
FM
Sync
Note
Mod.
Sync
Note
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Oscillator 1
Audio
Filter
Mod.
Audio
Amplitude
Mod.
Section Effect
(Mfx1 - Exp - OD - Mfx2)
Section
Equalizer
Section
Volume
Mod.
Oscillator 2
Audio
EDITING THE MONO SYNTH
SECTION
The MONO SYNTH Section, as the name implies, is a
monophonic synthesizer utilizing physical modeling. There
are several individual “Oscillator Types” which can be selected.
The selected Oscillator Type can be modified by the Filter
(timber), Amplitude (volume), Section Effects (Multi Effects
and Overdrive) and the Equalizer.
Timed characteristics such as LFO and Envelope Generators
for Pitch&Filter and Amplitude are also provided.
PAGES AND PARAMETERS
GENERAL (P. 101)
This Page allows you to adjust the common Parameters in this
Patch.
1. VOLUME
This allows you to adjust the volume.
2. PORTAMENTO
This allows you to adjust Parameters for sliding the pitch
between last note and present note.
3. PITCH BEND
This allows you to adjust the range of the Pitch Bend.
AMPLITUDE (P. 104)
This allows you to adjust the Amplitude (volume) Parameters.
AMPLITUDE EG (P. 104)
This allows you to adjust the Amplitude Envelope.
MULTI EFFECT 1 (P. 105)
This allows you to adjust the Multi Effects 1 (Tremolo, WahWah, Ring Modulator, Compressor) for each MONO SYNTH
Patch
OVERDRIVE (P. 105)
This allows you to adjust the Overdrive settings for each Patch.
MULTI EFFECT 2 (P. 105)
This allows you to adjust the Multi Effects 2 (AutoPan, Phaser,
Flanger, Chorus, Delay) for each MONO SYNTH Patch.
EQUALIZER (P. 105)
This allows you to adjust the Equalizer.
APP (APPLICATION) MENU
The APP (Application) Menu makes operations below. To
display the APP Menu, Press and Release the [≡] button in the
SYNTH function mode. The Menu options shown below will
display:
LFO (P. 102)
This allows you to adjust the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
which creates Vibrato or Tremolo effects, and their depth.
OSCILLATOR (P. 103)
This allows you to adjust the oscillation method and pitch.
FILTER (P. 103)
This allows you to adjust the filter Parameters.
PITCH&FILTER EG (P. 104)
This allows you to adjust the Pitch&Filter envelope.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
INITIALIZE SYNTH ................... Initialize all the Patch Parameters in the
present editing Patch.
SNAPSHOT SYNTH ..................Capture the current physical knob and
slider settings.
REGISTER PAGE TO FAV ........Register the current Page to a Favorite.
To select an option:
1. Use the DIRECTION []/[] buttons to highlight the
option you want.
2. Press the [ENTER] button to select the desired option.
101
KEY
GENERAL
SHORTCUT: Press and hold the OSCILLATOR [TYPE] to locate the “OSC”
page, and use PAGE[] button to locate this page.
❹
❺
❻
❶
❼ PRIORITY
This allows you to adjust which note will sound if more than one
note is played.
Auto.................. Sounds highest note played when used with other
Sections. Sounds last played note when used alone.
Last ................... The last played note will sound.
Low ................... The lowest note played will sound.
High.................. The highest note played will sound.
❽ EG TRIGGER
This allows you to adjust whether the Envelope will reset each
time a key is depressed.
❷
❸
❼
❽
Single............... The Envelope will start its cycle when a key is depressed.
Multi................. Pressing a key will intercept the Envelope at whatever
point it happens to be in its cycle.
This Page allows you to adjust the common Parameters of a
MONO SYNTH Patch.
LOUDNESS
❶ VOLUME
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the overall volume of the selected
Patch.
NOTE: This Parameter adjusts the volume of the Patch after Multi
Effects and Overdrive are added, unlike Expression which
regulates the volume before these effects are added (see the
illustration below).
audio
Expression
Overdrive,
Multi
Effects
“Volume” in the
Patch (LOUDNESS
Parameter)
“Volume” in
the
Combination
output
PITCH BEND
❷ RANGE UP
Setting Range: 0 - 12 [semitones]
❸
RANGE DOWN
Setting Range: 0 - 24 [semitones]
These allow you to adjust the number of semitones the pitch of
the selected Patch will bend “Up” or“Down” using the [PITCH
BEND] wheel.
PORTAMENTO
❹ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to turn the Portamento “ON” or “OFF.”
❺ MODE
This allows you to adjust how to control the Portamento effect.
Every ................ The Portamento will be heard with every keypress.
Legato ............. The Portamento will be heard only when keys are played
‘legato” (a key is depressed while another key is held).
❻ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate of the Portamento. A higher
value will result in a slower Portamento.
Editing Parameters
102 MONO SYNTH - continued
LFO
❼ PITCH DEPTH
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the [SHIFT] button and move the [LFO
RATE] knob.
❽ PITCH MOD DEPTH
❾ FILTER DEPTH
❿ FILTER MOD DEPTH
⓫ AMPLITUDE DEPTH
⓬ AMPLITUDE MOD DEPTH
These allow you to adjust the LFO depth by individual
Parameters.
“MOD DEPTH” sets the maximum LFO depth using the
[MODULATION] wheel.
❶
❷
❸
❼
❽
❾
❿
⓫
⓬
This Page allows you to adjust the “Low Frequency Oscillator”
(LFO, which creates Vibrato or Tremolo effects) and its depth.
❶ TRIGGER MODE
Settings: Note, Free
This allows you to adjust whether the phase of the LFO will
reset each time a key is depressed.
Note.................. The LFO of each note oscillates individually. Each LFO will
start its cycle when a key is depressed.
Free................... Pressing a key will intercept the LFO at whatever point it
happens to be in its cycle.
❷ WAVEFORM
Settings: See below
This allows you to adjust the waveform of the LFO.
Triangle .......... Triangle wave.
Square ............. Square wave Positive and Negative.
Rectangle ...... Square wave Positive and Zero.
Saw Up ............ Sawtooth Upward wave.
Saw Down...... Sawtooth Downward wave
S/H .................... Sample and Hold.
Fluctuation ... Random.
Delay
Attack
Rate
On
❸ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate of the oscillation of the LFO.
❹ DELAY TIME
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the amount of time before the LFO
takes effect after a key is depressed.
❺ ATTACK RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the amount of time for the LFO to
reach its full amount after a key is depressed.
❻ ATTACK KEY TRACK
Setting Range: -64 ~ 0 ~ +63
This allows you to adjust how the Attack Rate is modulated by
the note or pitch.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
103
FILTER
OSCILLATOR
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the [SHIFT ] button and move the
OSCILLATOR [PITCH] or [DEPTH] sliders.
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the [SHIFT] button and move the FILTER
[CUT OFF], [RESONANCE] or [EG DEPTH] knobs.
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❽
This Page allows you to adjust the oscillating method or pitch.
❶ TYPE
This allows you to adjust the basic oscillating method.
NOTE: See page 53 “Oscillator Types And Characteristics” for details.
Duo ................... Two oscillators at different frequencies.
Unison ............. Several oscillators sounding in unison.
Sync .................. A single oscillator sounds synchronized with an “out-oftune” frequency.
Pulse ................ A single oscillator sound as a pulse wave.
FM ..................... Frequency modulation between two (2) operators.
Noise ................ A single oscillator sounds various types of noise.
This Page allow you to adjust the harmonic content of the
sound.
❶ MODE
This allows you to select the filtering method.
Level[dB]
Resonance
0
-6
+1 oct
CutOff
❷❸❹❺ MODIFIERS
These Parameters allow you to modify various characteristics of
the Oscillators.
NOTE: See page 53 “Oscillator Types And Characteristics” for details.
❻ OCTAVE
Setting Range: -2 ~ ±0 ~ +2
This allows you to select the Octave or pitch at which the
selected Oscillator will sound.
At “0” the selected Oscillator will sound at unison or actual
pitch. “-2” will sound two octaves lower and “+2” will sound
two octaves higher.
NOTE: This Parameter is linked to the [OCTAVE] buttons on the Control Panel.
❼ KEY TRACK
Setting Range: ±0 ~ +100 [cents]
This allows you to adjust the amount of pitch change between
keys on the keyboard.
At “+100” the musical distance between any two adjacent notes
will be 100 cents or one half-step. This is the normal setting.
At “+50,” the notes will be one quarter-step apart. At “0” every
note on the keyboard will sound the same pitch.
❽ EG DEPTH
Setting Range: -64 ~ ±0 ~ +63
This allows you to adjust the depth of the pitch change by the
Pitch Envelope.
At “0” there is no pitch change. At “-64.” the pitch will change
down one octave. At “+63,” the pitch will change up one
octave.
❼
Frequency
LP12/LP24 ....... Low-Pass 12(24)dB; reduces above the Cutoff Frequency
at 12(24)dB/octave.
Level[dB]
Resonance
0
-6
-1 oct
CutOff
Frequency
HP12/HP24 ..... High-Pass 12(24)dB; reduces below the Cutoff Frequency
at 12(24)dB/octave.
❷ CUTOFF FREQUENCY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter.
❸ RESONANCE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to add a controlled amplification to the Cutoff
Frequency, coloring the sound.
❹ KEY TRACK
Setting Range: -64 ~ ±0 ~ +63
❺ VEL TRACK
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
These allow you to adjust the amount the Cutoff Frequency will
change by note number / velocity.
NOTE: The Velocity Parameter in the COMBINATION Function Mode
must be “ON” (values 1 ~ 4) in order to hear the effect of
Velocity Tracking.
Editing Parameters
104 MONO SYNTH - continued
❻ EG DEPTH
Setting Range: -64 ~ ±0 ~ +63
AMPLITUDE
This allows you to adjust the amount of the changing Cutoff
Frequency by the Filter EG.
At “0” the Cutoff Frequency does not change. At “-64” or
“+63,” the Cutoff Frequency changes by a wide amount.
❼ DRIVE LEVEL
❶
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the signal level going into the Filter.
“64” is a “clean” signal with no distortion. A higher value adds
distortion.
PITCH & FILTER EG
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the [SHIFT] button and move the PITCH
& FILTER ENVELOPE [ATTACK], [DECAY], [SUSTAIN] or
[RELEASE] sliders.
The EG (Envelope Generator) allows you to control how the
sound changes over time.
This EG affects both the Pitch and the Cutoff Frequency of the
Filter.
Attack Decay
Release
❷
This Page allows you to adjust the Parameters controlling
loudness.
❶ GENERAL LEVEL
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the overall volume.
❷ VELOCITY DEPTH
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust how the volume changes by keyboard
velocity.
At “0” there is no change in velocity. At “127,” the volume is
changed by the maximum amount in proportion to the velocity.
Sustain
On
Off
AMPLITUDE EG
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the [SHIFT ] button and move the
AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE [ATTACK], [DECAY], [SUSTAIN] or
[RELEASE] sliders.
The Amplitude EG is an Envelope Generator which affects
Volume. It works in a manner similar to the Pitch&Filter EG’s.
❶
❷
❸
❹
❶ ATTACK RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the time for the sound to increase to
its peak value beginning when a key is depressed. A higher value
will result in a slower Attack Rate.
❷ DECAY RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the time from the peak amount to the
Sustain Level (explained below). A higher value will result in a
longer Decay Rate.
❸ SUSTAIN LEVEL
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the main level which will remain until
the key is released. A higher value will result in a higher Sustain
Level.
❹ RELEASE RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the time for the level to fade from the
Sustain Level to zero after the key is released. A higher value will
result in a longer Release time.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
❶
❷
❸
❹
105
MULTI EFFECT 1
See “Multi Effects 1.” (P. 106)
OVERDRIVE
See “Overdrive.” (P. 111)
MULTI EFFECT 2
See “Multi Effects 2.” (P. 112)
EQUALIZER
See “Equalizer.” (P. 116)
Editing Parameters
106
SECTION EFFECTS
The following pages will explain the Effects for each Voice Section, which are Multi Effects 1,
Overdrive, Multi Effects 2 and Equalizer. Each Section has its own adjustments for these Effects.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - PATCH - each Section - [ENTER] - MFX1 / O. DRIVE / MFX2
Exp.
Multi Effects 1
Vibrato & Chorus
Overdrive
Expression
(Pre)
switched by Leslie on Reverb
Multi Effects 2
TC & Equalizer
Section Vol.
Reverb
Digital
Leslie
Stationary ch.,
Line Out
Rotary ch.,
Rotary Out
(Post)
bypass for Rotary Out
Pedal Out
ORGAN Section
Mod.
Section Effect
(Mfx1 - Exp - OD - Mfx2)
Section
Equalizer
Section
Volume
Mod.
Section Effect
(Mfx1 - Exp - OD - Mfx2)
Mod.
Exp
Section
Equalizer
PIANO/ENSEMBLE Section
Section
Volume
MONO SYNTH Section
MULTI EFFECT 1 (P. 107)
Multi Effect 1 contains effects which are inserted at preOverdrive or Expression.
OVERDRIVE (P. 111)
Overdrive adds distortion to the sound by increasing the preamplifier input gain.
MULTI EFFECT 2 (P. 112)
Multi Effect 2 contains the effects which are placed after the
Expression or Overdrive effect.
EQUALIZER (P. 116)
An Equalizer is used to adjust the tonal quality. Each of the
four Sections has its own Equalizer.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
107
MULTI EFFECT 1
Multi Effect 1 contains the effects listed below which are
inserted at pre-Overdrive or Expression.
Tremolo
Level
Depth
TREMOLO
Tremolo is a periodic raising and lowering of the amplitude or
volume at a determined rate.
Rate
WAH-WAH
Wah-Wah is a periodic emphasis and de-emphasis of upper
frequencies by means of a frequency filter to impart a speechlike quality to the sound.
RING MODULATOR
Ring Modulation is a signal-processing effect whereby two
different frequencies are mixed together in such a way as to
reduce or eliminate the individual frequencies themselves,
leaving only the sum and the difference of the two frequencies.
COMPRESSOR
Compressor detects the volume of the source, and reduces or
emphasizes the amount of volume change.
Time
❸ WAVEFORM
This allows you to set which waveform is used to modulate the
volume.
Triangle .......... Triangle wave.
Square ............. Square wave.
Saw Down...... Sawtooth Downward wave.
S & H ................. Sample and Hold.
Dull Sqr ........... Dull Square wave.
❹ TRIGGER
This allows you to adjust whether the phase of the modulating
waveform will reset each time a key is depressed.
Free................... Pressing a key will intercept the LFO at whatever point it
happens to be in its cycle.
Single............... The LFO of each note oscillates individually. Each LFO will
start its cycle when a key is depressed.
❺ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the modulation rate.
A higher value results in a faster rate.
❻ DEPTH
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
MULTI EFFECT 1
This allows you to adjust the depth of the modulation.
At “0” there is no change in volume. The depth increases as the
value increases. At “127” the Tremolo alternates between no
sound and maximum volume.
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❶ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to turn a Multi Effect “ON” or “OFF.”
❷ TYPE
Settings: Tremolo, Wah-Wah, Ring Mod., Compressor
This allows you to select a Multi Effect.
Each Multi Effect has different Parameters. This is explained
starting at the right column.
Editing Parameters
108 SECTION EFFECTS - continued
Wah-Wah
Waveform,
Rate
❶
❷
❼
❽
❸
❹
❺
❻
❸ SOURCE
Settings: Mod, Exp, LFO, Input
This allows you to select how to modulate the Wah-Wah effect.
Modulation
Source
Level
Resonance
Mod ............Allows you to use the [MODULATION] wheel.
Exp ..............Allows you to use the Expression Pedal.
LFO .............Allows a cyclical modulation using a dedicated LFO-Low Frequency Oscillator.
Input ..........Allows you to use the input audio envelope of the sound engine.
❹ SENSITIVITY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the sensitivity or width of the effect.
A higher value results in a wider dynamic response.
❺ RESONANCE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to boost the cut-off frequency of the Low-Pass Filter and create a
more pronounced “Wah” effect.
A higher value results in a greater resonance.
❻ FREQUENCY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the central frequency.
A higher value increases the frequency.
❼ LFO WAVEFORM
Settings: Triangle, Square, Saw Down, S & H
This allows you to select the waveform of the LFO.
Triangle .......... Triangle wave.
Square ............. Square wave.
Saw Down...... Sawtooth Downward wave.
S & H ................. Sample and Hold.
NOTE: The SOURCE must be set to “LFO” to use this Parameter.
❽ LFO RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate of the LFO.
A higher value results in a faster rate.
NOTE: The SOURCE must be set to “LFO” to use this Parameter.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Sensitivity
Frequency
109
Ring Modulator (Ring Mod.)
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
RING MODULATION
“ R i n g m o d u l a t i o n” i n a n a l o g c i rc u i t s i s
accomplished by arranging diodes in a circle or
ring, giving rise to the term, “ring modulator.” The
result is a sound rich in overtones and typically
having somewhat of a bell-like or metallic quality.
Because of this, the sound is sometimes called a
“Klang tone.”
Waveform,
Rate
❸ SOURCE
Settings: Mod, Exp, LFO, Note
This allows you to select how to modulate the ring frequency.
Mod ............Allows you to use the [MODULATION] wheel.
Exp ..............Allows you to use the Expression Pedal.
LFO ............. Allows a cyclical modulation effect using a dedicated LFO-Low Frequency Oscillator.
Note ...........Allows you to use a note on the UPPER Keyboard.
❹ SENSITIVITY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the sensitivity or width of the LFO.
A higher value results in a wider excursion of the LFO.
NOTE: The SOURCE must be set to “LFO” to hear this effect.
❺ FREQUENCY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the central ring frequency.
A higher value results in a higher central frequency.
❻ MIX
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the volume balance between the “dry” and the effect sounds.
At “0” only the “dry” sound is heard. The effect level becomes greater as the value
increases. At “64” the ratio between the “dry” and the effect sounds becomes 1:1. At
“127,” only the effect sound is heard.
❼ LFO WAVEFORM
Modulation
Source
Level
Original Signal
Modulation
Effect Signal
Ring
Frequency
Frequency
Settings: Triangle, Square, Saw Up, S & H
This allows you to select the waveform of the LFO.
Triangle .......... Triangle wave.
Square ............. Square wave.
Saw Up ............ Sawtooth Upward wave.
S & H ................. Sample and Hold.
NOTE: The SOURCE must be set to “LFO” to use this Parameter.
❽ LFO RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate of the LFO.
A higher value results in a faster rate.
NOTE: The SOURCE must be set to “LFO” to hear this effect.
Editing Parameters
110 SECTION EFFECTS - continued
Compressor
Level
Detect
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
❸ RATIO RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127 (1:1 ~ ∞:1)
This allows you to adjust the rate at which the volume changes between input and
output.
A higher value results in a lesser change of volume.
❹ THRESHOLD LEVEL
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127 (-24 ~ ±0 [dB])
This allows you to adjust the value of the input level at which reduction begins.
A lower value results in compression beginning at a lower input level.
❺ OUTPUT GAIN
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127 (0 ~ +24 [dB])
This allows you to increase the volume to a level to be reduced by the compression
process.
A higher value results in a higher volume.
❻ ATTACK RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate at which the volume is reduced when the input
sound exceeds the threshold level.
A higher value results in a slower reduction rate and the Attack of the sound is
emphasized.
❼ RELEASE RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate at which the volume is reduced when the input
sound is lower than the threshold level.
A higher value results in a slower release time and the Return gain is delayed.
❽ DELAY TIME
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the amount of time before compression takes effect after a
key is depressed.
A higher value results in a longer delay.
NOTE: This Parameter also results in faster Attack and Release times.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Attack,
Release
Threshold
Gain
Look Controlled
Ahead Amp
Ratio
Make Up Gain
111
OVERDRIVE
On the SKX PRO, the Overdrive feature is turned “ON and OFF” by the
[OVERDRIVE] button. Both the type and amount of Overdrive are controlled by
Parameters.
Crossover
NOTE: The [OVERDRIVE] Touch Button must be “ON” in order to hear the Overdrive effect.
NOTE: The Overdrive is placed between Multi Effect “1” and Multi Effect “2.”
Overdrive
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
Blend
❶ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to turn Overdrive “ON” or “OFF.”
❷ TYPE
Settings: Tube, Solid, Clip
This allows you to adjust the character of the Overdrive.
Tube ................. Soft clipped sound similar to a vacuum tube (valve) amplifier.
Solid ................. Hard clipped sound similar to a solid state amplifier.
Clip.................... Precision hard-clipped sound.
EP Amp ........... Soft clipped sound similar to the amplifier of an Electric Piano.
❸ DRIVE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the amount of the distortion.
A higher value results in more distortion.
❹ CROSSOVER FREQUENCY
Setting Range: 400 ~ 14.7k [Hz]
This allows you to adjust the upper limit of the frequency range receiving Overdrive.
❺ BLEND
CROSSOVER FREQUENCY
In addition to distortion, the Overdrive effect also
introduces harmonics (overtones) into the sound.
Some of these harmonics may be undesirable and
create harmonic interference between dry and
overdriven sounds.
By using the Crossover Frequency Parameter to
limit the amount of upper frequencies receiving
Overdrive, you can minimize or eliminate harmonic
interference and create a more pleasing sound.
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the balance between dry and Overdriven sounds.
At “0” the sound is “dry.” At “127,” only the Overdriven sound is heard. The
numbers in between allow mixing of dry and Overdriven sounds.
NOTE: The mixing rate may not always be “1:1” if the value is set at 64 due to different
envelopes between dry and Overdriven sounds.
❻ EXPRESSION CONTROL
This allows you to adjust the relation between Expression and the Overdrive effect.
EX-OD .............. Both volume and distortion will changed by the Expression.
OD-EX .............. Only volume will be changed by the Expression.
OD Only .......... Only distortion will be changed by the Expression.
Input ................ Similar to OD ONLY, but with a smaller amount of change.
Editing Parameters
112 SECTION EFFECTS - continued
MULTI EFFECT 2
Multi Effect 2 contains the effects listed below and are placed
after the Expression or Overdrive effect.
AUTO Pan
Auto Pan smoothly shifts the sound back and forth between
Left and Right channels.
Auto Pan
NOTE: This Parameter is not applicable if a monophonic (single
channel) sound system is used or a Leslie Speaker Cabinet is
connected.
Left
Phaser
Right
Rate
Phaser will create the effect of splitting an audio signal into
two paths and varying their phase relationship to each other,
resulting in an alternately hollow and full-bodied sound. It can
be described as a “swooshing” or “twisting” effect.
Flanging occurs when two identical signals are mixed together,
and one of the signals is time-delayed by a very small amount.
Depth
Time
Flanger
❸ WAVEFORM
Settings: Triangle, Square, L to R, S & H, Dull Sqr
Chorus
Chorus refers to a shimmering, non-periodic enhancement of
the sound. It is intended to be similar to several instruments
sounding in unison, and is helpful when a thicker tonal texture
is desired.
Delay
Delay adds echo effects.
MULTI EFFECT 2
This allows you to select the waveform which will modulate the
selected sound.
Triangle .......... Triangle wave.
Square ............. Square wave.
L to R ................ Left to Right.
S & H ................. Sample and Hold.
Dull Sqr ........... Dull Square wave.
❹ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the rate of the modulation.
A higher value results in a faster rate.
❺ DEPTH
❶
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
❷
This allows you to adjust the depth of the modulation.
At “0” there is zero panning. A higher value results in wider
panning.
❸
❹
❺
❶ SWITCH
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to turn a Multi Effect “ON” or “OFF.”
❷ TYPE
Setting Range: Auto Pan, Phaser, Flanger, Chorus, Delay
This allows you to select a Multi Effect.
Each Multi Effect has different Parameters. This is explained
starting at the right column.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
113
Phaser
Flanger
Level
Level
Depth
Rate
Rate
Depth
Mix
Mix
Modulation
Modulation
effect range
HPF
Manual
Frequency
Frequency
❶
❶
❷
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
❸ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the frequency rate.
A higher value results in a faster rate.
❹ DEPTH
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the depth of the modulation.
A higher value results in a deeper modulation.
❺ RESONANCE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the resonance (feed-back) amount.
A higher value results in a greater resonance.
NOTE: At higher values, the sound may be modulated to the point
the base frequency is no longer audible.
❻ MIX
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the volume balance between the “dry”
and the effect sounds.
At “0” only the “dry” sound is heard. The effect level becomes
greater as the value increases.
❼ MANUAL
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to set the middle frequency of the phase effect.
A higher value results in a higher frequency.
❽ STAGE
Setting Range: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
This allows you to adjust the complexity or “stage” of the
phasing.
A higher value creates more complex effects.
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
❸ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the modulation rate.
A higher value results in a faster rate.
❹ DEPTH
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the depth of the modulation.
A higher value results in a deeper modulation.
❺ RESONANCE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the resonance (feed-back) amount.
A higher value results in a greater resonance.
❼ MIX
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the volume balance between the “dry”
and the effect sounds.
At “0” only the “dry” sound is heard. The effect level becomes
greater as the value increases.
❻ DELAY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to control the delay of the effect sound.
A higher value results in a longer delay.
❽ HPF (High Pass Filter)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to control the frequency range of the effect.
At “0” the effect is added to all frequencies. The effect is added
to the higher frequencies as the value increases.
Editing Parameters
114 SECTION EFFECTS - continued
Chorus
❶
Rate
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
❾
❿
Depth
Level
Original Signal
Effect Signal
❸ RATE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
Mix
This allows you to adjust the rate of the rising and falling effect.
A higher value results in a faster rate.
❹ DEPTH
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the modulation depth.
A higher value results in a deeper modulation.
❺ RESONANCE
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the resonance (feed-back) amount.
A higher value results in a greater resonance.
❻ MIX
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the volume balance between the “dry” and the effect sounds.
At “0” only the “dry” sound is heard. The effect level becomes greater as the value
increases.
❼ PRE-DELAY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to delay the signal for a channel even if the source is Monaural. A
higher value creates a time difference between Left and Right to the effect sound.
❽ DELAY
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to control the delay of the effect sound.
A higher value results in a greater delay.
❾ HPF (High Pass Filter)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to control the frequency range of the effect.
At “0” the effect is added to all frequencies. The effect is added to the higher
frequencies as the value increases.
❿ PHASE
Settings: 2, 3
This allows you to select the algorithm of the Chorus effect.
2 ......................... two-phase.
3 ......................... three-phase.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Frequency
effect range
HPF
115
Delay
Level
❶
TYPE = MONO
Original Signal
❷
Effect Signal
❸
❹
❺
❻
❸ TYPE
Settings: Mono, RtoL, LtoR
Mix
Feedback
Time
Delay Time
This allows you to select how sounds are reflected.
Mono ............... A simple monophonic “echo.”
RtoL, LtoR ...... The delay is alternated in the stereo field. At “RtoL” the delayed sound comes from
the right. At “LtoR” the delayed sound comes from the left.
NOTE: This is not applicable if a monophonic (single channel) sound system is used or a
Leslie Speaker Cabinet is connected.
❹ TIME
Setting Range: 10 ~ 1000 [ms]
This allows you to adjust the delay time.
A higher value results in a longer delay time
❺ FEEDBACK
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
Level
TYPE = PAN
L R
L R
L R
Time
This allows you to adjust the number of repetitions of the effect sound.
A higher value results in a greater number of repetitions.
❻ MIX
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the volume balance between the “dry” and the effect sounds.
At “0” only the “dry” sound is heard. The effect level becomes greater as the value
increases. At “64” the ratio between the “dry” and the effect sounds becomes 1:1. At
“127,” only the effect sound is heard.
Editing Parameters
116
EQUALIZER
An Equalizer is used to adjust the tonal quality. The built-in Equalizer on the SKX PRO consists of 3 bands. The
Bass and Treble bands are handled by “shelf ” equalizers, and the Mid band is handled by parametric control.
Each of the four Voice Sections has its own Equalizer, and there is also a Master Equalizer which adjusts the tonal
quality for the entire instrument.
TO LOCATE THE EQUALIZER FOR EACH SECTION:
[MENU/EXIT] - PATCH - each Section - [ENTER] - EQUALIZER
TO LOCATE THE MASTER EQUALIZER:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - SOUND - [ENTER] - MASTER EQUALIZER
SECTION EQUALIZER
❶
❷
❸
This Page allows you to adjust the settings for the Equalizer in each Section (ORGAN
Section shown).
❶ FREQUENCY
Setting Range: 20 ~ 308 [Hz] (BASS)
250 ~ 3.1k [Hz] (MID)
3k ~ 8k [Hz] (TREB)
These allow you to adjust the center or “turnover” frequency to be attenuated for
BASS, MID and TREBLE respectively.
❷ GAIN
Gain
BASS
Gain
+9dB
MIDDLE
Gain
TREBLE
Gain
0dB
-9dB
BASS
Freq.
Setting Range: -9 ~ ±0 ~ +9 [dB]
20 - 308
MIDDLE
Freq.
TREBLE
Freq.
250 - 3.1k
Frequency
3k - 8k
These allow you to adjust the Boost/Cut of BASS, MID and TREBLE respectively.
NOTE: At “0” the frequency response is “flat.”
❸ TONE CONTROL (ORGAN Section only)
Setting Range: -9 ~ ±0 ~ +9 [dB]
This Parameter duplicates the performance of the tone control on the AO-28 preamp
of a B-3 or C-3. Its response is unique, to cut the overall treble above 200Hz gently.
The setting range is -9 to +3, and it becomes neutral when set at “0.” “-1” corresponds
to the maximum of the B-3/C-3 tone control, “-5,” the middle, “-9,” the minimum.
The tone control found on the B-3/C-3, was only available at “minus” settings, but
here you are able to “plus” the settings as well.
Gain
+3dB
0dB
-3dB
TC
+3
0
-1
-9dB
-5
-15dB
100Hz
1kHz
-9
10kHz Frequency
NOTE: The sound may distort if gains are raised too high. Adjust accordingly.
NOTE: This Parameter does NOT affect the PIPE Organ Stops.
NOTE: The Parameters described on this page
are Patch Parameters, and can be Recorded to a Patch(P. 118). For a complete list of all Patch Parameters, please
see the APPENDIX starting on page
186.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
117
MASTER EQUALIZER
SHORTCUT: Press and Hold the [MASTER EQ] button.
❶
❷
❸
❹
This Page allows you to adjust the overall tonal quality of the instrument.
❶ EQ ON/OFF
This allows you to turn the Master Equalizer “ON” or “OFF.”
NOTE: This Parameter is linked to the [MASTER EQ] button on the Control Panel.
❷ FREQUENCY
Setting Range: 20 ~ 308 [Hz] (BASS)
125 ~ 4k [Hz] (MID)
3k ~ 8k [Hz] (TREB)
These allow you to adjust the center or “turnover” frequency to be attenuated for
BASS, MID and TREBLE respectively.
❸ GAIN
Gain
+9dB
BASS
Gain
MIDDLE
Gain
TREBLE
Gain
0dB
-9dB
BASS
Freq.
20 - 308
MIDDLE
Freq.
125 - 4k
Quality Factor
TREBLE
Freq.
Frequency
3k - 8k
Minimum
Maximum
Setting Range: -9 ~ ±0 ~ +9 [dB]
These allow you to adjust the Boost/Cut of BASS, MID and TREBLE respectively.
NOTE: At “0” the frequency response is “flat.”
❹ Q
Setting Range: 0 ~ 63
This allows you to adjust the “Q” (Quality Factor) or Resonance of the MID
Frequency Band. A higher value results in a greater emphasis of the cutoff frequency,
causing a “ringing” effect.
NOTE: Use this Parameter along with the GAIN Parameter for the maximum effect.
NOTE: Setting both the GAIN and the Q at maximum will result in the maximum coloration
of the sound.
❺ ❻ ❼ ❽
In this page, you can use the AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE
sliders in the MONO SYNTH section to adjust the MASTER
EQUALIZER Parameters (see the illustration on the left).
❺ ATTACK - BASS GAIN
❻ DECAY - MID FREQUENCY
❼ SUSTAIN - MID GAIN
❽ RELEASE - TREBLE GAIN
NOTE: The MASTER EQUALIZER Parameters are
System Parameters. You must Record
these Parameters if you want their
settings to be remembered the next
time the instrument is turned “ON.” See
page 143 for instructions on how to do
this.
Editing Parameters
118
RECORDING A COMBINATION OR PATCH
After you have made changes to a Combination or Patch, you will most likely want
to Record them for future use. To do this, follow the instructions on this page.
① PRESS THE RED [RECORD] BUTTON
❹ RECORD
After you have done Steps 1 through 3 above, use the
DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to the
[RECORD] icon and press the [ENTER] button. The
Naming screen will display.
③ NAME THE ITEM
After you have made your changes to a Combination or Patch,
press the red [RECORD] button. The RECORD Page will
display.
② SELECT THE ITEM TO RECORD
❶
❷
Enter the Name.
[Aa1]................. Changes the character type.
[1] - [10] .......... Selects the highlighted character.
[Insert] ............ Inserts a space at the cursor.
[Delete] ........... Deletes a letter at the cursor.
[VALUE]........... Changes the letter at the cursor.
After you are finished Naming, press the [ENTER] button.
The message shown below will display for approximately 1
second:
❸
❹
❶ CONTENT
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the Bundle, Manual,
Combination or Patch you wish to Record. The choices are
shown below.
Bundle
This allows you to Record COMBINATION, ORGAN and MONO
SYNTH Parameters in one group so that Patches can be
created in fewer steps. See page 26 for more information
about Bundles.
Manual
This allows you to Record COMBINATION, ORGAN and MONO
SYNTH Parameters into the MANUAL except the values of
knobs or sliders.
Combination Patch
Organ Patch
Piano Patch
Ensemble Patch
Synth Patch
System
The “E” (Edited) icon appears if the content is edited from
recalled setting.
❷ TO
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
“TO.”
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the User Number to Record.
❸ CATEGORY
If the Patch to be Recorded is a PIANO or ENSEMBLE
Patch, use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor
to “CATEGORY” and use the [VALUE] knob to select the
Category.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
NOTE: Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is
displaying.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Record, press the [MENU/EXIT] button
instead of the [ENTER] button.
④ RETURN TO THE PLAY MODE
PLAY
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the PLAY mode.
119
EDITING CUSTOM PARAMETERS
The SKX PRO allows you to Record certain Parameters into macro-settings called Custom Tone Wheels,
Custom Pipes, Custom Pedal Registrations and Custom Leslie Cabinets. In this way you can include
multiple Parameter settings as part of a Combination, Patch or Bundle, and include the same settings
in multiple Patches.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - CUSTOM - EACH CONTENT - [ENTER]
CUSTOM CONTENTS
CUSTOM TONE WHEEL (P. 120)
CUSTOM PIPE (P. 126)
This allows you to select or create Custom Pipes. A Custom
Pipe includes assignment of Pipe Voices to the Drawbars as
well as Volume settings, Chiff settings, etc.
If you select an ORGAN Type other than the one currently
selected, a dialog box similar to the one shown below will
display.
This allows you to select or create Custom Tone Wheels. A
Custom Tone Wheel includes profiles of specific organs,
Drawbar Foldback points, levels of each individual Tone
Wheel, etc.
CUSTOM PEDAL REGISTRATION (P. 123)
2nd
1st
Registor Panel
470
If you want to change the ORGAN Type, use the DIRECTION
[] button to move the cursor to the [YES] icon, and press
the [ENTER] button. If you select [NO] the previous screen
will appear.
10
20
5
APP (APPLICATION) MENU
5
47
Filter
Fund &
3rd
2nd & 4th
6th & 8th
10th & 12th
10
B-3 & C-3 Consoles Serial No. 56000 and above.
This allows you to select and create Custom Pedal Registrations
(registrations for the Pedal Drawbars).
The APP (Application) Menu allows you to select various
Menu Pages quickly. To display the APP Menu:
1. Select one of the Custom Settings to edit.
2. Press and Release the [㲇] button. The Menu option shown
below will display:
CUSTOM LESLIE (P. 124)
#2
#1
#3
REGISTER PAGE TO FAV ........Register the current Page to a Favorite.
Press the [ENTER] button to select the displayed option.
This allows you to select or create Custom Leslie Cabinets.
NOTE: None of the Custom Parameter settings will be remembered
unless they are Recorded in one of the Custom units.
Editing Parameters
120
CUSTOM TONE WHEELS
This FUNCTION Mode you allows you select or edit the characteristics of the Tone Wheel Organ.
The Parameters described on these pages are grouped in macro-settings called Custom Tone Wheels. These
Parameters cannot be Recorded as individual Patch Parameters; however, a Custom Tone Wheel can be
Recorded as part of an ORGAN Patch.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - CUSTOM - TONE WHEELS - [ENTER]
SET
WHAT ARE “CUSTOM TONE WHEELS?”
❶
❷
❶ ORGAN TYPE (P)
Setting Range: A-100, B-3, C-3, Mellow
This allows you to select the ORGAN Type to edit.
❷ CUSTOM SET (P)
Setting Range: F1 ~ F3, U1 ~ U3
This allows you to select the Custom Number to edit. The letter “F” means Factory
(non-re-writable) and “U” means User (re-writable).
When the Tone Wheel Hammonds - B-models,
C-models, A-100, etc. - were being manufactured,
each individual organ was subjected to a rigorous
series of checks and tests to insure the quality
of each unit, and to insure that all the units
representing a particular model series all sounded
alike. However, since the very newest B-3-type
organ is at least 45 years old, vintage organs are
dependent for their sound on analog components.
Several factors may affect the sound of a particular
unit. Thus, a B-3 manufactured in 1959 may well
have a slightly different tone than one made
in 1969, not necessarily because of the year but
because of slight differences in component values
among other factors. Also, many characteristics
of the Hammond Organ, especially as heard in
much jazz and rock music, have to do with the
overall condition of the instrument. The Custom
Tone Wheel feature is included to allow you to find,
or create the nearest approximation of what you
want your “Hammond Sound” to be.
FOLD BACK
All of the Parameters described on this page and
on the following pages comprise a Custom Tone
Wheel. These Parameters cannot be Recorded as
individual Patch Parameters; however, a Custom
Tone Wheel can be Recorded as part of an ORGAN
Patch.
❶
On the earliest model Hammond Organs, the
Sub-Fundamental Drawbar (the one marked,
“16’”) would continue to play all the way down to
the lowest “C” (“1C”). Newer models such as the
Hammond Models X-66, X-77 and Concorde do
the same, however, the 8th harmonic Drawbar (the
one marked “1’”) continues to play up the keyboard
to the next to highest “C” (“5C”) on the Keyboard.
FOLD BACK
❷
❶ LOW (TW)
Setting Range: 1C ~ 2C
This allows you to adjust the key-point from which the Drawbar pitches for the SubFundamental (16´) Drawbar “Fold Back” (repeat the pitches played by other notes)
on the lower octave of the keyboard.
The bottom key on the keyboard is displayed as “1C.”
❷ HIGH (TW)
Setting Range: 4G ~ 5C
This allows you to adjust the key-point at which the Drawbar pitches “Fold Back”
(repeat the pitches played by other notes) in the higher octaves of the keyboard.
NOTE: The FOLD BACK effect will be heard starting with the 22⁄3´ Drawbar (first black
Drawbar) and all the other Drawbars which introduce high harmonics.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
On a vintage B-3, C-3, A-100, etc., the lowest note
produced by the Sub-Fundamental Drawbar is the
2nd “C” (“2C”) from the left end of the Keyboard,
while the highest note that can be played by the
8th harmonic Drawbar is the 4th “F#” from the left
end of the Keyboard. The lower and higher keys on
the keyboard Fold Back, in that they repeat the
pitches played by other notes.
121
EDITING EACH TONE WHEEL
“F” WHEELS AND PEDAL WHEELS
❶
❷
❸
❹
This allows you to select the Tone Wheel you want to edit.
The setting range is displayed by “Wheel Number” and “Note”,
0C to 12:
0C to F12:
1C to 91:
7G to F96:
uses special wheels
uses original wheels
"
❶ WHEEL
01:
F01:
13:
F92:
On the B-3/C-3/A-100, there are 91 sounding tone
wheels. Wheels #1 through #12 are special wheels
called Complex Wheels used exclusively for the
Pedal tones. Later Hammond models had 96
sounding tone wheels, with the Sub-Fundamental
Drawbar (the one marked, “16’”) continuing to play
all the way down to the lowest “C” (“1C”) and 5
additional pitches at the top. On the SKX PRO, the
extended pitches are designated as “F” (Fold Back)
pitches (see the illustration below).
0B,
0B,
7F# and
7B.
©X
Manual:
F01
XX
“F” denotes wheels used for extended “Fold Back.” The non-marked Wheel
Numbers indicate original wheels from the B-3/C-3/A-100.
There are two ways to select the Wheel Number:
1. Use the [VALUE] knob, or,
2. If you want to locate a certain Tone Wheel quickly, move the Drawbar slightly
while depressing the key you want to regulate (see the illustration on the right).
When the Wheel Number is selected, each Parameter for the wheel (❷ to ❹) is
updated.
­X X X
F12
common with
manual parts
Pedal:
01
91 F92 F96
13
12
DECIBEL (dB)
A decibel (dB) is a unit for measuring the intensity
of a sound. For example, “0dB” is a reference level,
“+6dB” doubles the sound intensity and “-6db”
decreases the sound intensity by about 50%.
NOTE: Make sure [TRANSPOSE] and [OCTAVE] are set at “0” to ensure that the correct Wheel
is selected.
❷ LEVEL (TW)
Setting Range: -Inf, -92.0 ~ +4.0 [dB]
This allows you to adjust the volume of the selected Wheel.
❸ HPF (TW)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the “HPF” (High-Pass Filter), which will remove the
higher frequencies of the selected Wheel.
A lower value will introduce a “motor hum” or noise) which will be heard in addition
to the Tone Wheel sound.
❹ LEAK (TW)
Selecting a WHEEL NUMBER to edit
Level
Fundamental tone
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to adjust the amount of Leakage sound added to the Fundamental
sound.
A higher value will result in more Leakage.
NOTE: See page 122 for more information about Leakage.
Leakage tone
100Hz
1kHz
10kHz Frequency
Leakage Tone
NOTE: The Parameters labeled (TW) are Tone
Wheel Parameters. You must Record
these Parameters to a Custom Tone
Wheel if you want their settings to
be remembered the next time the
instrument is turned “ON.” See page
128 for instructions on how to do this.
Editing Parameters
122 CUSTOM TONE WHEELS - continued
LEAKAGE WHEEL
❶
❷
WHAT IS “LEAKAGE?”
❸
❷ LEAK WH (TW)
On a Tone Wheel Hammond Organ, each tone
wheel rotates next to a magnet, making a total of
91 or 96 magnets. The tone wheels are mounted
in separate bins to isolate them from each other
and prevent the magnets from intercepting
frequencies from neighboring wheels; however, a
small amount of current may still “leak” through,
producing a phenomenon called Leak age.
Leakage is usually heard as a “hash” type sound
consisting of many frequencies sounding at once.
The phenomenon can be thought of as similar to
white noise but with somewhat more definition,
with individual pitches more discernable. A
properly calibrated B-3/C-3 will have a minimum
of this effect;
However, an instrument which has been subjected
to hard use over a period of time may exhibit more
leakage noise.
This allows you to add a Leakage Tone to any of the Wheels from “01:0C” to “72:6B”
(“Fundamental Wheels”) by using the “Leakage Wheels” (“61:6C” through “91:8F Level
see the illustration on the right).
The Leakage Wheel will sound along with the Fundamental Wheel ❶.
There are two ways to select a Leakage Wheel:
1. Use the [VALUE] knob, or,
2. If you want to locate a certain Leakage Wheel quickly, move the Drawbar slightly
while depressing the key you want to regulate (see the illustration on the right).
❸ LEVEL (TW)
Setting Range: -Inf (OFF), -92.0 ~ +4.0 [dB]
Fundamental tone
Leakage tone
100Hz
1kHz
10kHz Frequency
This allows you to adjust the Volume of the selected Leakage Wheel.
NOTE: The overall volume of the selected Wheel may decrease as the Leakage Volume is
increased.
MATRIX LEVEL
❶
❷
❸
Selecting a WHEEL NUMBER to edit
❶ FOOTAGE (TW)
Setting Range: 16, 5-1/3, 8, 4, 2-2/3, 2, 1-3/5, 1-1/3, 1, Perc 2nd, Perc 3rd
❷ NOTE (TW)
Setting Range: 1C ~ 6C
This allows you to select Matrix to adjust the level of each Drawbar and each note.
❸ LEVEL (TW)
Setting Range: -Inf, -92.0 ~ +4.0 [dB]
This allows you to adjust the level of the Matrix selected above.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
NOTE: The Parameters labeled ( T W ) are
Tone Wheel Parameters. You must
Record these Parameters to a Custom
Tone Wheel if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time the
instrument is turned “ON.” See page
128 for instructions on how to do this.
123
CUSTOM PEDAL REG.
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to select or edit the registrations for the PEDAL or Sub-Drawbars.
The Parameters described on this page are grouped in macro-settings called Custom Pedal Registrations. These
Parameters cannot be Recorded as individual Patch Parameters; however, a Custom Pedal Registration (PEDAL REG.)
can be Recorded as part of an ORGAN Patch.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - CUSTOM - PEDAL REG. - [ENTER]
WHAT ARE “SUB-DRAWBARS?”
The Tone Wheel Organs A-100, B-3, C-3 and Mellow contain the “Sub-Drawbar”
registrations. If these ORGAN Types are selected, the Sub-Drawbars will be selected.
SET
On a Tone Wheel Hammond Organ, the harmonic
resources for Pedal tones are combined into two
Drawbars each of which draws a combination
of harmonics instead of individual harmonics as
with the other Drawbars. Over the years, several
different schemes were used to voice the Pedal
Drawbars. These are shown below.
❶
❶ CUSTOM SET
Setting Range: F1 ~ F3, U1 ~ U3
This allows you to select the Custom Number to edit.
The letter “F” stands for Factory (non-re-writable) and “U” stands for User (rewritable).
EACH PEDAL DRAWBAR
❶
❷
❶ SUB DRAWBAR - 16´ (PR)
❷ SUB DRAWBAR - 8´ (PR)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 8
These allow you to adjust the harmonics of each Pedal Drawbar. Adjustable footages
are 16´, 5⅓´, 8´, 4´, 2⅔´, 2´, 13/5´, and 1⅓´.
NOTE: The footages 22⁄3´, 2´, 13⁄5´ and 11⁄3´ in the Sub Drawbar 16´ have softer maximum
volumes than the other footages for fine-adjustment.
NOTE: The Parameters labeled (PR) are Pedal Registration Parameters. You must Record
these Parameters to a Custom Pedal Registration if you want their settings to
be remembered the next time the instrument is turned “ON.” See page 128 for
instructions on how to do this.
Editing Parameters
124
CUSTOM LESLIE
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to select or edit the Parameters for the inbuilt digital Leslie.
The Parameters described on these pages are grouped in macro-settings called Custom Leslie Cabinets.
These Parameters cannot be Recorded as individual Patch Parameters; however, a Custom Leslie Cabinet
can be Recorded as part of an ORGAN Patch.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - CUSTOM - LESLIE - [ENTER]
CABINET NUMBER
❶
W H AT A R E “ C U S T O M L E S L I E
CABINETS?”
❶ CUSTOM CABINET
Setting Range: F1 ~ F8
This allows you to select the Cabinet Number to edit.
The letter “F” stands for Factory (non-re-writable) and “U” stands for User (rewritable).
SPEAKER
❶ SPEAKER (L)
Setting Range: L145 Front, L145 Rear, L147 Front, L147 Rear, L122 Front, L122
Rear, Cone Type, PR-40 Type
This allows you to select the Custom Leslie Cabinet.
NOTE: See the APPENDIX on page 193 for more information about Custom Leslie Cabinets.
ROTOR
All of the Parameters described on this page and
on the following page comprise a Custom Leslie
Cabinet. These Parameters cannot be Recorded as
individual Patch Parameters; however, a Custom
Cabinet can be Recorded as part of a Patch.
The SKX PRO has 8 different Custom Leslie
Cabinets. These are Factory Cabinets (indicated by
an “F”) which are permanently written in memory.
However, you can create and Record up to 8 User
Cabinets (which will be indicated by a “U”).
To create and Record a Leslie Cabinet, use the
LESLIE FUNCTION Mode to modify the sonic
characteristics of one of the “F” Cabinets. After you
have made all of your changes, you can Record
them as a “U” Leslie Cabinet.
For a list of the Factory Leslie Cabinets consult the
APPENDIX at the back of this Manual starting on
page 193. For a complete list of Leslie Parameters
consult the APPENDIX on page 195.
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❶ SLOW SPEED - HORN / DRUM (L)
Setting Range: 0, 20 ~ 120 [rpm]
These allow you to set the rotor speed for the “SLOW” or Chorale Mode.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
#2
#3
#1
125
❷ FAST SPEED - HORN / DRUM (L)
Setting Range: 0, 200 ~ 500 [rpm]
Mode: SLOW
FAST
SLOW
FAST
STOP
These allow you to set the rotor speed for the “FAST” or
Tremolo Mode.
❸ RISE TIME - HORN / DRUM (L)
Setting Range: 0.8 ~ 12.5 [sec] (Horn)
1.0 ~ 12.5 [sec] (Drum)
These allow you to adjust the time for the rotors to “ramp up”
to “FAST” Mode when switching from ‘SLOW’ or ‘STOP” to
‘FAST’ Mode.
❹ FALL TIME - HORN / DRUM (L)
Rotor
Speed:
Delay
Time
Rise
Time
Fall
Time
Brake
Time
Setting Range: 0.8 ~ 12.5 [sec] (Horn)
1.0 ~ 12.5 [sec] (Drum)
These allows you to adjust the time for the rotor to reach the ‘SLOW” rotor speed
when switching from “FAST” to “SLOW” Mode.
❺ BRAKE TIME - HORN / DRUM (L)
Setting Range: 0.8 ~ 12.5 [sec] (Horn)
1.0 ~ 12.5 [sec] (Drum)
This allows you to adjust the time for the rotor to Stop when switching from “FAST
to “STOP” Mode.
❻ DELAY TIME - HORN / DRUM (L)
WHAT IS THAT “TIME” BASED ON?
It is different that the “TIME” between a Mode
to a Mode of the Leslie effect by the speed at
that time.
On this instrument, the “TIME” is displayed
based on changing speed between 40 rpm
and 400 rpm.
Setting Range: 0.0 ~ 1.0 [sec]
These allow you to adjust the time to start changing the speed when the
Mode is switched.
Horn Rotor
Cen
ter
MICROPHONE SETTINGS
These Parameters allow you to replicate various Microphone placements of
a Leslie Speaker Cabinet.
❶ LEVEL - HORN / DRUM / SUB BASS (L)
Setting Range: -INF, -76 ~ 0 [dB]
Wid
th
t
Dis
an
ce
These allow you to adjust the volume levels of the Horn Rotor, Drum
Rotor and Sub Bass
NOTE: The Sub Bass sound is “dry” - not modulated.
❷ WIDTH - HORN / DRUM (L)
Setting Range: 0 ~ 40 [cm]
These allow you to adjust the distance between Left and Right Microphones.
At “0” there is no separation.
A higher value will increase the stereo separation.
❸ CENTER - HORN / DRUM (L)
Drum Rotor
Sub Bass
Setting Range: -50 ~ +50 [cm]
This allows you to adjust the offset between the center of two microphones and the
pivot of the rotor.
On a Leslie Speaker Cabinet the Horn Rotor rotates counter-clockwise and the Drum
Rotor rotates clockwise. The digital Leslie replicates this feature. To emphasize the
‘approaching the opening of the rotor’, set a ‘+’ value for the Horn rotor, and a ‘-’
value for the Drum rotor.
❹ DISTANCE - HORN / DRUM (L)
Setting Range: 30 ~ 200 [cm]
These are for replicating distance settings between a Leslie Speaker and the
microphones. A lower value results in a deeper effect.
NOTE: The Parameters labeled “L” are Leslie
Parameters. You must Record these
Parameters to a Custom Leslie
Cabinet if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time the
instrument is turned “ON.” See page
128 for instructions on how to do this.
Editing Parameters
126
CUSTOM PIPE
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to select or edit the characteristics of the Pipe Voices.
The Parameters described on these pages are grouped in macro-settings called Custom PIPES.
These Parameters cannot be Recorded as individual Patch Parameters; however, a Custom Pipe can
be Recorded as part of an ORGAN Patch.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - CUSTOM - PIPE - [ENTER]
SET
WHAT ARE “CUSTOM PIPES?”
All of the Parameters described on this page
and on the following page comprise a Custom
Pipe. These Parameters cannot be Recorded as
individual Patch Parameters; however, a Custom
Pipe can be Recorded as part of a Patch.
The SKX PRO has 3 different Factory Custom Pipes,
indicated by an “F,” which are permanently written
in memory. You can create and Record up to 3 User
Custom Pipes which will be indicated by a “U.”
To create and Record a Custom Pipe, use the PIPE
FUNCTION Mode to edit the Parameters of one of
the “F” Custom Pipes. After you have made all of
your changes, you can Save them as a “U” Custom
Pipe.
❶
❶ CUSTOM SET
Setting Range: F1 ~ F3, U1 ~ U3
This allows you to select the Custom Pipe Number to edit.
The letter “F” means factory (not re-writable) and “U” means user (re-writable).
UPPER / LOWER / PEDAL STOP SET
This allows you to assign Pipe Voices to the Drawbars and to adjust the Parameters
of each Stop to your preference. Each Parameter is explained in detail starting below.
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
❾
❶ STOP (Pi)
This allows you to assign a Pipe Stop to each of the Drawbars.
NOTE: See page 179 for a list of the available Pipe Stops.
❷ VOLUME (Pi)
Setting Range: -Inf, -92.0 ~ +4.0 [dB]
This allows you to adjust the Volume of each Pipe Stop.
❸ FOOTAGE (Pi)
Setting Range: 32, 16, 5 1/3, 8, 4, 2 2/3, 2, 1 3/5, 1 1/3, 1
This allows you to adjust the Pitch of each Pipe Stop. The pitches are expressed in
Footages.
NOTE: See page 38 for more information about Drawbars and their Footage designations.
❹ TUNE (Pi)
Setting Range: -50 ~ ±0 ~ +50 [cent]
This allows you to detune the pitch of the selected Pipe Voice Up or Down by cents
(50 cents = one quarter-step).
❺ TREMULANT (Pi)
Settings: Off, On
This allows you to add Tremulant to the Pipe Voices using the [VIBRATO] controls.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
TREMULANT
Pi p e o r g a n s t y p i c a l l y h a v e o n e o r m o r e
“tremulants” which vary the air pressure to the
pipes periodically, producing a vibrato or tremolo
effect.
127
❻ CHIFF (Pi)
Settings: Off, Soft, Mid, Loud
WHAT IS “CHIFF?”
This allows you to adjust the amount of Chiff or attack for the selected Pipe Voice.
Off ...............No Chiff.
Soft .............A small amount of chiff.
Mid..............A moderate amount of chiff.
Loud ...........The maximum amount of chiff.
NOTE: Reed stops such as “Hautbois,” “Trompette” and “Cornopean” do not receive Chiff.
On a pipe organ, when a flue stop such as a
Diapason, String or Flute is drawn and a key is
depressed, a valve opens, and air escapes through
the hole in which the pipe sits, allowing the pipe to
sound. When the air first enters the pipe, there is
a small, short burst of upper harmonics before the
tone develops fully. The term “Chiff ” was coined by
pipe organ makers to describe this sound.
❼ CUTOFF (Pi)
Setting Range: -127 ~ 0
This allows you to adjust the Cutoff Frequency (brightness).
❽ PAN (Pi)
Setting Range: L64 ~ C ~ R63
This allows you to adjust the basic direction of the pipe.
❾ IMAGE (Pi)
This allows you to adjust the arrangement of the pipe.
FIX
L-R
No imaging - all the notes sound from the
center).
Pipes producing lower pitches are on the left.
Playing notes chromatically going up on the
keyboard will cause the pipes on the left to
sound first
No image
C
C
D
E
E
F
F G
G A
B B
R-L
B B
E
F
G F
A G
PYR
C
E
F
D
E
INV
C
D
E
F
A
C
G
B
C
D
E
E
F
F
Pipes producing higher pitches are on the
right. Playing notes chromatically going up on
the keyboard will cause the pipes on the right
to sound first
When notes are played chromatically going
from left to right on the keyboard, the notes
start in the center and alternate between left
and right
C
G
B
C
When notes are played chromatically going
up on the keyboard, the notes start at one end
and alternate between left and right until they
meet in the center.
WHAT IS “PIPE VOICE IMAGING?”
The pipes of a pipe organ are arranged into
sets called ranks. Each ranks consists of pipes
representing a specific sound on the organ - Open
Diapason, Trompette, etc. (In keeping with the
different philosophies of organ sound, many organ
stop names are of European origin; hence the use
of French, German, Dutch, etc.)
The pipes of each rank are supported by an
assembly called a chest. The pipes can be arranged
in many different ways on the chest. The pipe
arrangement chosen by the maker depends on
several things - aesthetics, musical, etc. - but the
four most common ones are shown on the left.
The t wo pipe placement schemes on the
immediate left are sometimes referred to as “CC  ” placement due to chromatic notes being
separated.
G
G
A
B B
NOTE: The Parameters labeled (Pi) are Pipe
Parameters. You must Record these
Parameters to a Custom Pipe if you want
their settings to be remembered the
next time the instrument is turned “ON.”
See page 128 for instructions on how
to do this.
Editing Parameters
128
RECORDING A CUSTOM SETTING
To Record a Custom Setting, do the following:
① PRESS THE RED [RECORD] BUTTON
③ NAME THE CUSTOM SETTING
Enter the Name.
After you have made your changes to a Custom Setting, press
the red [RECORD] button. The RECORD Page will display.
② SELECT THE ITEM TO RECORD
[Aa1]................. Changes the character type.
[1] - [10] .......... Selects the highlighted character.
[Insert] ............ Inserts a space at the cursor.
[Delete] ........... Deletes a letter at the cursor.
[VALUE]........... Changes the letter at the cursor.
④ RECORD THE SETTING
After Naming your Custom Setting, press the [ENTER] button.
The message shown below will display for approximately 1
second:
❶
❷
❸
NOTE: Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is
displaying.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Record, press the [MENU/EXIT] button
instead of the [ENTER] button.
❶ CONTENT
Displays content to record.
Tone Wheel ... Custom Tone Wheel
Leslie ................ Custom Cabinet
Pedal Reg ....... Custom Sub Drawbars
Pipe .................. Custom Pipe
⑤ RETURN TO THE PLAY MODE
PLAY
❷ TO
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the User Number to Record.
NOTE: You can also select a User Number by using the numbered
[FAVORITE] buttons to type in the number and pressing the
[ENTER] button.
NOTE: If edits have been made to a Custom Setting, an “E” will
appear to the right of the CONTENT icon.
NOTE: You CANNOT Record to an “F” setting.
❸ RECORD
After you have selected the User Number, press the red
[RECORD] button. The Naming screen will display.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the PLAY mode.
129
SYSTEM
System Parameters allow you to adjust functions such as the Parameters for the AUDIO jacks, the
MIDI Ports, various Controllers, loading and saving Patches, etc. A complete list is shown on this page.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND CONTENTS
SOUND (P. 130)
 Master Tune
 Transpose
 Master Equalizer
AUDIO (P. 131)




[ROTARY OUT] jack
[PEDAL OUT] jack
[INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks
Audio channels of the Leslie Speaker system
CONTROL (P. 132)









Foot Switch
Expression Pedal
Damper Pedal
[USER] button
[PITCH BEND] wheel
Tone Wheel Brake
Display
Action of the knobs and buttons
Keyboard
PATCH LOAD (P. 139)
Parameter range to load when a Combination is selected.
FAVORITES (P. 140)
 Action of the Favorites feature
 Edit the Favorites for Combinations
 Edit the Favorites for Display pages
MIDI (P. 158)
 Purpose of the MIDI Ports
 Send/Receive a Memory Dump
 MIDI Channels
GLOBAL (P. 142)
 Auto Power Off
 USB Mass Storage
DELETE (P. 144)
Delete user content(s)
DEFAULT (P. 145)
Initialize each content to factory-default settings
INFORMATION (P. 146)
 Display Software Versions
 Update Software
NOTE: The Parameters in this Mode are System
Parameters. You must Record these
Parameters if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time
the instrument is turned “ON.” See
page143 for instructions on how to do
this.
Editing Parameters
130
SOUND
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to adjust the MASTER TUNE, MASTER TRANSPOSE and
MASTER EQUALIZER Parameters which affect the entire instrument.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - SOUND - [ENTER]
MASTER TUNE
MASTER EQUALIZER
❶
❶ MASTER TUNE
Setting Range: A=430 ~ 450 [Hz]
This allows you to adjust the timbre or tone quality of the
entire instrument (P. 117).
This allows you to adjust the pitch of the entire instrument Up
or Down 10 cents (100 cents = one semitone or half-step).
MASTER TRANSPOSE
❶
❶ MASTER TRANSPOSE
Setting Range: -6 ~ ±0 ~ +6 [semitones]
This allows you to Transpose the entire instrument Up or
Down 6 semitones.
NOTE: This Parameter is linked to the [TRANSPOSE] button on the
Control Panel.
NOTE: When the power to the SKX PRO is turned “OFF,” this
Transpose setting is not retained. It will be set to “0” when
the power is next turned “ON.”
NOTE: The Parameters in this Mode are System
Parameters. You must Record these
Parameters if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time
the instrument is turned “ON.” See
page143 for instructions on how to do
this.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
131
AUDIO
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to select how to route the audio signals from the instrument.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - AUDIO - [ENTER]
OUTPUT
❶
❷
LESLIE
❶
❸
❶ ROTARY OUT
Settings: Not Used, Used
This allows you to select whether to route an audio signal from
the Tone Wheel or Transistor ORGAN Types to the [ROTARY
OUT] jack.
❶ EXTERNAL LESLIE CHANNEL
This allows you to adjust the correct routing of the audio signals
depending on the Leslie Speaker connected to the instrument
via the [LESLIE 11-pin] socket.
Not Used ........ The audio from the Tone Wheel and Transistor ORGAN
Types will be routed to the [LINE OUT] jacks.
Used ................. The audio from the Tone Wheel and Transistor ORGAN
Types will be routed to the [ROTARY OUT] jack instead of
the [LINE OUT] jacks.
❷ PEDAL OUT
Settings: Not Used, Used
Leslie Rotary
channel
Line Out and
Leslie Stationary
channels
Tone Wheel and
Transistor Organ
Others
Ch.
Option
This allows you to select whether to route an audio signal to the
[PEDAL OUT] jack.
Not Used ........ The audio from the PEDAL Part of the ORGAN Section will
be routed to the [LINE OUT] jacks.
Used ................. The audio from the PEDAL Part of the ORGAN Section will
be routed to the [PEDAL OUT] jack instead of the [LINE
OUT] jacks.
❸ INDIVIDUAL OUT MODE
Setting Range: See below
This allows you to adjust the assignment of audio signals to the
[INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks.
Off ..................... All audio from the PIANO, ENSEMBLE and MONO SYNTH
Sections will be present at the [LINE OUT] jacks.
Piano Stereo . The audio from the PIANO Section will be routed to both
[INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks.
Ensemble
Stereo .............. The audio from the ENSEMBLE Section will be routed to
both [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks.
Synth Stereo The audio from the MONO SYNTH Section will be routed to
both [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks.
Piano/
Ensemble ....... The PIANO Section will be routed to the Left [INDIVIDUAL
OUT] jack and the ENSEMBLE Section will be routed to the
Right [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jack.
Piano/Synth.. The PIANO Section will be routed to the Left [INDIVIDUAL
OUT] jack and the MONO SYNTH Section will be routed to
the Right [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jack.
Ensemble/
Synth................ The ENSEMBLE Section will be routed to the Left
[INDIVIDUAL OUT] jack and the ENSEMBLE Section will be
routed to the Right [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jack.
1
disregards [BYPASS]
3
1+LINE
regards [BYPASS]
Rotary
Stationary
1 ...................If a single channel Leslie Speaker is connected, the audio
from the Tone Wheel / Transistor Organs is sent to the
Rotary Channel regardless of the status of the [BYPASS]
button.
3 ...................If a multi-channel Leslie Speaker is connected, the audio
from the Tone Wheel / Transistor Organs is sent to the
Rotary Channel only if the [BYPASS] button is “ON.” If the
[BYPASS] button is “OFF,” the audio from the Tone Wheel /
Transistor Organs is sent to the Stationary Channel(s).
1+LINE.......If a single channel Leslie Speaker is connected, the
audio from the Tone Wheel / Transistor Organs is sent to
the Rotary Channel and the audio from the other Voice
Sections will be sent to the [LINE OUT] jacks and can be
heard through a connected amplifier or speaker system.
NOTE: The Parameters in this Mode are System Parameters. You
must Record these Parameters if you want their settings to
be remembered the next time the instrument is turned “ON.”
See page143 for instructions on how to do this.
NOTE: If the [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks are used, the selected
Section(s) will not sound through the [LINE OUT] jacks.
Editing Parameters
132
CONTROL
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to select the Parameters for the various Controls, including Foot
Switches, Expression Pedals, controls on the Control Panel and the display.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - CONTROL - [ENTER]
or, Press the [CONTROL] button.
FOOT SWITCH 1/2
WHAT IS “TRS?”
TRS is an acronym for “Tip-Ring-Sleeve,” and refers
to the fact that a connecting plug can have more
than one connector. Using a Stereo Adapter, more
than one Foot Switch can be connected to the
SKX PRO, thereby allowing you to control more
than one function using the same Foot Switch.
jack.
❶
❷
❸
Tip
❹
This Page allows you to select the Function of devices connected to the Foot Switch
[FOOT SWITCH 1/2] jacks.
❶ DEVICE
This allows you to select the device to be connected to the [FOOT SWITCH 1] jack.
Foot Switch ...................... Foot Switch.
Leslie Switch .................... Leslie Switch (such as CU-1 or FS-10TL).
Ring
Sleeve
FAVORITE FORWARD/REVERSE
By selecting “Favorite Fwd, Rev,” Favorites can be
selected sequentially by using the Foot Switch to
advance either forward or backward. Also, if either
“1” or “10” are selected, the sequence will “roll over”
to the next numbered Bank (see the illustration
below).
NOTE: The FOOT SWITCH 2 jack will not accept a Leslie Switch.
❷ MODE - TIP
Bank 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
This allows you to select the function of the “Tip Mode” of a connected Foot Switch.
Off ...............................................No function.
Leslie S/F Alt, Mom, Tri ......Allows you to switch the Leslie Rotors among “Slow/Fast/Stop.”
Alt ..................................Alternates between “Fast/Slow” or “Fast/Stop” depending on the
position of the [STOP] button.
TRI.................................Switches to Stop when the foot switch is pressed and held down
for approximately 1 second.
MOM............................Switches to Fast while the foot switch is held down. When
released, it switches to either Slow or Stop depending on the
position of the [STOP] button.
Tone Wheel Brake ................Allows you to bend the pitch, with the amount being determined
by a Parameter setting (P. 135).
Favorite Fwd, Rev ................Allows you to move Forward or Backward through the Favorites
(P. 27).
Spring Shock..........................Allows you to produce the effect of a Spring Reverb unit being
jostled.
MFX2 Delay Time .................Allows you to adjust the Delay Time of the Effects, at the interval
of pressing the Foot Switch. The delayed sound disappears by
the Foot Switch is held down (P. 115).
Organ U&L Sustain .............Allows you to add Sustain to the UPPER and LOWER ORGAN
tones (except Pipe) (P. 84).
Pedal To Lower ......................Allows you to activate [PEDAL TO LOWER] (P. 55).
Bass 1C - Bass 3C ..................Allows you to trigger the specified note of the PEDAL Part.
ProChord .................................Allows you to activate the ProChord harmony (P. 92).
NOTE: All of the above functions can be set for either Tip or Ring Mode. However, Ring Mode
will have no effect if only one Foot Switch is connected to the FOOT SW jack.
❸ MODE - RING
This allows you to select the function of the “Ring Mode” of a connected Foot
Switch.
❹ CALIBRATE
This allows you to configure a Foot Switch to work properly with the SKX PRO.
To set this Parameter, move the cursor to this icon and press the [ENTER] button
without pressing the Foot Switch.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Bank 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Bank 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPRING SHOCK
Spring Shock occurs when the springs in a spring
reverb unit move around and strike the reverb
tank, resulting in a loud “Bang.” This has usually
been regarded as a negative effect; however,
some modern and progressive music uses this
as a musical effect. This Parameter allows you
to introduce the effect of a spring reverb being
jostled.
BASS 1C - BASS 3C
Many jazz and blues organists provide a bass line
with the left hand on the Lower Manual and strike
one Pedal note at the onset of each bass note to
give the effect of a plucked string bass (called a
“thump”). The BASS 1C - BASS 3C Parameter allows
you to replicate this effect on the SKX PRO.
CALIBRATE
Some Foot Switches, such as Hammond, are “+”
or “positive” (make contact when pressed) while
others are “-” or “negative” (break contact when
pressed). The CALIBRATE Parameter allows you
to configure a Foot Switch so that it will function
correctly with the SKX PRO.
133
EXPRESSION PEDAL
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❼
❽
EXPRESSION LIMIT
This Page allows you to control how a connected Expression Pedal will function.
❶ SOURCE
This allows you to select the source of expression control.
Exp. Pedal ..... Instrument Expression is controlled by a connected Expression Pedal.
MIDI .................. MIDI Expression Data (CC#11) will be received at the UPPER Keyboard Channel.
Both.................. Instrument Expression is controlled by both Expression Pedal and MIDI Expression
data.
❷ POLARITY
NORMAL
MIN
MAX
Potentiometer
REVERSE
MIN
On many home audio components, there is a
control called “Loudness.” This is intended to
correct an anomaly of the human ear whereby
high and low frequencies appear to be lacking at
low volume levels.
The SKX PRO incorporates a “Loudness” algorithm
similar to the one found on home audio. At lower
volume levels, both high and low frequencies are
boosted so that a flatter frequency response will
be perceived by the ear.
Loudness
Output
MAX
Potentiometer
This allows you to set the polarity type of a connected Expression Pedal.
Expression = Maximum
LF
Limit
Min. Level
Normal ............ Hammond EXP-50J pedal, etc.
Reverse ........... Expression Pedal with reverse polarity.
❸ ORGAN MINIMUM LEVEL
Setting Range: Off, -40 ~ 0 [dB]
This allows you to set the amount of volume when the Expression Pedal is “closed” or
set at its minimum position. At “Off” no sound will be heard.
❹ LIMIT HF
HF
Limit
500Hz
2kHz Frequency
Loudness
Expression = Minimum
LF
Limit
Setting Range: Off, -40 ~ 0 [dB]
Output
HF
Limit
Min. Level
This allows you to adjust the amount of High Frequencies (above 2kHz) that will be
heard when the Expression Pedal is set at minimum.
❺ LIMIT LF
500Hz
2kHz Frequency
Expression Limit
Setting Range: Off, -40 ~ 0 [dB]
This allows you to adjust the amount of Low Frequencies (below 500Hz) that will be
heard when the Expression Pedal is set at minimum.
❻ GAIN
Setting Range: 70 ~ 130 [%]
This allows you to adjust the range of a connected Expression Pedal. To set this
parameter, depress the connected Expression Pedal at maximum, and set this parameter
to the minimum value that the Expression Monitor ❽ indicates “127”.
❼ CURVE
Value
127
Setting Range: 1 ~ 3
This allows you to set the “curve,” or change of expression value corresponding to the
angle of the Expression Pedal when depressed (see the illustration on the right).
❽ MONITOR
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This displays the current Expression Value. The Expression Monitor can be useful as
a troubleshooting aid if you either don’t hear any sound or can’t change the volume
using a connected Expression Pedal.
3
2
1
0
Degree
Expression Curve
Editing Parameters
134 CONTROL - continued
DAMPER
DAMPER TYPES
There are various types of Damper or Sustain
Pedals. The SKX PRO supports the types shown
below.
❶
Switch
Push ON
❹
or,
❷
Push OFF
❸
This Page allows you to adjust Parameters for the Damper Pedal.
Half - Y
❶ TYPE
This allows you to adjust the type of the Damper Pedal to connect.
SWITCH ........... Use “switch” type pedal such as VFP1
HALF-Y ............ Use “potentiometer” type Y
HALF-R ............ Use “potentiometer” type R
HALF-K ............ Use “potentiometer” type K
MIN
Half - R
❷ GAIN
Setting Range: 70 ~ 130 [%]
This allows you to adjust the range of a connected Damper Pedal. You can select from
“70%” through “130%;” however, the amount of audible change may differ depending
on the specific Damper Pedal used. Use this Parameter to obtain the desired response
from your particular pedal.
❸ CALIBRATE
This allows you to configure a Damper Pedal to work properly with the SKX PRO. To
set this Parameter, move the cursor to this icon and press the [ENTER] button without
pressing the Damper Pedal.
❹ MONITOR
This allows you to see the current Damper value.
USER
❶
❶ MODE
This allows you to assign a function to the [USER] button.
Off...................................................No function.
Pedal Sustain ............................Allows you to turn Pedal Sustain “ON” or “OFF.”
Organ Upper Sustain ............Allows you to turn ORGAN Upper Sustain “ON” or “OFF.”
Organ Lower Sustain.............Allows you to turn ORGAN Lower Sustain “ON” or “OFF.”
Tone Wheel Brake ................Allows you to bend the pitch, with the amount being determined
by a Parameter setting.
Spring Shock..........................Allows you to produce the effect of a Spring Reverb unit being
jostled.
MFX2 Delay Time .................... Allows you to adjust the Delay Time of the Multi Effects 2, at the
interval of pressing the [USER] button. The delay is heard while
the [USER] button is held down (see page 77).
MFX1/2 .........................................Allows you to turn each Section Effect “ON” or “OFF.”
External Zone 1/2/3 ...............Allows you to turn each External Zone “ON” or “OFF.”
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
MAX
Potentiometer
MIN
MAX
Potentiometer
Half - K
MIN
MAX
Potentiometer
135
PITCH BEND
❶
This allows you to adjust the Pitch Bend functions.
❶ RANGE
Settings: Patch, 0 ~ 12 [semitones]
This allows you to adjust how the [PITCH BEND] wheel will respond when a
Combination or Patch is selected.
Patch ................ Uses the value specified for the Combination or Patch.
0 ~ 12 ............... Sets the Pitch Bend range by semitones and overrides the value specified for the
Combination or Patch.
TONE WHEEL BRAKE
❶
❷
❸
TONE WHEEL BRAKE
This allows you to adjust the Tone Wheel Brake effect.
❶ RANGE
Setting Range: -24 ~ +12 [semitones]
This allows you to adjust the range of the pitch change.
❷ TIME
Setting Range: 0.1 ~ 5.0 [seconds]
This allows you to adjust the rate at which the pitch changes.
❸ AMPLITUDE
Settings: Off, On
On a vintage B-3/C-3/A-100, the synchronous
motor running the tone generator turns at a
constant speed; therefore “pitch bending” is not
possible. However, some jazz players discovered
that by turning the RUN switch “OFF” then quickly
back “ON” again, a pseudo “pitch-bend” effect
could be created. You can replicate this effect
using this function.
This allows you to adjust whether the Volume changes or not along with the pitch.
Editing Parameters
136 CONTROL - continued
DISPLAY
❶
❷
❸
❹
This Page allows you to adjust the performance of the display.
❶ SHORTCUT
Setting Range: 0 ~ 2 [sec], No
This allows you to select how long a button must be held before the FUNCTION
Mode Page controlled by that button appears.
NOTE: If you select ”No,” the Shortcut feature is disabled.
❷ TIME OUT
Setting Range: 4 ~ 16 [sec], No
This allows you to select how long the display will continue to show a FUNCTION
Mode Page via the “Shortcut” before reverting to PLAY Mode.
NOTE: If you select “No,” the current FUNCTION Mode Page will continue to display until
another page is selected.
❸ POP UP
Setting Range: No, 0.5 ~ 2.0 [sec]
This allows you to select the interval at which a “Pop Up” is displayed when you
move a knob such as [REVERB] or one of the Voice Section [VOLUME] controls.
NOTE: If you select “No,” the current Pop Up will continue to display until another page is
selected.
❹ BRIGHTNESS
Setting Range: 1 ~ 10
This allows you to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the display.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
137
PANEL
❶
❷
❸
❹
❻
❺
❶
❷
❸
❹
This Page allows you to adjust the performance of the various controls on the Control
Panel.
OCT / XPOSE - ORGAN
OCT / XPOSE - PIANO
OCT / XPOSE - ENSEMBLE
OCT / XPOSE - SYNTH
Setting Range: Every, Next
These allow you to adjust how the OCTAVE [DOWN] [UP] buttons control Octave
selection or Transposition.
Every ................ The Octave or Transposition will change while keys are pressed and held.
Next .................. If a key or keys are pressed and held and the Octave or Transposition is changed, the
key(s) must be released and pressed again before the Octave or Transposition takes
effect.
❺ ALLOCATE MODE
Settings: Additive, X-Cancel
This allows you to select the performance of the [ALLOCATE] buttons.
Additive.......... The [ALLOCATE] buttons will turn “ON” and “OFF” individually.
X-Cancel ......... “Cross-Canceling” - When one [ALLOCATE} button is turned “ON,” any other
[ALLOCATE] buttons that are “ON” will turn “OFF.” If an [ALLOCATE] button is already
“ON,” Press and Hold it while turning another [ALLOCATE] button “ON” will light both
buttons.
❻ KNOB / SLIDER MODE
Settings: Mom, Access
This allows you to adjust how a value is affected when a knob or slider is moved.
Mom ................. When a knob or slider is moved, the value will change immediately.
Across .............. When a knob or slider is moved the value will not change until the current value
is arrived at by the movement of the knob or slider, at which point the value will
change.
USING “MOM” AND “ACROSS”
When “Mom” is selected and a knob or slider is
moved, the value changes instantly. However,
there may be occasions when you want a value
to change gradually instead of suddenly. Select
“Across” to change values gradually. This is
especially helpful when selecting Patches since
you can use “Across” to “morph” one Patch into
another.
NOTE: The Parameters in this Mode are System
Parameters. You must Record these
Parameters if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time
the instrument is turned “ON.” See
page143 for instructions on how to do
this.
Editing Parameters
138 CONTROL - continued
KEYBOARD
❶
❷
This Page allows you to adjust the performance of the keyboard of the SKX PRO.
❶ VELOCITY OFFSET
Setting Range: -32 ~ ±0 ~ +32
This allows you to adjust the relative loudness of notes played on the keyboard.
NOTE: The note velocity of the SKX PRO is from “0” to “127.” These are the upper and lower
limits.
❷ ORGAN SOUNDING POINT
Setting Range: Shallow, Deep
This allows you to select the sounding point of the ORGAN Section.
Shallow ........... The ORGAN Section sounds at a shallower key depth than the other Sections.
Deep................. The ORGAN Section sounds at the same key depth as the other Sections.
NOTE: If other Sections are allocated along with the ORGAN Section ([ALLOCATE] buttons
“ON”), the sounding point of the ORGAN Section will automatically be set at “Deep.”
“Shallow” sounds at
“Deep” sounds at
Only Organ is allocated.
Only Organ is allocated.
Allocated together.
Allocated together.
NOTE: If “Shallow” is selected and a key is depressed, the ORGAN Section will sound when
the key travel reaches the “Shallow” sounding point, but MIDI Note data will not be
transmitted unless or until the key reaches the “Deep” sounding point. If the key
reaches the “Shallow” sounding point but does not travel all the way down to the
“Deep” sounding point, MIDI Note data will not be transmitted.
Sounding and Sending depth at “Shallow”
Sounds Organ Section.
Sends a MIDI note.
NOTE: The Parameters in this Mode are System
Parameters. You must Record these
Parameters if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time
the instrument is turned “ON.” See
page143 for instructions on how to do
this.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
139
PATCH LOAD
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to select which Parameters of the instrument will be Recalled as part of a Patch.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - PATCH LOAD - [ENTER]
All the Parameters described here have “ON” and “OFF” settings.
On...................... The Parameter setting will be remembered as part of a Patch
Off ..................... The Parameter setting will not be remembered as part of a Patch.
COMBI PATCH LOAD
PATCH LOAD EXAMPLE
When a Combination is selected,
Example 1: On a vintage B-3/C-3/A-100, changing
an Upper Preset will change only the Drawbar
registration for the Upper Manual. To replicate this
on the SKX PRO, turn the ORGAN and REG. UPPER
Parameters “ON” and turn all the other Parameters
“OFF.”
Example 2: To change the other Sections except
ORGAN, turn the ORGAN Parameter “OFF” and turn
the other Section Parameters “ON.”
This Page allows you to select which Parameters to include as part of a Combination.
ORGAN ............................... ORGAN Section.
PIANO ................................. PIANO Section.
ENSEMBLE ........................ ENSEMBLE Section.
SYNTH ................................. MONO SYNTH Section.
INT. ZONE ......................... Internal Zones.
EXT. ZONE ........................ External Zones.
REVERB............................... Reverb effect.
ORGAN PATCH LOAD
This Page allows you to select which Parameters to include as part of an ORGAN
Patch.
REG. UPPER ...................... UPPER Drawbar Registration.
REG. L/P.............................. LOWER and PEDAL Drawbar Registrations.
DB PARAM ........................ General ORGAN Section Parameters such as Drawbar (except Drawbar
Registration), Contact & Sustain.
ANIMATION ...................... Vibrato and Chorus, Leslie.
PERCUSSION.................... Percussion Parameters.
EFFECT................................ Matching Transformer, Overdrive, Multi Effects 1&2, Equalizer.
NOTE: The Parameters in this Mode are System
Parameters. You must Record these
Parameters if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time
the instrument is turned “ON.” See
page143 for instructions on how to do
this.
Editing Parameters
140
FAVORITE
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to control how Favorites are recalled using the numbered
[FAVORITE] buttons.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - FAVORITES - [ENTER]
Or, Press and Hold any number button [1] to [10].
ACCESS
Press the [ENTER] button to finish Recording.
Direct:
❶
This allows you to recall Combinations and Bundles by
direct numerical input.
To recall a Combination or Bundle in this Mode, use the
numbered [FAVORITE] buttons to enter a 3-digit number
representing the Combination you want and press the
[ENTER] button.
For example, to recall F010, press the [BANK] button for
several times until shown “F”, type the Number button [1]
[10](becomes a “0”), and press the [ENTER] button.
❶ ACCESS MODE
This Page allows you to select how the numbered [FAVORITE]
buttons recall Combinations.
Associate:
Number
Bank
1
2
3
1
U011 U012 U011
2
U024 U045 U023
3
F061
F062
NOTE: This mode cannot associate a numbered [FAVORITE] button
with a Combination.
BANK 1 - 10
F063
❶
❷
This allows you to press a numbered [FAVORITE] button to
recall the Combination associated with that button.
To associate a Favorite and the current Combination, Press
and Holding the [RECORD] button and press a Number
button on the PLAY mode.
Bundle:
Number
1
2
3
1
B001
B002
B003
2
B011
B012
B013
3
B021
B022
B023
Bank
This allows you to press a Number button to recall BUNDLEs
(Combination Parameters, ORGAN and MONO SYNTH
Patches). See the above chart for details.
To record a BUNDLE, Press and Hold the [RECORD] button
and press a Number button on the PLAY mode. The current
settings (including Combination, Organ and Mono Synth
parameters) will be recorded as a BUNDLE.
This allows you to associate and confirm the assignment
of Combinations to Number buttons when the ACCESS
MODE is at “Associate.”
❶ FAVORITES Number
Shows the number for Number button of the FAVORITES.
❷ COMBINATION Number
Assigns the Combination associated with this FAVORITE
number.
The Combination is recalled automatically by moved on the
cursor or changed number, and you can play with it.
NOTE: You can also associate Favorites by using the Control Panel
(P. 27).
The dialog box shown above will display. Input the Bundle
name.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
141
DISPLAY
This page allows you to associate and confirm the assignment of
display pages to numbered buttons.
NOTE: You can make associate the Favorites by operating on the top
panel also (P. 71).
Press and Hold
Press
To locate an associated display page, Press and Hold the
[SHIFT] button and press a numbered [FAVORITE] button.
NOTE: The Parameters in this Mode are System
Parameters. You must Record these
Parameters if you want their settings
to be remembered the next time the
instrument is turned “ON.” See page
143 for instructions on how to do this.
Editing Parameters
142
GLOBAL
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to adjust the AUTO POWER OFF and USB Parameters.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - GLOBAL - [ENTER]
POWER
❶
AUTO OFF
❶ MODE
This allows you to select whether the power to the instrument is automatically turned
“OFF” after a certain time period.
30min .............. The AC power to the instrument will turn “OFF” after 30 minutes have elapsed with
no keys or buttons being pressed.
Disable ............ The instrument will turn “ON” or “OFF” with the AC Power Switch, but not turn “OFF”
automatically.
USB
❶
This allows you to Load and Save files from the instrument’s Internal Memory and
access files to or from a host computer via a USB cable.
NOTE: See page 164 “USB Mass Storage” for more details.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
RECORDING SYSTEM PARAMETERS
143
To Record the System Parameters of the SKX PRO, do the following:
① PRESS THE RED [RECORD] BUTTON
After you have made your changes to SYSTEM Parameters,
press the red [RECORD] button. The RECORD Page will
display.
② SELECT THE ITEM TO RECORD
❶
❷
❶ CONTENT
The content to Record will be highlighted.
System ............ System Parameters.
NOTE: If edits have been made to a System Setting, an “E” will
appear to the right of the CONTENT icon.
③ RECORD THE SETTING
Press the [ENTER] button. The message shown below will
display for approximately 1 second:
NOTE: Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is
displaying.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Record, press the [MENU/EXIT] or
[PLAY] button instead of the [ENTER] button.
④ RETURN TO THE PLAY MODE
PLAY
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the PLAY mode.
Editing Parameters
144
DELETE
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to delete “U” (User) contents from the instrument.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - DELETE - [ENTER]
❶
❷
To delete User content(s), do the following:
❶ CONTENT
From the above screen, use the [VALUE] knob to select the content to delete.
Bundle
Combination
Organ Patch
Piano/Ens Patch
Synth Patch
Custom Tone Wheel
Custom Pedal Registration
Custom Leslie Cabinet
Custom Pipe
❷ NUMBER
Use the DIRECTION [} button to move the cursor down and select the item to
Delete. You can select each individual User or Bundle Number as well as “ALL” (all
the User or Bundle Numbers).
❸ DELETE
Use the DIRECTION [} button to move the cursor down to the DELETE
icon and press the [ENTER] button. The display will show “Deleting...” for
approximately 1 second (see the illustration above). When the message “Deleting...”
disappears, the procedure is complete and the DELETE Page will reappear.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Delete, press the [MENU/EXIT] or [PLAY] button instead of the
[ENTER] button.
CAUTION
Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is displaying. Doing so
may cause a malfunction.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
DEFAULT
145
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to reset the SKX PRO to factory-default settings.
To locate this mode:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - DEFAULT - [ENTER]
❶
To reset the instrument to the factory-default settings, do the following:
❶ CONTENT
From the above screen, use the [VALUE] knob to select the content to be initialized.
System ..........................................System Parameters.
All ...................................................All the contents.
❷ DEFAULT
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to the [DEFAULT] icon
and press the [ENTER] button. The display will show “Loading Default...” for
approximately 1 second. When the message “Loading Default...” disappears, the
Default procedure is complete and the DEFAULT Page will reappear.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Default the instrument,, press the [MENU/EXIT] or [PLAY]
button instead of the [ENTER] button.
.
CAUTION
Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is displaying. Doing
so may cause a malfunction.
Editing Parameters
146
INFORMATION
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to see the status of connected devices as well as the status of
the currently installed software. It also allows you to update the system software.
TO LOCATE THIS MODE:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - INFORMATION - [ENTER]
VERSION - FIRMWARE
STATUS DISPLAY
❶
❷
This allows you to see the versions of the main system software.
❹
❺
RELEASE............................. Release Number.
MAIN.................................... Main Processor.
SUB....................................... Sub Processor.
KEY SCAN .......................... Keyscan Processor.
PANEL ................................. Control Processor.
VERSION - CONTENTS
This allows you to see the versions of the Voice Cells.
❸
IS ACTIVE
This allows you to see which peripheral devices are connected.
❶ LINE OUT
Settings: Mono, Stereo
This allows you to adjust how the sounds from the SKX PRO
are routed to the [LINE OUT] jacks.
NOTE: The full effect of the sounds produced by the SKX PRO is best
heard in “Stereo” (both LINE OUT jacks connected to two
sound sources physically separated). If only the L/MONO jack
is connected, the “Pan” function will not be heard.
❷ LESLIE
Settings: No, Yes
This allows you to see the connecting status of the SKX PRO to
a Leslie Speaker Cabinet via the 11-pin [LESLIE] socket.
❸ MIDI IN
Settings: No, Yes
This allows you to see the connecting status of the SKX PRO
to a MIDI device via the [MIDI IN] Port.
NOTE: This shows the receiving condition of the “Active Sense”
message. It may display “No” even if correctly hooked-up
if the connected device does not transmit “Active Sense”
messages (such as the XPK-100 Pedalboard).
❹ FLASH DRIVE
Settings: No, Yes
This allows you to see the connecting status of a USB Flash
Drive. Use this Parameter to determine if a USB Flash Drive is
compatible with the SKX PRO.
❺ HOST
Settings: No, Yes
This allows you to see the connecting status between the
SKX PRO and a computer via a USB cable.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
F. CONTENT ...................... Factory Contents. This is integrated pre-loaded
data. The details are listed below.
TW.ORGAN ....................... Tone Wheel Organ.
TR.ORGAN 1 ..................... Transistor Organ 1.
TR.ORGAN 2 ..................... Transistor Organ 2.
PIPE ...................................... Pipe Organ.
PEDAL DB .......................... Pedal Drawbars.
A.PIANO ............................. Acoustic Piano.
HARPSI ............................... Harpsichord.
CHRO PERC ....................... Chromatic Percussion.
ETHNIC ............................... Ethnic.
WIND ................................... Wind.
CHOIR.................................. Choir.
BASS .................................... Bass.
FREE REED......................... Free Reed.
E.PIANO.............................. Electric Piano.
CLAV .................................... Clav.
GUITAR ............................... Guitar.
SFX ....................................... Sound Effects.
STRINGS ............................. Strings.
SYNTH PAD....................... Synth Pad.
SYNTH LEAD .................... Synth Lead.
PERCUSSION.................... Percussion.
UPDATE
See “Updating the Software” on page 147 for more
information.
UPDATING THE SOFTWARE
147
Periodically, software updates offering enhanced or additional features may be made
available for the SKX PRO.
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to update the software of the SKX PRO from
either the USB Flash Drive or Internal Memory.
PREPARING OPERATING TIME
The update process may take several minutes depending on the
extent of the update. Therefore, if you are updating the System
Software, be sure you set aside enough time in an environment
with a continuous AC power supply.
PREPARING UPDATE FILE
① DOWNLOAD THE UPDATE
PREPARING MEDIA
There are two ways to update this keyboard;
1: Copy the update files to a formatted USB Flash drive and
install the update from the USB Flash drive, or
2: Copy the update files from a computer connected to this
keyboard via a USB cable.
USING A USB FLASH DRIVE
Go to the Hammond website for your region and download
the software update to the desktop of your computer. It will
be a compressed file containing several files called a “.zip” file
② UNZIP THE FILE
Find the “.zip” file on the desktop on your computer and unZIP it. A folder will be created on your desktop having the
same name as the “.zip” file which will contain the software
update files, called “.bin” files.
NOTE: Some web browsers will automatically un-ZIP a “.zip” file after
it has been downloaded.
Turn on the SKX PRO, and insert the USB Flash drive into the
[TO FLASH DRIVE] port.
The message, “Confirming USB...” will display for
approximately 1 second. Please wait for this message to
disappear. The folders and sub-folders necessary for use with
the SKX PRO (P. 162) have been created.
Computer
After doing the above, remove the USB Flash drive from the
SKX PRO and insert it into the computer.
(Continue on the next page.)
USING INTERNAL MEMORY
Computer
Connect the [TO HOST] port and the computer via USB
cable.
Turn on both the SKX PRO and the computer and set the USB
Mass Storage at “ON” (P. 162). The computer will recognize
the Internal Memory of the SKX PRO as a USB external drive.
(Continue on the next page.)
Editing Parameters
148 UPDATING THE SOFTWARE - continued
OPERATION PROCEDURE
① COPY THE “BIN” UPDATE FILE(S)
XXXX.bin
② SELECT THE MEDIA TO READ
Locate the UPDATE FUNCTION Mode Page:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - INFORMATION - [ENTER] UPDATE
YYYY.bin
hammond
C
O
setup
PY
sk_pro
ZZZZ.bin
system
Copy the “.bin” update files into the “system” sub-folder of the
USB Flash drive or the Internal Memory.
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the Media containing the
“.bin” update files. Select “USB Flash Drive” or “Internal
Memory.”
NOTE: “USB Flash Drive” cannot be selected if no USB Flash Drive is
present at the [TO FLASH DRIVE] USB Port.
The following messages will show if there are no update files on
the USB Flash Drive:
No Update File ......................No “.bin” files in the \system\ Folder.
No New Update File.............The “.bin” files are either identical to or
AAAA.bin
older than the ones already installed.
BBBB.bin
hammond
MyOrg_
setup
CCCC.bin
③ START THE UPDATE
system
WARNING
If you are using the Internal Memory to update the
software of your SK PRO, do not attempt to re-name
or delete the folders in the Internal Memory, or format
the Internal Memory from the computer (see the
illustration above). Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to the
[UPDATE] icon and press the [ENTER] button. You will see
a status bar similar to the one shown above during the Update
procedure. Each file being installed will display a separate
status bar.
④ FINISH
When the update is finished, the message shown below:
will display. Turn the power to the SKX PRO “OFF.”
When the power to the SKX PRO is next turned “ON,” the
updated software will take effect.
If you are using a USB Flash Drive to update the software of
your SKX PRO, remove the Flash Drive from your computer
and insert it into the [TO FLASH DRIVE] port of the
SKX PRO. The message, “Confirming USB...” will display
for approximately 1 second. Please wait for this message to
disappear.
NOTE: If you are using the Internal Memory to update the software
of the SKX PRO, omit this step. Go to Step 2 in the next column.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
149
MIDI
150
MIDI
WHAT IS “MIDI”?
“MIDI” (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is the musical instrument industry
standard for exchanging performance information between electronic musical
instruments as well as sequencers, effects, lighting and sound reinforcement gear, etc.
The MIDI standard allows instruments made by different manufacturers to
communicate with each other.
Many types of data can be transmitted and received, including performance
information, Parameter settings, and global commands.
WHAT IS “USB”?
USB (Universal Serial Bus) is an industry standard for connection, communication
and interfacing between computers, peripherals and other electronic devices. The are
many different types of USB connectors; however the SKX PRO implements Type “A”
and Type “B” connectors, which are the most common types for electronic musical
instruments.
MIDI/USB JACKS ON THE SKX PRO
❹
❸
❷
❶
❶ MIDI OUT Port
This Port transmits performance information to an external MIDI device such as a
sound module, sequencer or Digital Audio Workstation (DAW).
❷ MIDI IN Port
This Port receives MIDI information from an external MIDI device such as a
sequencer or DAW.
❸ USB TO HOST Port
This Port will connect to a computer.
❹ USB FLASH DRIVE Port
This Port will accept a USB Flash Drive.
WHAT MIDI CAN DO ON THE SKX PRO
The MIDI implementation of the SKX PRO allows you to:
 Use a MIDI keyboard/pedalboard to expand the playing versatility.
 Control an external sound generator such as a synthesizer or sampler.
 Record/playback performances to an external sequencer or computer.
For easier access to those settings, the SKX PRO is equipped with MIDI Templates.
For a fuller explanation of MIDI Templates, see page 158.
USB TO HOST
The USB TO HOST Port will do the following:
 Send / receive MIDI data (Keyboard channels; Upper, Lower, Pedal and System
Exclusive messages).*1
 Send and Receive Setup and System files.
 Compliant with USB AUDIO Class 1.0.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
USB AUDIO CLASS
The SKX PRO is compliant with USB AUDIO Class
1, the generic device driver which comes preinstalled on both Windows or Mac OS. This means
you can use the USB TO HOST Port to connect the
SKX PRO to a computer and transmit and receive
a MIDI data stream without an exclusive device
driver.
151
MIDI CHANNEL
MIDI information travels along MIDI Channels. These channels are similar
to television channels, in that they provide a way to transmit and receive MIDI
information as well as to differentiate among MIDI information sent to different
devices. The current MIDI specification provides for 16 Channels, all of which travel
along a single cable.
NOTE: In order for MIDI devices properly to communicate, both the sending and receiving
devices must be set to the same MIDI Channel.
MAIN MIDI MESSAGE
MIDI information is grouped into Channel Messages for each of the 16 MIDI
Channels and a System Message which applies to all Channels.
NOTE: See the MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART on page 198 for more details.
CHANNEL MESSAGES
 NOTE ON/NOTE OFF/VELOCITY DATA
This data tells: which key (Note Number) is played, at what speed (Velocity) and
when and for how long the note is to sound (Note On/Off).
 PROGRAM CHANGES
UPPER Keyboard Channel
......................Changes the Combinations of the SKX PRO.
External Zone Channels
......................Sends Program Change data to external MIDI equipment.
 CONTROL CHANGES
Control Changes are transmitted and received in response to manipulations of
controls on the Control Panel, connected peripheral devices such as Foot Switches or
an Expression Pedal, or other MIDI controller information.
SYSTEM MESSAGES
 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES
These are messages which are unique to a particular manufacturer or between
instruments of the same model from the same manufacturer.
The SKX PRO can transmit the settings in the instrument’s memory in the form of a
series of System Exclusive (SysEx) messages. This is referred to as a Memory Dump.
Doing this allows you to make a backup copy of your settings. If you want to restore
previous settings saved to an external MIDI device, the SKX PRO can also receive a
Memory Dump.
MIDI
152
MIDI STRUCTURE OF THE SKX PRO
The SKX PRO can transmit and receive MIDI data on Keyboard Channels as well
as transmit MIDI data on External Zones. The following illustrations and paragraphs
explain this in more detail.
Map of the
MIDI structure
of the
Organ
Piano
Ens
Synth
Sections
Octave Shift (Part)
to USB to MIDI
HOST
OUT
Octave Shift (Int. Zone)
Local Control
MIDI Channel
LC
Upper Kbd. Contacts
1st
2nd
Upper Keyboard
Local Control
Allocate
ExZone 1
ExZone 2
LC
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
Pedal to Lower
ExZone 3
Pedal Kbd. Contacts
1st
2nd
LC
Lower Keyboard
Pedal Keyboard
Pedalboard
(optional)
*#1
Lower Kbd. Contacts
1st
2nd
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Octave Shift
(Ex. Zone)
153
KEYBOARD (INTERNAL) CHANNELS
The internal sounds of the instrument will play on what are called the Keyboard or
Internal Channels.
The Keyboard Channels transmit Note On/Note Off and Velocity data from the
Upper, Lower and Pedal Keyboards. These channels will both send (MIDI OUT)
and receive (MIDI IN) data, and are therefore used when recording and playing back
sequences.
NOTE: The Upper Keyboard Channel, in addition to Note On/Note Off and Velocity data, also
is used for transmitting Controller data.
EXTERNAL ZONES
The External Zone allow you to use the SKX PRO as a MIDI Master Keyboard. These
allow you to play additional sounds from another MIDI instrument such as a Sound
Module. The External Zones transmit but do not receive MIDI data - in other words,
they are MIDI OUT only.
There are three (3) External Zone Channels which can be assigned to the Upper
Manual, Lower Manual or Pedals. In addition, different configurations can be
Recorded to different Patches - for example, one Patch can have all three External
Zones assigned to the Upper Manual, another Patch can have one External Zone each
for Upper, Lower and Pedals, etc.
EXPANDED KEYBOARDS
When MIDI keyboards are used to expand the PEDAL Parts, they will not only play
the internal voices of the SKX PRO, but also transmit MIDI data to other MIDI
devices via the MIDI OUT port. Thus, both the Keyboard Channels and the External
Zones will respond from connected MIDI keyboards, as if the Expanded Keyboards
were “built-in” as an integral part of the SKX PRO.
MIDI
154
USING AN EXTERNAL SEQUENCER
This section explains how to record and play back a performance on the SKX PRO using either an
external MIDI sequencer or a computer running a Digital Audio Workstation, or DAW.
RECORDING AND PLAYING BACK A PERFORMANCE
In order to Record and Play a MIDI performance,
connect the MIDI cables as shown in the
illustration on the right.
Load the correc t MIDI
Template.
Rec: for your system.
Play: “Basic”
RECORD
for PLAY
for REC
1. Connect MIDI cables as shown on the right.
2. Go to the MIDI FUNCTION Mode and
select the MIDI Template appropriate
for your system. You can select “Basic” or
“Pedal KBD.”
Optional
for REC
NOTE: This connection cannot record MIDI data
sent via External Zones.
3. Configure the MIDI Channels on your
sequencer or DAW. If you are recording
the UPPER Keyboard only, set the MIDI
Channel on your sequencer to record
Channel “1.” To record all keyboards, set
your sequencer to record Channels “1,”
“2” and “3.”(UPPER=1, LOWER=2 and
PEDAL=3).
4. Start recording on your sequencer or DAW.
5. If you need to send System Exclusive data,
etc., transmit a MIDI Memory Dump.
6. Start your performance.
USB
OUT
IN
- MIDI -
OUT MERGE
IN
- MIDI -
MIDI Pedalboard
MIDI Interface
PLAYBACK
1. Make the connections as shown in the figure above for
Playback.
2. Select and Load the “Basic” MIDI Template.(see page
158).
3. Start playback of the sequence.
RECORDING A PERFORMANCE VIA USB CABLE
The USB MIDI connection will allow you to
Record and Play sequences with only one cable
connection and no MIDI interface between the
computer and the SKX PRO as shown on the
right.
Load the MIDI Template for
your system.
Optional
OUT MERGE
IN
- MIDI -
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
MIDI Pedalboard
155
USING A MIDI SOUND MODULE
To control a MIDI Sound Module from the SKX PRO using both a single keyboard and Expanded Keyboards,
do the following:
BASIC CONNECTIONS
1.
CONNECT THE MIDI MODULE
Connect the MIDI OUT of the SKX PRO to the MIDI IN of
the MIDI Sound Module.
2.
Load the “EXZ...” MIDI Template.
LOAD THE “EXZ...”MIDI TEMPLATE (P. 158)
This MIDI Template mutes the Keyboard Channels. If you
want also to transmit MIDI data on the Keyboard Channels,
you must turn them “ON” manually. See page 159 “MIDI
Channels” for instructions on how to do this.
3.
THRU OUT
- MIDI -
SET THE ZONES AND RECORD THE SETTINGS
TO THE COMBINATION.
Synth.
Please refer to page 78 “COMBINATION-EXTERNAL
ZONES” for instructions on how to set Zones.
SIMPLIFIED SETUP MODE
The setup mode described below allows you to transmit MIDI
data without using the External Zones.
1.
CONNECT A MIDI MODULE
Connect the MIDI OUT of the SKX PRO to the MIDI IN of
the MIDI Sound Module.
2.
IN
Optional
OUT MERGE
IN
- MIDI -
MIDI Pedalboard
SOUNDING POINT OF THE EXTERNAL ZONES
When keys are depressed, the sounding point of the
External Zones is deeper than that of the ORGAN Section.
LOAD THE MIDI TEMPLATE FOR YOUR SYSTEM
(P. 158).
Select the MIDI Template to Load (“Basic” or “Pedal KBD”)
depending upon whether you are using Expanded Keyboards.
3.
TURN OFF UNUSED MIDI MESSAGES (P. 158).
Turn MIDI messages for controlling Program Change,
Drawbar Registration and Individual messages “OFF.” These
messages are not used in this setup.
4.
MATCH THE MIDI CHANNELS (P. 159).
Match the MIDI Channels between the Keyboard Channels of
the SKX PRO and the MIDI Sound Module.
NOTE: Sounding Range and Program Change cannot be changed by
a Combination in this simplified set up.
MIDI
156
RECORDING TO A SEQUENCER OR DAW
USING THE MIDI PORTS
Load the “EXZ...” MIDI Template.
This MIDI Template mutes the Keyboard
Channels. If you want also to transmit
MIDI data on the Keyboard Channels, you
must turn them “ON” manually. See page
159 “MIDI Channels” for instructions on
how to do this.
Record both Keyboard Channels and
External Zone Channels to the sequencer
or DAW.
Lo a d t h e “ E X Z . . .” M I D I
Template.
Mute the Keyboard
Channels so that
only the External
Zones sound.
Optional
THRU OUT
- MIDI -
IN
OUT MERGE
IN
- MIDI -
MIDI Pedalboard
Synth.
USB
IN
OUT
- MIDI -
MIDI Interface
Set the Local Control of the SKX PRO at “ON,” and Echo of the DAW at “OFF.”
PLAY BACK THE PERFORMANCE
You can play back both Keyboard Channels
and External Zone Channels from your
sequencer or DAW.
Load the “Basic ” MIDI
Template.
Mute the Keyboard
Channels, sound
the parts only by
the External Zones.
Optional
THRU OUT
- MIDI -
IN
Synth.
USB
IN
OUT
- MIDI -
MIDI Interface
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
OUT MERGE
IN
- MIDI -
MIDI Pedalboard
157
USING USB MIDI
If you want to play the software
synthesizer in a PC using both Keyboard
SKX PRO sounds here.
Channels and External Zones, do the
following:
1. Load the “EXZ...” MIDI Template.
2. The “EXZ...” MIDI template mutes Transmits MIDI data
the Keyboard Channels. Therefore, o n b o t h K e y b o a rd
make sure both Transmit and Channels and External
Receive are enabled for the Keyboard Zone Channels.
Channels.
Set the LOCAL CONTROL
at “ON.”
Lo a d t h e “ E X Z . . .” M I D I
Template.
NOTE: See “MIDI Channels”(P. 159) for instructions on how to enable Transmit
and Receive for the Keyboard Channels.
DAW echoes MIDI to
3. Set the Local Control at “ON.”
the software synth.
4. Set the MIDI Echo of the sequencer
or DAW at “ON” to sound the
software synthesizer.
5. Record both Keyboard Channels
and External Zone Channels to the
sequencer or DAW.
Optional
OUT MERGE
IN
- MIDI -
MIDI Pedalboard
MIDI
158
MIDI FUNCTION MODE
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to adjust the basic MIDI Parameters as well as Send and Receive a MIDI Memory Dump.
TO LOCATE THIS MODE:
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - MIDI - [ENTER]
❷ LOCAL CONTROL
Setting Range: Off, On
MIDI TEMPLATE
This allows you to turn Local Control “ON” or “OFF.”
On...................... The keyboard plays the internal sounds of the instrument.
Off ..................... The internal sounds of the SKX PRO will not play from the
keyboard. Use this setting for recording performance to
an external sequencer with a MIDI Echo feature.
❶
❸ INDIVIDUAL PARAMETERS
Setting Range: Off, NRPN, Sys Ex
❷
❶ MIDI TEMPLATE
This allows you to Load various pre-programmed MIDI settings.
To Load a MIDI Template, select TEMPLATE, move the cursor
to the ❷[LOAD] icon and press the [ENTER] button.
NOTE: For a detailed listing of MIDI Templates, see “MIDI TEMPLATES”
starting on page 180.
NOTE: If a MIDI Template is selected and any of the following
Parameters are changed, the ❶ will display, “User Edited.”
GENERAL
This allows you to control how Individual Parameters are sent.
The Individual Parameters are used for controlling Section
Volume, Leslie Fast, etc.
Off ..................... Does not transmit.
NRPN................ It transmits via NRPN.
Sys Ex ............... It transmits via System Exclusive Message.
NOTE: The SKX PRO receives Individual Parameters as System
Exclusive messages regardless of the setting of this
Parameter..
❹ PROGRAM CHANGE
Setting Range: Off, On
This allows you to select whether to transmit and receive
Program Change messages for Combination and External
Zones.
❺ DRAWBAR REGISTRATION
Setting Range: Off, On
❶
❷
❸
❹
❺
❻
❶ MIDI IN
This allows you to select the function of the [MIDI IN] Port.
Sequence
Receives MIDI messages on UPPER, LOWER and PEDAL Parts
on their MIDI Channels. MIDI messages will not be re-sent.
Upper / Lower / Pedal
Use this Template to connect a MIDI keyboard as an (UPPER /
LOWER / PEDAL) keyboard.
Received MIDI messages will sound the Sections allocated
to the (UPPER / LOWER / PEDAL) keyboard ignoring the MIDI
Channel, and will re-send to MIDI OUT and USB-MIDI.
Upper + Pedal / Lower + Pedal
Use this Template to connect two MIDI keyboards as (UPPER
+ PEDAL / LOWER + PEDAL) keyboards.
Received MIDI messages will sound the Sections allocated to
(UPPER, PEDAL / LOWER, PEDAL) keyboards on the assigned
MIDI Channels, and re-send to MIDI OUT and USB MIDI.
Organ Upper / Piano / Ensemble / Synth
A connected MIDI keyboard will play the ORGAN/PIANO/
ENSEMBLE/MONO SYNTH) Sections. MIDI messages will not
be re-sent.
NOTE: The ORGAN Section will play from an UPPER Keyboard only.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
This allows you to select whether to transmit and receive
Drawbar Registration.
❻ EXTERNAL ZONES
Setting Range: Off, On
This is a Master On/Off Parameter which allows you to enable
or disable MIDI transmission of all External Zones in one
operation.
159
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES
MIDI CHANNELS
❶
❷
❸
❶
❷
❹
❺
❻
❸
❹
❶ DEVICE ID
Setting Range: 0 ~ 127
This allows you to set the Device ID which is used for System
Exclusive Messages such as Memory Dump.
❷ RECEIVE DUMP
Setting Range: Disable, Enable
This allows you to Enable or Disable receiving of a Memory
Dump.
The SKX PRO can transmit several settings as a Memory
Dump in a single group. Select “Disable” if you want to
prevent internal settings from being changed - for example,
if you are playing back songs from an external sequencer or
DAW.
❸ SEND DUMP TYPE
Setting Range: Temporary, System
This allows you to select MIDI Channels for transmitting and
receiving performance information for each Keyboard.
❶ TRANSMIT UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL
Setting Range: 1 ~ 16, Off
This allows you to select the transmitting (Sending) channels
for the UPPER, LOWER and PEDAL.
NOTE: The UPPER Channel sends Controller information such as
Pitch Bend, Expression Pedal or NRPN in addition to Note On/
Note Off data.
NOTE: To avoid conflicting MIDI messages, set each TRANSMIT
Channel and External Zone Channel at different values.
❷ RECEIVE UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL
Setting Range: 1 ~ 16, Off
This allows you to select the Receive channels for the UPPER,
LOWER and PEDAL.
This allows you to adjust which contents will be transmitted by
a Memory Dump.
Temporary
Transmits the current status of the Combination, ORGAN
Section, and MONO SYNTH Section.
IMPORTANT: If you are recording Sequences, transmit this
data before touching any notes or controls so that the
registrations for each Section will “match up.”
System
Transmits the status of the System Parameters such as
controller modes, MIDI Channels.
To send a Memory Dump, do the following:
1. Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to
the ❹[SEND DUMP] icon.
2. Press the [ENTER] button.
NOTE: If you want to Save the entire contents of the SKX PRO, save
them as a Setup file instead of using a Memory Dump.
NOTE: The Parameters in this Mode are System Parameters. You
must Record these Parameters if you want their settings to
be remembered the next time the instrument is turned “ON.”
See page 143 for instructions on how to do this.
MIDI
160
***THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TO PRESERVE PAGE FORMATTING ***
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
161
USING
MEMORY
162
USING MEMORY
You can Save various contents such as Patches, Custom Settings, etc., as files either to
a USB Flash Drive or the Internal Memory of the SKX PRO.
W H AT YO U C A N D O W I T H
MEMORY
 Save and Load Setups (see page 165).
 Save or Load a Patch or Custom Setting.
 Update the system software.
ABOUT USB FLASH DRIVES
setup
Setup files are saved to this Folder
system
Copy software update files to this Folder.
NOTE: There is an “affinity” between USB Flash Drives and the
SKX PRO, and not all Flash Drives are compatible. To confirm
whether the SKX PRO will read a particular Flash Drive, see
MENU - SYSTEM - INFORMATION - IS ACTIVE - USB FLASH
DRIVE(P. 146).
COMPATIBLE USB FLASH DRIVES
There are various types of USB Flash Drives. Some require AC
power at one of the pins on the USB interface. Because the
SKX PRO does not provide AC power at the USB Ports, these
Drives are not compatible with the SKX PRO. Generally, a
Flash Drive formatted with MS-DOS FAT32 will work.
Consult our web site for more information about compatible
USB Flash Drives.
In Europe: http://www.hammond.eu
In the US: .http://www.hammondorganco.com
USB CONNECTOR
1. Be sure to insert the USB Flash Drive correctly.
2. Do not remove the Flash Drive or turn the power “OFF”
while accessing data to or from a USB Flash Drive.
FOLDER STRUCTURE
When the USB Flash Drive is inserted, the following folders are
automatically created on the drive. They are identical for the
Internal Memory and a USB Flash Drive.
\hammond
\sk_pro
\custom
\pipe
\twheel
\patch
\organ
\synth
\voice
\setup
*.set
\system
*.bin
FILE NUMBER LIMIT
A Folder can contain up to 256 files.
FILE NAME EXTENSION
set
opt
vpt
spt
ctw
cpi
Setup File
Organ Patch
Piano/Ensemble Patch
Mono Synth Patch
Custom Tone Wheels
Custom Pipes
FILE COMPATIBILITY
The files which you made are compatible between
SK PRO, SK PRO-73 and SKX PRO.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
163
FORMAT
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to format a USB Flash Drive for use with the SKX PRO.
NOTE: Formatting a USB Flash Drive erases all data on the drive. Therefore, be sure to use either a new
Drive or one which does not already have data you want to keep.
① INSERT A USB FLASH DRIVE
Turn the power to the SKX PRO “ON” and insert a USB Flash Drive to the
[TO FLASH DRIVE] Port. The message, “Confirming USB...” will display for
approximately 1 second. Please wait for this message to disappear.
② LOCATE THE FORMAT PAGE
[MENU/EXIT] - FILE - FORMAT - [ENTER].
③ SELECT THE MEDIA
Use the [VALUE] knob to select “USB Flash Drive.”
④ FORMAT THE USB FLASH DRIVE
Use the DIRECTION []button to move the cursor to the [FORMAT] icon
and press the [ENTER] button. The message, “Formatting” will display and the
formatting process begins. The time necessary to Format a USB Flash Drive may
differ depending on the capacity of the Drive, but typically it will be approximately
1 or 2 seconds.
When the Format has finished, “Completed” will show in the display.
FORMATTING MEDIA
Under Step 3, you can select either “USB Flash
Drive” or “Internal Memory” (explained later) as the
media you wish to use.
The Format procedures between “USB Flash Drive”
and “Internal Memory.” are different. For “USB Flash
Drive,” all data is deleted from the Drive and a File
Structure is created. For “Internal Memory,” all files
are deleted but no File Structure is generated.
NOTE: Do not turn the power “OFF” or remove the USB Flash Drive during the Formatting
procedure.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Format, press the [MENU/EXIT] or [PLAY] button instead of the
[ENTER] button.
Using Memory
164
USB MASS STORAGE
WHAT IS “USB MASS STORAGE?” SETTING USB MODE TO “MASS
On the SKX PRO, Setups can be saved to the Internal
STORAGE”
Memory of the instrument as well as to a USB Flash Drive.
Both the Internal Memory and a USB Flash Drive can Load
and Save files; however, the Internal Memory can also access
files from/to the host computer via USB cable. This is called
“USB Mass Storage.”
Normally, the USB TO HOST Port sends and receives MIDI
messages to or from a connected host computer. USB Mass
Storage allows you to access files in the Internal Memory from
a host computer (upper part of left figure).
NOTE: The USB TO HOST Port cannot communicate via MIDI while
USB Mass Storage is in use.
1 LOCATE THE USB PAGE
Computer
To Host
Me
USB
Mass
Storage
MIDI
ON
Sound
Engine
OFF
F
❶
Internal Memory
System Files
Setup Files
Patch Files
Custom Files
Load/Save
Temporary
Area
User
Area A Setup
System Area
Waveform
one of
Patches
Recall/Record
Firmware
[MENU/EXIT] - SYSTEM - GLOBAL - [ENTER] - USB
2 SELECT THE FUNCTION
❶ MASS STORAGE
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the function of the USB TO
HOST Port.
Load/Save
Off ...............Sends/Receives MIDI.
On................Connects the Internal Memory.
USB Flash Drive
System Files
*#1
Setup Files
Patch Files
Custom Files
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
165
USING SETUP FILES
As explained elsewhere in this Manual, the SKX PRO can be customized in a number of different ways - you
can create Custom Settings, create your own Combinations and Patches, etc. After you have made your
changes, you can save your edits as a Setup. In this way you can customize the instrument in several different
ways and save each series of edits as a separate Setup.
The illustration below shows the data which can be contained in a Setup file.
A SETUP FILE
Combi B100
U3
U2
U1
U3
U2
U1
Combi B001
Combi U100
Combi U001
Combination Name (ex: “Vivre pour vivre”)
Allocation
U001
F001
F001
U001
Sections and Patches
Custom Tone Wheels
Custom Cabinets
U3
U2
U1
U3
U2
U1
Reverb
Pedal
Sub Drawbars
F
Custom Pipes
Internal / External Zones
Organ B100
Piano&Ens U400
Organ B001
Organ U100
Piano&Ens U001
Organ U001
Piano&Ens Patch Name (ex: “Grand Piano”)
Organ Patch Name (ex: “Stopped Fl”)
Percussion
Drawbars Registration
Components
Effects & EQ
Animation
Effects & EQ
System
Mono Synth B100
Favorites
Mono Synth B001
Mono Synth U100
Foot Switch
Expression
Mono Synth U001
Mono Synth Patch Name (ex: “Saw Lead”)
Synth Parameters
Master EQ
MIDI
Ext. Leslie
Auto Off
Effects & EQ
Using Memory
166
SAVE
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to save contents in the SKX PRO to a USB Flash Drive or Internal Memory.
① INSERT A USB FLASH DRIVE
Insert a formatted USB Flash Drive into the [TO FLASH
DRIVE] Port.
NOTE: If you are saving an item to the Internal Memory you may
skip this step. “USB Flash Drive” will display to the right of
“MEDIA” only if a USB Flash Drive has been inserted into the
[TO FLASH DRIVE] Port.
② LOCATE THE “SAVE” PAGE
❶
④ NAME THE FILE
Enter the Name.
[Aa1]................. Changes the character type.
[1] - [10] .......... Selects the highlighted character.
[Insert] ............ Inserts a space at the cursor.
[Delete] ........... Deletes a letter at the cursor.
[VALUE]........... Changes the letter at the cursor.
After you have finished Naming your file, press the [ENTER]
button. The message below will display for approximately 1
second:
NOTE: Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is
displaying.
❷
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Save, press the [MENU/EXIT] button
instead of the [ENTER] button.
❸
❹
⑤ RETURN TO THE PLAY MODE
❺
PLAY
[MENU/EXIT] - FILE - SAVE - [ENTER].
③ SELECT THE ITEM TO SAVE
❶ MEDIA
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the media to which to Save.
Internal Memory ........... Internal Memory.
USB Flash Drive .............. USB Flash Drive.
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the PLAY mode.
❷ CONTENT
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
[CONTENT] and use the [VALUE] knob to select the type of
content to Save.
Setup ................................... Setup file.
Organ Patch ..................... Patch in the ORGAN Section.
Piano/Ens Patch ............. Patch in the PIANO/ENSEMBLE Section.
Synth Patch ...................... Patch in the MONO SYNTH Section.
Tone Wheel ....................... Custom Tone Wheel.
Pipe ...................................... Custom Pipe.
❸ FILE
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to [FILE]
and use the [VALUE] knob to select the file to Save.
❹ TO
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to [TO]
and use the [VALUE] knob to select the location to which
to Save the selected file. Choose its number if you wish to
overwritten the file, and choose “New File” for save as a new file.
❹ SAVE
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
[LOAD and press the [ENTER] button.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
SETUP NAMES
A Setup Name will appear on both Internal
Memory and a USB Flash Drive. This is useful for
ease of identification from an external computer.
However, the SKX PRO display will not show Setup
Names. If a Setup is loaded, the Combinations and
Patches contained in the Setup will show in the
SKX PRO display.
167
LOAD
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to Load files saved to a USB Flash Drive or Internal Memory into the instrument.
① INSERT A USB FLASH DRIVE
❺ LOAD
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
[LOAD and press the [ENTER] button. The message below will
display for approximately 1 second:
NOTE: Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is
displaying.
Insert a formatted USB Flash Drive into the [TO FLASH
DRIVE] Port.
NOTE: If you are deleting an item from Internal Memory you may
skip this step. “USB Flash Drive” will display to the right of
“MEDIA” only if a USB Flash Drive has been inserted into the
[TO FLASH DRIVE] Port.
② LOCATE THE “LOAD” PAGE
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Load, press the [MENU/EXIT] or [PLAY]
button instead of the [ENTER] button.
④ RETURN TO THE PLAY MODE
PLAY
❶
❷
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the PLAY mode.
❸
❹
❺
[MENU/EXIT] - FILE - LOAD - [ENTER]
③ SELECT THE ITEM TO LOAD
❶ MEDIA
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the media from which to Load.
Internal Memory ........... Internal Memory.
USB Flash Drive .............. USB Flash Drive.
❷ CONTENT
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
[CONTENT] and use the [VALUE] knob to select the type of
content to Load.
Setup ................................... Setup file.
Organ Patch ..................... Patch in the ORGAN Section.
Piano/Ens Patch ............. Patch in the PIANO/ENSEMBLE Section.
Synth Patch ...................... Patch in the MONO SYNTH Section.
Tone Wheel ....................... Custom Tone Wheel.
Pipe ...................................... Custom Pipe.
❸ FILE
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to [FILE]
and use the [VALUE] knob to select the file to Load.
❹ TO
Use the DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to [TO]
and use the [VALUE] knob to select where to Load the file.
Using Memory
168
DELETE
This FUNCTION Mode allows you to delete content previously
saved either to a USB Flash memory or to the Internal Memory.
① INSERT A USB FLASH DRIVE
Insert a formatted USB Flash Drive into the [TO FLASH
DRIVE] Port.
NOTE: If you are deleting an item from Internal Memory you may
skip this step. “USB Flash Drive” will display to the right of
“MEDIA” only if a USB Flash Drive has been inserted into the
[TO FLASH DRIVE] Port.
❹ DELETE
Use the [DIRECTION [] button to move the cursor to the
DELETE icon and press the [ENTER] button. The message
below will display for approximately 1 second:
NOTE: Do not turn the power “OFF” while the above message is
displaying.
NOTE: If you DO NOT wish to Delete, press the [MENU/EXIT] or
[PLAY] button instead of the [ENTER] button.
④ RETURN TO PLAY MODE
PLAY
② LOCATE THE “DELETE” PAGE
❶
Press the [PLAY] button to return to the PLAY mode.
❷
❸
❹
[MENU/EXIT] - FILE - DELETE - [ENTER]
③ SELECT THE ITEM TO DELETE
❶ MEDIA
Use the [VALUE] knob to select the media from which to
Delete.
Internal Memory ........... Internal Memory.
USB Flash Drive .............. USB Flash Drive.
❷ CONTENT
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
[CONTENTS] and use the [VALUE] knob to select the type
of content to Delete.
Setup ................................... Setup file.
Organ Patch ..................... Patch in the ORGAN Section.
Piano/Ens Patch ............. Patch in the PIANO/ENSEMBLE Section.
Synth Patch ...................... Patch in the MONO SYNTH Section.
Tone Wheel ....................... Custom Tone Wheel.
Pipe ...................................... Custom Pipe.
❸ FILE
Use the DIRECTION [ ] button to move the cursor to
[FILE] and use the [VALUE] knob to select the file to Delete.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
169
TROUBLESHOOTING
170
TROUBLESHOOTING
The SKX PRO appears complicated; however, most troubles generally can be isolated by observing the
operation of the various controls. This is illustrated by the following list of possible troubles, arranged
according to their symptoms.
NOTE: It is assumed that the entire instrument plays correctly with the exception of the symptoms
mentioned.
TROUBLES
ERROR MESSAGES
 Entire instrument fails to play.
 The [MASTER VOLUME] or [VOLUME] controls for each
Voice Section are set at minimum. Adjust the [VOLUME]
knob(s).
 The ALLOCATE buttons are “OFF” (LEDs not lit). Touch
one of the ALLOCATE buttons “ON.”
 MIDI Local Control is set to "OFF.” Turn the Local Control
“ON.” See page 158 for instructions.
 A Leslie Speaker Cabinet is connected. The sound of the
Rotary Channel (Tone Wheel and Transistor Organs) does
not appear at the [LINE OUT] or [PHONES] jacks when a
Leslie Speaker is connected via the Leslie 11-pin socket. See
page 131 for more information.
If the above message displays, please consult your authorized
Hammond Dealer.
 One or more Voice Sections fail to play.
 One or more of the [INDIVIDUAL OUT] jacks are in use.
Set the AUDIO MODE at the desired usage. See page 131
for more information.
 Malfunction of buttons, keys, etc.
 Turn the power to the instrument “OFF,” then turn it “ON”
again. If this procedure is not successful,
1. Turn the power to the instrument “OFF.”
2. Press and Hold the [RECORD] button.
3. While holding the [RECORD] button, turn the power to
the instrument “ON.” All Parameters will return to their
factory settings.
 Expression Pedal does not work.
 The EXPRESSION - SOURCE Parameter is not set correctly.
Set the Parameter for the function you wish. See page 133
for instructions.
 The Expression Control in the Overdrive is set at “OD Only”
or “Input." Set the Parameter at “Exp.OD.” See page 111
for instructions.
 The Source of the Multi Effects is set at “Exp.” Set the
Parameter at one of the other settings. See page 108 for
instructions.
 The Expression for a Voice Section in a Combination is
set at “OFF” Set the value at “ON.” See page 76 for
instructions.
 Foot Switch does not work.
 The Parameters for the Foot Switch are not set correctly.
Check the Parameter settings for the Foot Switches. See page
132 for instructions.
 Foot Switch effect works when the Foot Switch is
released instead of depressed.
 The Foot Switch Polarity was not detected. Connect the Foot
Switch with the power to the SKX PRO “OFF” and turn the
power “ON” without depressing the Foot Switch (P. 132).
 [MENU/EXIT] and/or [RECORD] buttons do not work.
 The display is Locked. Unlock the display (P. 72).
 File access stops between PC and USB Mass Storage.
 Please wait for 2 minutes. File access may restart.
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
If the above message displays, one or more files necessary for
operation of the instrument is missing. You can identify the
missing file(s) with MENU - SYSTEM - INFORMATION.
The missing file(s) will display “---” instead of a version
number.
Prepare a USB Flash Drive with the missing update files and
complete the system update. Press the [ENTER] button with
the [UPDATE] icon highlighted to start the Update procedure.
NOTE: You can ensure the installation of system files by Press and
Hold the red [RECORD] button and pressing the [ENTER]
button.
171
APPENDIX
Appendix
172
FACTORY COMBINATIONS
Category
Famous Tunes
Transistor/Pipe Organ
Famous Tunes
Piano / Chro Perc / Keys
Famous Tunes
Strings / Choir
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Category
Synth / Bass
Tone Wheel Organ
F001
F002
F003
F004
F005
F006
F007
F008
F009
F010
F011
F012
F013
F014
F015
F016
F017
F018
F019
F020
F021
F022
F023
F024
F025
F026
F027
F028
F029
F030
F031
F032
F033
F034
F035
F036
F037
F038
F039
F040
F041
F042
F043
F044
F045
F046
F047
F048
F049
F050
Name
Vintage B-3 DLS
Classic Gospel
ClasOrg Tutti
Console Riser
A. Piano D
Piano & Strings
A.Bass / A.Piano
Soul Line
Symphonic Ens
Macrocosmos
Vintage C-3 JOS
VintageB-3Squabl
Vintage B-3 McGr
VintageB-3Groove
X-66 Ballad
Edelweiss
Spanish
Old Days
Euro Bigband
Swedish Love
ClasOrg PrnChors
ClasOrg StgCelest
TheaOrg Ballad
TheaOrg StylDTrpt
TheaOrg Tibias
Purple
Emerson
Some Lovin’
Booker
Rock 1
Grand Piano Y-CF
Pop Piano CF
Upright Piano
Honky-Tonk Piano
Electric Grand
HP Old Time Prchd
EP Tine Mk1
Harpsichord Back
Clav.AC
Accordion LMMH
Legato Strings
Section Strings
Synth Str.Bright
Synth Str.Mellow
Chamber Ensemble
Choir Aah
Violin
Sol. Strings
Taped Strings
Vocal & Str. Prchd
Wind
Main Features
*#1
#
#
F051
F052
F053
F054
F055
F056
F057
F058
F059
F060
F061
F062
F063
F064
F065
F066
F067
F068
F069
F070
F071
F072
F073
F074
F075
F076
F077
F078
F079
F080
F081
F082
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F090
F091
F092
F093
F094
F095
F096
F097
F098
F099
F100
Name
Horn Rock Band
Trumpet Vib
Alto Sax Vib
Jazz Brass Prchd
Harm Chro Vib
Flute Vib
Pan Pipes
M12 Brazz
M12 Horn Ens
M12 Box Brass
Fantasia Pad
Warm Pad
Phasing Pad
Oct Saw Ld
Sync Up&Down Ld
Trancy Ld
Acoustic Bass
Finger Bass Jz
Big Funk
Timpani Roll/Hit
Lady Green Eyes
Do You Know
Vibrating Good
Satin White
Craft Work
Jan’s Hammer
Wonder 4 Th City
Woven Dream
Your Rhythm Mix
Jumped!
Vienna
Vienna Bridge
99 Nena
Pop Muzik
Electric Friends
Don’t You Go
Follow Your & Me
Manfred’s Light
Green Monday
Ph. D I won’t
I’m Ready
Won’t Get Fooled
Blinding Lights
Lovefool
California Girl
Hot Stuff
Galway Girl
Last Christmas
Treasure
Zankoku Tenshi
173
ORGAN PATCHES
Patch #
Category
F001
F002
F003
F004
F005
F006
F007
F008
F009
F010
F011
F012
F013
F014
F015
F016
F017
F018
F019
F020
F021
F022
F023
F024
F025
F026
F027
F028
F029
F030
F031
F032
F033
F034
F035
F036
F037
F038
F039
F040
F041
F042
F043
F044
F045
F046
F047
F048
F049
F050
Jazz
Jazz
Jazz
Jazz
Jazz
Jazz
Jazz
Jazz
Jazz
Jazz
Gospel
Gospel
Gospel
Gospel
Gospel
Gospel
Gospel
Gospel
Gospel
Gospel
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Classic Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Theatre Pipe
Rock
Rock
Rock
Rock
Rock
Rock
Rock
Rock
Rock
Rock
Name
Vintage B-3 DLS
Vintage C-3 JOS
VintageB-3Squabl
VintageB-3Groove
Vintage B-3 McG
Vintage B-3+Echo
Organ Ballad
Jerry C
Lee Bee
Full Spin
Classic Gospel
Slow Gospel
ContmpraryGospel
Shout Gospel
Quiet Praise
Reflective Praise
Dramatic Praise
Total Praise
Meditasion
Full Gospel
Principal Chorus
Flute Chorus
Gamba Celeste
Baroque
Stopped Flutes
Diapasons 8´&4´
Bourdon 16´&Prin2´
Flutes w/Trem
Oboe Solo
Sforzando
Tibias & Vox
Tibia 8´&4´
StylDTrumptSolo
Oboe 8´&Tibia 4´
Tibias 16´&4´
BrassTrumpetSolo
Strings&Voxes
Tibia 16´8´2´&Vox
FullTibias&Voxes
FullComb+Posthrn
Purple
Emerson
Some Lovin’
Booker
Rock 1
Rock 2
Rock 3
Full 1
Full 2
Full Overdrive
Patch #
F051
F052
F053
F054
F055
F056
F057
F058
F059
F060
F061
F062
F063
F064
F065
F066
F067
F068
F069
F070
F071
F072
F073
F074
F075
F076
F077
F078
F079
F080
F081
F082
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F090
F091
F092
F093
F094
F095
F096
F097
F098
F099
F100
Category
Tibia
Tibia
Tibia
Tibia
Tibia
Tibia
Tibia
Tibia
Tibia
Tibia
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Lo & Hi
Pop
Pop
Pop
Pop
Pop
Pop
Pop
Pop
Pop
Pop
Vx
Vx
Vx
Farf
Farf
Farf
Farf
Farf
Ace
Ace
Ace
Contemp
Contemp
Contemp
Contemp
Contemp
TW Basic
TW Basic
TW Basic
TW Basic
Name
DB Tibia 8’&4’
DB Tibia 8’&2’
DB Tibia & Vox
DB Tibia 8’4’& 2’
DB Tibia 16’&8’
DB Tibia 16 &4’
DB Tibia 16’8’4’
DB Tibia 1684&2’
DB Tibia 168421’
DB Full Tibia
Lo & Hi 1
Lo & Hi 2
Lo & Hi 3
Odd Harmonic
Pop Solo
Perc 16’&4’
Solo 16’&2’
Cute Solo
Eddie’s Wind
Full Hammond
Sylvia
Lady
Yeh Yeh
Season Time
On a Clear Day
Twee motten
Toccata Live
Je t’aime moi
Early Bird
Bluesette
Vx Mellow
Vx Bright
Vx Mixture
Farf Flute
Farf Brass
Farf Reeds
Farf Strings
Farf Full
Ace Flute
Ace Reeds
Ace Strings
Summer Samba
Dancing Days
Pipe Mixture
California Girl
Won’t Get Fooled
Master Comp
Sweet Carpet
DB Reed
DB Diapason
Appendix
174
PIANO/ENSEMBLE PATCHES
Patch #
Category
F001
F002
F003
F004
F005
F006
F007
F008
F009
F010
F011
F012
F013
F014
F015
F016
F017
F018
F019
F020
F021
F022
F023
F024
F025
F026
F027
F028
F029
F030
F031
F032
F033
F034
F035
F036
F037
F038
F039
F040
F041
F042
F043
F044
F045
F046
F047
F048
F049
F050
F051
F052
F053
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
A. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
E. Piano
Harpsichord
Harpsichord
Harpsichord
Harpsichord
Harpsichord
*#1
Name
Grand Piano Y-CF
Grand Piano StwD
GP Y & LegatoStr
GP S & LegatoStr
GP Y & Warm Pad
GP S & Warm Pad
Upright Piano
Honky-Tonk PIano
Pop Piano CF
HP OldTime PrChd
Electric Grand
Electric Grand Comp
ElecGrand & Pad
Toy PIano Kw1
Toy Piano Kwi Pan
Toy Piano Sch
Toy Piano Sch MoDly
Toy Piano S&K
Slow Atk Y-CF
Slow Atk StwD
Stadium Grand
Rehearsal Room
Compressed Grand
EP Tine MkI
EP Tine MkI Pan
EP Tine MkI Phase
EP Tine MkI Chorus
EP Tine MkI OD
EP Tine MkII
EP Tine MkII Pan
EP Tine MkII Phase
EP Tine MkII Chorus
Tine MkII OD
EP Reed 200A
EP Reed 200A Trem
EP Reed 200A Phase
EP Reed 200A OD
EP FM
EP FM Pan
EP FM Phase
EP FM Chorus
EP FM + GrandPno
80's Layer Piano
Reed Pno+FM Pno
Space Mk II + FM
Mk I&LegatoStrings
Compressed Mk1
GW Tine Mk2
Harpsi Back
Harpsi Back Cpl
Harpsi Front
Harpsi Buff
Harpsi PCD
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Patch #
Category
F054
F055
F056
F057
F058
F059
F060
F061
F062
F063
F064
F065
F066
F067
F068
F069
F070
F071
F072
F073
F074
F075
F076
F077
F078
F079
F080
F081
F082
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F090
F091
F092
F093
F094
F095
F096
F097
F098
F099
F100
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
Harpsichord
Harpsichord
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
Clav.
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
ChroPerc
Name
Harpsi & Recorder
Harpsi OD
Clav. AC
Clav. AD
Clav. BC
Clav. BD
Clav. AC Wah
Clav. AD Wah
Clav. BC Wah
Clav. BD Wah
Clav. AC PdWah
Clav. AD PdWah
Clav. BC PdWah
Clav. BD PdWah
Clav. RealLove
Pulse Clav.
Clav Hard OD
Clav Bass
Clav&Reed 200
Xylophone
Mixing Bowl
Xylo Duo Prchd
Xylo 4tet Prchd
Marimba Normal
Marimba Trem
Marimba Sustain
MarimbaDuo Prchd
Marimba4tet Prchd
Xylo + Marimba
Glockenspiel
GlockenspielX-66
Vibraphone
Tubular Bells
Tubular Bells FM
Tubular Bells TW
Church Bells
Music Box
Tonechimes
TonechimesDamped
Hand Bells
HandBells Damped
TnchmsHymn Prchd
TchmHrmChm Prchd
HnBl&Tchm4tet Prchd
Wine Glass
WG Lawrence
Digi Bell 1
Digi Bell 2
Rather Be Prchd
Cathedral Chimes
Marimba + Glock
Organ Harp
Vibraharp
175
Patch #
F107
F108
F109
F110
F111
F112
F113
F114
F115
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
F121
F122
F123
F124
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
F130
F131
F132
F133
F134
F135
F136
F137
F138
F139
F140
F141
F142
F143
F144
F145
F146
F147
F148
F149
F150
F151
F152
F153
F154
F155
F156
F157
F158
F159
Category
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Guitar
Ethnic
Ethnic
Ethnic
Ethnic
Ethnic
Ethnic
Ethnic
Ethnic
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Name
Nylon Guitar
Steel Guitar
Nylon&Steel Gtrs
StelGtDuo Prchd
12-String Guitar
Jazz Guitar
Jazz Guitar Oct
PedalSteelGuitar
Orchestral Harp
OH WholeTone C
OH WholeTone F
PizzicatoStrings
PizzStr + Glock
NylonGtr+Tine EP
SteelGtr+Tine EP
Dulcimer
Sitar
Banjo
Koto
Pan Pipes
SteelGtr&Dulcimer
PanPipe&Recorder
Koto & Pan Pipes
Zap
Rain
Telephone
Flanging Noise
Burst Noise
Sine
Prchd
WhiteNoisePedWah
Sine RingMod
Horn Rock Band
Unison Sax
Ceddin Deden
M12 Box Brass
M12 Brazz
M12 Horn Ens
SynBrs Bird Low
SynBrs Bird Oct
SynBrs GX
Flute
Prchd
BigBandSax Prchd
BigBand Prchd
Unison Brs FD
Unison Brs GUp
Quartet 1 Prchd
Quartet 2 Prchd
Jazz Brass Prchd
MutedCombo1Prchd
Muted Combo2Prchd
Trumpet Str
Trumpet Vib
Trumpet Section
Patch #
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164
F165
F166
F167
F168
F169
F170
F171
F172
F173
F174
F175
F176
F177
F178
F179
F180
F181
F182
F183
F184
F185
F186
F187
F188
F189
F190
F191
F192
F193
F194
F195
F196
F197
F198
F199
F200
F201
F202
F203
F204
F205
F206
F207
F208
F209
F210
F211
Category
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Wind
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Strings
Choir
Choir
Choir
Choir
Choir
Choir
Choir
Choir
Choir
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Name
Trumpet Muted
Trombone Str
Trombone Muted
Flute Vib
Taped Flute
Recorder
Synth Whistle
Alto Sax Str
Alto Sax Vib
Tenor Sax Str
Tenor Sax Vib
Bari Sax Str
Tp & Tb Str
Tp & Tb Vib
Tp & Tb Mute
Ed’s OB Brazz
Ray’s Flute
SaxQuartet Prchd
Legato Strings
Legato Strgs Oct
LgatoSt Op Prchd
Section Strings
Section Str Oct
SectStr Op Prchd
Synth Str.Bright
Synth Str.Mellow
Sol. Strings
Sol. Strings Oct
Taped Strings
Glass Harp
Violin
TapedChoir&Strings
Synth Stringz
TapedStrg&SynStr
TapedStrg&SecStr
SectStrings&Violin
Choir Aah
Choir Doo
Vocal
Vocal&Strg Prchd
Vcal&Choir Prchd
Taped Choir
TapedChoir Prchd
TapedChoir&Flute
Space Choir
Fantasia Pad
Harp Pad
Warm Pad
Choir Pad
Soundtrack
Wind Bell
PWM Pad
Appendix
176 PIANO/ENSEMBLE PATCHES - continued
Patch #
Category
Name
Patch #
Category
F212
F213
F214
F215
F216
F217
F218
F219
F220
F221
F222
F223
F224
F225
F226
F227
F228
F229
F230
F231
F232
F233
F234
F235
F236
F237
F238
F239
F240
F241
F242
F243
F244
F245
F246
F247
F248
F249
F250
F251
F252
F253
F254
F255
F256
F257
F258
F259
F260
F261
F262
F263
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Synth Pad
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Bass
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Sweep Pad
Sample&Hold Pad
Phasing Pad
Chime Pad
Rattle Pad
2.2 Pad
Shimmer Pad
It’s A Miracle
Zan-Te Pong
Fantasia&Strings
SynthPad&M12Brss
SynthPad&TapedSt
Acoustic Bass
AcouBass&RideCym
AcouBass & Brush
AcouBass & Drums
Finger Bass Jz
Finger Bass Pr
Pick Bass Jz
Pick Bass Jz OD
Pick Bass Pr
Pick Bass Pr OD
Slap Bass
Slap Bass Delay
FM Bass
Timpani Normal
Timpani Roll
Legato Strg Bass
Symphonic Bass
ElecPiano Bass
FingBas+HarmStacc
AcouBass & Trbn
Pick Bass Sp1
Pick Bass&Pulse66
ElecPiano Bass Vel
AcousticBass+FM
Square Ld Bright
Square Ld Mellow
Saw Ld
Fifth Ld
Sync Ld U&D
Sync Ld D
Noise Ld
OPZ LFO Ld
Lucy Arp
Gimme^3 Ld
Tel Line Ld
Hot Stuff Ld
Take On Ld
B.Light Ld
Unison Ld
UnisonNoise Ld
F264
F265
F266
F267
F268
F269
F270
F271
F272
F273
F274
F275
F276
F277
F278
F279
F280
F281
F282
F283
F284
F285
F286
F287
F288
F289
F290
F291
F292
F293
F294
F295
F296
F297
F298
F299
F300
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Synth Lead
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Free Reed
Percussion
Percussion
Percussion
Percussion
Percussion
Percussion
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Name
Chocolate Seq
Puttin’RitzPrchd
Synth Ralf
Pulse75&Alto Sax
Saw & M12 Brass
Pulse80+Violin
SquareDuet Prchd
Accordion M
Accordion LM
Accordion LMH
Accordion LMMH
Accordion MMM
Reed Organ
Reed Organ Oct
Harm Single
Harm Chro Norm
Harm Chro Vib
Harm Chro OD
Harm FM
Melodion S-32
Melodion PRO-44
Melodion M-37
Melodion M-37Twin
MelodionM37ODWah
Melodion B-24
Melodion 2 Prchd
Melodion 3 Prchd
Melodion 4 Prchd
MelodnP44+HarChr
MelodnB24+Marimba
HarChrVb+AltoSax
Ride Cymbal
Brush Snare Drum
Wind Chime
Tone Tang
OH WlTnC&WindChm
OH WlTnF&WindChm
WHAT IS “ProChord?”
ProChord™is a unique feature of certain Hammond
instruments, including the SKX PRO, which allows
you to play professional right-hand harmony while
playing a single-note melody. The harmonization
applied to the melody is determined by which
chord is played by the left hand.
MONO SYNTH PATCHES
Patch #
F001
F002
F003
F004
F005
F006
F007
F008
F009
F010
F011
F012
F013
F014
F015
F016
F017
F018
F019
F020
F021
F022
F023
F024
F025
F026
F027
F028
F029
F030
F031
F032
F033
F034
F035
F036
F037
F038
F039
F040
F041
F042
F043
F044
F045
F046
F047
F048
F049
F050
Name
Sine Lead
Saw Lead
Fat Saw w/Chorus
Wild Chorus
SW Synth #1
Staircase 4dg
FM Flute
LeadSqu w/Chor
Synth Trombone
Quartersteps
B-3 Perc Synth
Tuned White Noise
Basic Syn Bass
PHAT Bass
Ed’s OB Bass
Chirp Bass
Melodic Solo 1
Perc. Bass
Florian Bass
Hard Solo
Autobahn
Oxygene
Magnetic
Electric Friends
Don’t You Go
Blue Monday
Get Enough
Tainted Love
Sweet Dreams
West End Girls
99 Luftballons
You Want Me
Vienna
Pop Muzik Perc
Don’t Go Bass
Noise 1
Noise 2
Special PF
Special VG
Aliens
Bright Brass
MG Lead
F. P. Cress.
Spacious Saw Ld
Funny Ld
Oct Saw Ld
Oct Sqr Ld
4th Saw Ld
4th Sqr Ld
I'm Ready
Patch #
F051
F052
F053
F054
F055
F056
F057
F058
F059
F060
F061
F062
F063
F064
F065
F066
F067
F068
F069
F070
F071
F072
F073
F074
F075
F076
F077
F078
F079
F080
F081
F082
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F090
F091
F092
F093
F094
F095
F096
F097
F098
F099
F100
177
Name
Lucky Man
Takarajima
Gut Daze
Sweep Bass
Reso Sweep Bass
Oct. Sweep Bass
Arpie Bass
Chameleon Bass
Rock With You Ld
Beep Ld
Belly Ld
Over Mod Ld
Material Ld
Cool Bass
Metallic Bass
FM Horn
FM Reed
Square Ld
Sqr Alt Oct Ld
Popcorn Ld
Pulse Ld
PWM Tri Ld
PWM S/H Ld
PWM Frac Ld
Square Bass
Sync Up Ld
Sync Down Ld
Sync Up&Down Ld
Sync S/H Ld
Sync Frac Ld
Trancy Ld
Out Of Tune Ld
Sweep Trancy Ld
Sqr With Saw Ld
Saw With Sqr Ld
Noise Ld
Chip Perc.
Falling Noise
Upward Noise
Wind
Seashore
Pitch S/H
Glass Crash
Launch
Percussive Saw
Oct&Vibrato Ld
Glass Crash
Unison Bass
Sqr+Saw Oct Bass
Big Drift
Appendix
178
WAVEFORM LIST
PIANO/ENSEMBLE
Category
1 A. Piano
2 E. Piano
3 Harpsichord
4 Clav
5 Chro. Perc.
6 Guitar
7 Ethnic
8 SFX
*#1
Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
GrandPf Yam CF3
GrandPf Stw D St
GndPf StwDSt Rel
UpUf Regular
UpUf Honky
Electric Grand
Toy Pf Kaw
Toy Pf Kaw Rel
Toy Pf Sch
Toy Pf Sch Rel
Pop Piano CF
EP Tine Mk1 On
EP Tine Mk1 Off
EP Tine Mk2 On
EP Reed 200A
E.Piano FM
E.Piano FM Cho
EP Tine Mk1 Soft
EP Reed Soft
Hpsichrd Back
Hpsichrd Front
Hpsichrd Buff
Hpsi Off
Clav AC
Clav AD
Clav BC
Clav BD
Clav Off
Xylophone YX Norm
Marimba YM Norm
Marimba YM Trem
Glockenspiel
Glock. X-66
Vibraphone YV
Tublar Bells
Tub Bells FM
Tub Bells TW
Church Bell
Wine Glass
Tonechimes
Hand Bells
Syn. Celesta
Digi Bell 1
Digi Bell 2
Crystal
Music Box
Nylon-Str Gt.
Steel-Str Gt.
12Str Gt. A
12Str Gt. B
Jazz Gt.
Pedal Steel Gt
Orch Harp
OH Whole Tone C
OH Whole Tone F
Pizzicato Str.
Dulcimer
Sitar
Tanpura
Banjo
Soh
Pan Pipes
Sine
White Noise
Rain
TelephoneRingSus
TelephoneRingRel
E. Driver Sus
Category
9 Wind
10 Strings
11 Choir
12 Synth Pad
13 Bass
14 Synth Lead
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Name
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
E. Driver Rel
Trumpet Str
Trumpet Vib
Trumpet Muted
Tp. Fall Sus
Tp. Fall Atk
Tp. Grs Up Sus
Trumpet Sect.
Trombone Str
Trombone Muted
Tb. Fall Sus
Tb. Fall Atk
Flute Str
Flute Vib
Flute Atk
Alto Sax Str
Alto Sax Vib
Tenor Sax Str
Tenor Sax Vib
Bari Sax Str
Recorder
Flute Taped
M12 Box Brass 1
M12 Box Brass 2
M12 Brazz 1
M12 Brazz 2
M12 Horn Ens 1
M12 Horn Ens 2
Str. Legato
Str. Section
Synth Str. Mlw
Synth Str. Bri
Sol. Str.
Violins Taped
Violin
Glass Harp St
Glass Harp Mono
Choir Aah CM
Choir Doo CM
Vocal CM Tn/S
Choir Taped
PWM
EPFM Pad
WG Pad Bright
WG Pad Mellow
Noise Choir
Acoustic Bs On
Acoustic Bs Off
Finger Bs Jz
Finger Bs Pr
Pick Bs Jz
Pick Bs Pr
Slap Bs Jz
FM Bass
Timpani Single
Timpani Roll
Timpani Griss
Square
Pulse 66%
Pulse 75%
Pulse 80%
Sawtooth
Kinura
Lucy
Even Bars
OPZ LFO
Osc. Sync U/D
Category
15 Free Reed
16 Percussion
Name
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Osc. Sync D
Accordion
Acdn SubOct
Reed Organ
Melodion B-24
Melodion M-37
Melodion M-37Oct
Melodion PRO-44
Melodion S-32
Harm Single
Harm Chro Norm
Harm Chro Vib
Harm BsChro
Harm Bass Stacc
Harm FM
Ride Cymbal
Crash Cymbal
Crash Cymbal Lp
Wind Chime
Wind Chime Lp
Tone Tang
Jazz BD
Jazz SD
Jazz SD&BD Rnd
Brush SD Swl On
Brush SD Swl Off
Brsh SD Tap/Slap
Brush SD&BD Rnd
179
PIPE ORGAN STOPS & ProChord VOICING
PIPE ORGAN STOPS
#
ProChord VOICING
Pipe Voice
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C
T
P
C-Open Diapason
C-Principal
C-Diapason
C-Bourdon 1
C-Bourdon 2
C-Gedeckt
C-Rohr Flute
C-Flute Hamonic
C-Flautino
C-Voix Cele II
C-Clarinet
C-Hautbois
C-Oboe
C-Vox Humana
C-Trompette
C-Cornet V
C-Mixture III
C-Mixture IV
C-Reserve
C-Reserve
C-Reserve
T-Tibia Clausa
T-Brass Saxophone
T-Brass Trumpet
T-Clarinet
T-Brs E.PostHorn
T-Orchestral Oboe
T-Style D Trumpet
T-Viol d'Orchestle
T-Vox Humana
T-Viol Celeste
T-Reserved
T-Reserved
P-CotVln 32' & Brdn 16'
P-CtlBmb 32' & Prn 16'
P-CntBrdn 32' & Flte 16'
P-Trompette 16'
P-Fagott 16'
P-SubBs 16' & Gedeckt 8'
P-Diapason 8' & Flute 4'
P-PrnChors 8' & Mixt IV
P-Tibia 16' & Flute 8'
P-Diap 16' & PostHorns
P-Cornopean
P-Reserved
P-Reserved
Closed
Open
Duet
1
"
33
2
4
all the
componets
Big Band
"
3
4
1
2
"
Jazz Brass
3
4
4
1
4
1
1
2
2
3
4
Hymn
Quartet 1
2 2
3
4
Theatre
1
42
1
23
4
1
23
4
3
1
2
2
3
Strings
1
3
4
2 2
Harmonic
Chime
1
2
3
Old Time
1
23
4
4
5 Part Open
4 Part
Closed
"
Small
Combo
4
Quartet 2
Big Band
Sax
all the
componets
1
2
3
4
1
2
Block
3 2
1
22
3
4
The chord voicings for the Small Combo, Hymn, and Old Time patterns are
somewhat similar; however, the passing chords are different corresponding to the
harmonic style for each pattern.
Classical
Theatre
Pedal
Appendix
180
MIDI TEMPLATES
MIDI TEMPLATES
Template
MIDI IN
Local Control
NRPN
Program Change
Drawbar Registration
External Zone
Transmit Channel
Tx. Upper
Tx. Lower
Tx. Pedal
Rx. Upper
Rx. Lower
Rx. Pedal
Comments
Basic
Sequence
On
On
On
On
Off
1
2
3
1
2
3
Record and Playback between
the SKX PRO (stand alone)
and external sequencer.
Pedal KBD
Pedal
On
On
On
On
Off
1
2
3
1 (disregarded, off)
2 (disregarded, off)
3 (disregarded, omni)
Play with expanded Pedalboard
into the MIDI IN Port.
Your performance will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT
Port and recorded by an external sequencer.
Organ Upper
Organ Upper
On
On
On
On
Off
1
2
3
1 (disregarded, off)
2 (disregarded, off)
3 (disregarded, off)
Play the ORGAN Section Upper directly by expanded MIDI
keyboard into the MIDI IN
Port.
Template
MIDI IN
Local Control
NRPN
Program Change
Drawbar Registration
External Zone
Transmit Channel
Tx. Upper
Tx. Lower
Tx. Pedal
Rx. Upper
Rx. Lower
Rx. Pedal
Comments
Piano
Piano
On
On
On
On
Off
1
2
3
1 (disregarded, off)
2 (disregarded, off)
3 (disregarded, off)
Play the PIANO Section directly by expanded MIDI keyboard into the MIDI IN Port.
Ensemble
Ensemble
On
On
On
On
Off
1
2
3
1 (disregarded, off)
2 (disregarded, off)
3 (disregarded, off)
Play the ENSEMBLE Section
directly by expanded MIDI
keyboard into the MIDI IN
Port.
Synth
Synth
On
On
On
On
Off
1
2
3
1 (disregarded, off)
2 (disregarded, off)
3 (disregarded, off)
Play the MONO SYNTH Section directly by expanded
MIDI keyboard into the MIDI
IN Port.
Template
MIDI IN
Local Control
NRPN
Program Change
Drawbar Registration
External Zone
Transmit Channel
Tx. Upper
Tx. Lower
Tx. Pedal
Rx. Upper
Rx. Lower
Rx. Pedal
Comments
EXZ
Sequence
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Control the MIDI equipment
by using External Zones and
MIDI OUT Port.
EXZ Pedal KBD
Pedal
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
1 (disregarded, off)
2 (disregarded, off)
3 (disregarded, omni)
Play with expanded Pedalboard
into the MIDI IN Port.
Control the MIDI equipment
by using External Zones and
MIDI OUT Port.
Messages
Messages
Messages
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
181
Appendix
182
MIDI INFORMATION
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION
CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES
Note Off
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
8nH
kkH
vvH, or
9nH
kkH
00H
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
kk=Note Number:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
vv=Velocity(disregard):
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Note On
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
9nH
kkH
vvH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
kk=Note Number:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
vv=Velocity:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Control Change
Bank Select (CC#0, 32)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
00H
mmH
BnH
20H
llH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
mm,ll=Bank Number:
00H 00H = Bundle
01H 00H = User
02H 00H = Factory
64H 00H - 6DH 00H= Bank [1] to [10]
Disregards if the received number is empty.
Expression (CC#11)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
0BH
vvH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
vv=Expression:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Spring Shock (CC#48)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
30H
vvH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
vv=Velocity:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
TW Brake (CC#49)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
31H
vvH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
vv=Control Value:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
0 - 63=Off, 64 - 127=On
Damper (CC#64)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
40H
vvH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
vv=Control Value:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
0 - 63=Off, 64 - 127=On
Portamento Switch (CC#65)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
41H
vvH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
vv=Control Value:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
0 - 63=Off, 64 - 127=On
Sustain (CC#69-adds Sustain to Upper and Lower ORGAN Parts)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
45H
vvH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
vv=Control Value:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
0 - 63=Off, 64 - 127=On
ProChord Active (CC#84)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
54H
vvH
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
n=MIDI Channel Number:
vv=Control Value:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
0 - 63=Off, 64 - 127=On
Activates “Harmony” parts for ORGAN Section when this Parameter is “On.”
Leslie Fast (CC#92)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
5CH
vvH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
vv=Control Value:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
0 - 63=Off, 64 - 127=On
This control change is only for receive.
NRPN MSB/LSB (CC#98, 99)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
63H
mmH
BnH
62H
llH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
mm=upper byte of the Parameter number specified by NRPN
ll=lower byte of the Parameter number specified by NRPN
Data Entry (CC#6, 38)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
06H
mmH
BnH
26H
llH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
mm,ll=the value of the Parameter specified by NRPN
Program Change
Status
2nd Byte
CnH
ppH
n=MIDI Channel Number:
pp=Program Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
00H - 63H = Patch #0 to 99
64H - 6DH = Favo. Number [1] to [10]
7FH = [Manual]
Example of operation
ex: select Combi F016
Bx 00 02 Bx 20 00 Cx 0F (x=Upper Channel)
ex: select Favorite Bank[2], Number[6]
Bx 00 65 Bx 20 00 Cx 69 (x=Upper Channel)
ex: select Manual
Cx 7F (x=Upper Channel)
CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES
All Sounds Off (CC#120)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
78H
00H
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
When this message is received, all currently-sounding notes on the corresponding channel will be turned off immediately.
Reset All Controllers (CC#121)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
79H
00H
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
When this message is received, the following controllers will be set to their reset
values.
Expression: 127, TW Brake: 0, Damper: 0
NRPN: unset; previously set data will not change
All Notes Off (CC#123)
Status
2nd Byte 3rd Byte
BnH
7BH
00H
n=MIDI Channel Number:
0H - FH (Ch. 1 - 16)
When All Notes Off is received, all notes on the corresponding channel will be
turned off. However if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is ON, the sound will be continued
until these are turned off.
183
DRAWBAR DATA LIST
Part
Upper
Lower
Pedal
16´
Value
Control Number
4´
2 2⁄3´
2´
1 3⁄5´
1 1⁄3´
0CH(12)
0DH(13) 0EH(14)
0FH(15)
10H(16)
11H(17)
12H(18)
13H(19)
14H(20)
15H(21)
21H(33)
16H(22)
-
18H(24)
-
19H(25)
-
1AH(26)
-
1BH(27)
-
1CH(28)
-
1DH(29)
-
0
5 1⁄3´
8´
17H(23)
23H(35)
1
00 - 0FH
(0 - 15)
10 - 1FH
(16 - 31)
2
20 - 2FH
(32 - 47)
Level
4
3
30 - 3FH
(48 - 63)
40 - 4FH
(64 - 79)
5
50 - 5FH
(80 - 95)
6
1´
7
8
60 - 6FH 70 - 7EH 7FH
(96 - 111) (112-126) (127)
ex: Set Lower 8´ to level 7 via MIDI. Bx 17 70 (x=Upper Channel)
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
MEMORY DUMP
1. Each Packet (139 Bytes)
F0
55
dd
10
24
11
[TYPE]
[PNH]
[PNL]
[DATA]
[CHD]
F7
System Exclusive
SUZUKI ID
Device ID (refer to page 159)
Model ID MSB
Model ID LSB
Command: Data Packet
Data Type
07H, 08H = Temp. Dump
0AH = System Dump
Packet Number MSB
Packet Number LSB
64 Bytes Data
128 Bytes nibblized ASCII
ex: 7EH = 37H, 45H
Check Digit
Lower 7 bits of XOR [DATA]
End Of Exclusive
2. Acknowledge
F0
55
dd
10
24
14
[TYPE]
[AK]
[PNH]
[PNL]
F7
System Exclusive
SUZUKI ID
Device ID
Model ID MSB
Model ID LSB
Command: Acknowledge
Data Type
Result
00H = OK
05H = Check Digit Error
06H = Receive Protected
Packet Number MSB
Packet Number LSB
End Of Exclusive
3. # of Packets
Temp. Dump:
System Dump:
46
11
DUMP REQUEST (Rx. Only)
F0
55
dd
10
24
12
[TYPE]
F7
System Exclusive
SUZUKI ID
Device ID
Model ID MSB
Model ID LSB
Command: Dump Request
Data Type
07H = Temp. Dump
0AH = System Dump
End Of Exclusive
INDIVIDUAL PARAMETERS
F0
55
dd
10
24
02
[DATA]
F7
Suzuki Exclusive
SUZUKI ID
Device ID
Model ID MSB
Model ID LSB
Command: Individual Parameters
00H = Off, 01H = NRPN, 02H = SysEx.
End Of Exclusive
Set the way to the transmitting Individual Parameters.
DATA SET (RX. ONLY)
F0
55
dd
10
24
13
aa
bb
cc
[DATA]
F7
System Exclusive
SUZUKI ID
Device ID
Model ID MSB
Model ID LSB
Command: Data Set
Address MSB
Address
Address LSB
Data (Flexible bytes)
End Of Exclusive
IDENTITY REQUEST (RX. ONLY)
F0
7E
dd
06
01
F7
System Exclusive
Universal non real-time
Device ID
Sub ID #1
Sub ID #2
End Of Exclusive
IDENTITY REPLY (TX. ONLY)
F0
7E
dd
06
02
55
00 10
00 24
00 00
00 00
F7
System Exclusive
Universal non real-time
Device ID
Sub ID #1
Sub ID #2
SUZUKI ID
Device Family code
Device Family number
End Of Exclusive
When Identity Request is received, Identity Reply will be transmitted.
Appendix
184 MIDI INFORMATION - continued
COMBINATION PARAMETERS
Category
Name
Portamento
Reverb
Organ Upper
Organ Lower
Organ Pedal
Piano, Ensemble,
Synth
“s” means;
4: Piano
5: Ensemble
6: Synth
Internal Zones
*#1
Parameter
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
SysEx
Data
Length The data length 01 uses only MSB, length 02 uses MSB
and LSB.
On
On
Type (P/E/S)
--10
10
--00
01
--00
00
--10
10
--00
01
-01
01
01
Depth
Time (P/E/S)
Pre-LPF (P/E/S)
Type (Organ)
Time (Organ)
Pre-LPF (Organ)
Patch
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
02
03
04
06
07
08
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
02
03
04
06
07
08
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
Octave
Transpose
Allocate
Key Range Low
Key Range High
Volume
Expression Minimum
P. Bend Range
Mod. Mode
Damper Enable
Reverb Send Level
Octave
Transpose
Allocate
Key Range Low
Key Range High
Damper Enable
Octave
Transpose
Allocate
Key Range Low
Key Range High
Damper Enable
Patch
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
1s
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
01
02
03
04
05
0A
01
02
03
04
05
0A
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
1s
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
01
02
03
04
05
0A
01
02
03
04
05
0A
00
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
01
01
01
01
02
02
01
01
01
01
02
Octave
Transpose
Allocate
Key Range Low
Key Range High
Volume
Expression Minimum
P. Bend Range
Mod. Mode
Damper Enable
Reverb Send Level
Velocity Curve
Octave Upper
Octave Pedal
Octave Real Lower
Pedal to Lower On
Pedal to Lower Upper Limit
Pedal to Lower Mode
Pedal Sustain On
Pedal Sustain Length
Pedal Key Mono/Poly
Lower to Pedal On
Lower to Pedal Upper Limit
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0D
00
02
03
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0D
00
02
03
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
16 letters
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 07
00: Room 1
05: Church
01: Room 2
06: Plate
02: Ballroom
07: Spring
03: Hall 1
04: Hall 2
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
Same as P/E/S
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 00 - 00 63, 00 64 - 01 47, 01 48 - 02 2B
(B001 - B100, U001 - U100, F001 - F100)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
3F 7A - 40 00 - 40 06 (-6 - ±0 - +6)
00 - 03 (Off, Upper, Lower, Pedal)
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 0E (Patch, 0 - 12)
00 - 04 (Off, OD, MFx1, MFx2, Leslie)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
3F 7A - 40 00 - 40 06 (-6 - ±0 - +6)
00 - 03 (Off, Upper, Lower, Pedal)
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F: note number
00, 01 (Off, On)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
3F 7A - 40 00 - 40 06 (-6 - ±0 - +6)
00 - 03 (Off, Upper, Lower, Pedal)
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F: note number
00, 01 (Off, On)
Piano / Ensemble:
00 00 - 03 0F, 03 10 - 06 1F
(U001 - U400, F001 - F400)
Mono Synth:
00 00 - 00 63, 00 64 - 01 47, 01 48 - 02 2B
(B001 - B100, U001 - U400, F001 - F100)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
3F 7A - 40 00 - 40 06 (-6 - ±0 - +6)
00 - 03 (Off, Upper, Lower, Pedal)
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 0E (Patch, 0 - 12)
00 - 03 (Off, Mod, OD, MFx1, MFx2)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 04 (Off, 1 - 4)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 02 (Lowest, Chord, Poly)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 04 (1 - 5)
00, 01 (Mono, Poly)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F: note number
185
Category
External Zones
“n” means;
8: Ex Zone 1
9: Ex Zone 2
A: Ex Zone 3
Parameter
On
MIDI Channel
Octave
Transpose
Bank Select MSB
Bank Select LSB
Program Change
Allocate
Key Range Low
Key Range High
Volume
Expression Enable
P. Bend Enable
Mod. Enable
Damper Enable
Pan
Velocity Curve
Expression Minimum
Expression Maximum
Expression CC
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
SysEx
Data
Length The data length 01 uses only MSB, length 02 uses MSB
and LSB.
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
1n
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
01
01
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 0F (1 - 16)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
3F 7A - 40 00 - 40 06 (-6 - ±0 - +6)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 03 (Off, Upper, Lower, Pedal)
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 40 - 7F (Left - Center - Right)
00 - 04 (Off, Hard - Easy)
00 - 3F (0 - 63)
40 - 7F (64 - 127)
00, 01, 02 (Off, 7, 11)
Appendix
186 MIDI INFORMATION - continued
ORGAN PATCH PARAMETERS
Category
Name
Volume
Upper Registration
Lower Registration
Pedal Registration
Lower and Upper
Pedal
Percussion
*#1
Parameter
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
SysEx
Length
Patch Name
Patch Volume
16´
5 1/3´
8´
4´
2 2/3´
2´
1 3/5´
1 1/3´
1´
16´
5 1/3´
8´
4´
2 2/3´
2´
1 3/5´
1 1/3´
1´
16´
8´
Organ Type
-24
--------------------24
-14
--------------------00
-00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
-24
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
24
-14
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
00
01
00
-01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Envelope
24
01
00
24
01
01
Contact Offset Time
Contact Damping
Leakage Level
Custom TW A-100
Custom TW B-3
Custom TW C-3
Custom TW Mellow
Custom Pipe
Tone Control
Contact Delay Velocity On
Contact Delay Velocity Depth
Pitch Bend Depth Plus
Pitch Bend Depth Minus
Sustain Upper On
Sustain Upper Length
Sustain Lower On
Sustain Lower Length
Impedance Amount
Type
Envelope
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
15
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
15
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Custom Sub Drawbars
On
Harmonic
Fast Decay
Volume Soft
Level at Soft
Level at Normal
Decay at Fast
Decay at Normal
Touch
1’ Cancel
Drawbar Level
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
02
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
02
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Data
16 letters
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 07
00: A-100
04: Vx
01: B-3
05: Farf
02: C-3
06: Ace
03: Mellow
07: Pipe
00 - 20
00: Contact
01 - 0F: Release 1 - 15
10 - 1E: Attack and Release 1 - 15
00 - 40 - 7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
00 - 1F (0 - 31)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 05 (U1 - F3)
00 - 05 (U1 - F3)
00 - 05 (U1 - F3)
00 - 05 (U1 - F3)
00 - 05 (U1 - F3)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 0C (0 - 12)
00 - 18 (0 - 24)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 04 (1 - 5)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 04 (1 - 5)
00 - 02 (Off, Half, Full)
00, 01 (Normal, Muted)
00 - 20
00: Contact
01 - 0F: Release 1 - 15
10 - 1E: Attack and Release 1 - 15
00 - 05 (U1 - P3)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Second, Third)
00, 01 (Slow, Fast)
00, 01 (Normal, Soft)
00 - 63 (0 - 127)
00 - 63 (0 - 127)
00 - 18 (0 - 24)
00 - 18 (0 - 24)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (0, Soft)
187
Category
Animation
Transformer
Overdrive
Effect 1, Effect 2
Parameter
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
SysEx
Length
Leslie Bypass
Leslie Stop
Leslie Fast
Custom Cabinet
Vibrato Upper
Vibrato Lower
Vibrato Mode
Vibrato Pedal On
Vibrato Model
Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Chorus Mix
Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Tremulant
Leslie On Reverb
Drive Level
Hysteresis
Depth Upper
Depth Percussion
Depth Lower
Depth Pedal
On
On
Type
Drive Level
Exp. Control On
Crossover Freq
Blend
On
Type
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
29
2x
2x
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0E
0F
10
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
29
2x
2x
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0E
0F
10
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Param 1
Param 2
Param 3
Param 4
Param 5
Param 6
Param 7
Param 8
Bass Gain
Mid Gain
Treble Gain
Bass Freq
Mid Freq
Treble Freq
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
00
01
02
03
04
05
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
“x” means;
A: Effect 1
B: Effect 2
Equalizer
Data
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 0F (U1 - P8)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 05 (V1 - C3)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 02 (Big Box, Small Box, Metal Box)
00 - 99 (5.78 - 7.90 Hz)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 03 (Tube Amp, Stomp Box, Clip, EP Amp)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (400Hz - 14.7kHz)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 03 for Effect1, 00 - 04 for Effect 2
00: Tremolo
00: Auto Pan
01: Wah-Wah
01: Phaser
02: Ring Mod
02: Flanger
03: Compressor
03: Chorus
04: Delay
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 18 (20 - 308Hz)
00 - 0F (250 - 3.1kHz)
00 - 13 (3.0k - 8.0kHz)
Appendix
188 MIDI INFORMATION - continued
PIANO/ENSEMBLE PATCH PARAMETERS
Category
Parameter
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
SysEx
Data
Length Data length 01 uses MSB only, length 02 uses MSB and LSB.
Name
Volume
“s” means;
3: Piano
4: Ensemble
Category
Patch Name
Patch Volume
-s1
-07
-00
-s1
-07
-01
16 letters
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
Category
--
--
--
--
--
01
Portamento
On
Mode
Rate
Mono/Poly
Mono Priority
Pitch Bend Range Up
Pitch Bend Range Down
On
Mode
s1
s1
s1
s1
s1
s1
s1
s2
s2
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
s1
s1
s1
s1
s1
s1
s1
s2
s2
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Disabled
Trigger Mode
Waveform
s2
sx
sx
02
00
01
00
00
00
s2
sx
sx
02
00
01
01
01
01
Rate
Delay Time
Attack Rate
Attack Rate Key Track
On
Type
Drive Level
Exp. Control On
Crossover Freq
Blend
On
Type
sx
sx
sx
sx
s5
s5
s5
s5
s5
s5
sx
sx
03
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
sx
sx
sx
sx
s5
s5
s5
s5
s5
s5
sx
sx
03
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Param 1
Param 2
Param 3
Param 4
Param 5
Param 6
Param 7
Param 8
Bass Gain
Mid Gain
Treble Gain
Bass Freq
Mid Freq
Treble Freq
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
s8
s8
s8
s8
s8
s8
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
s8
s8
s8
s8
s8
s8
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
00
01
02
03
04
05
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
00 - 0F
00: A. Piano
08: Wind
01: E. Piano
09: Strings
02: Harpsi
0A: Choir
03: Clav.
0B: Syn. Pad
04: Chro. Perc.
0C: Bass
05: Guitar.
0D: Syn. Lead
06: Ethnic
0E: Free Reed
07: SFX
0F: Percussion
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Every, Legato)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 02 (Mono, Poly, PolySus)
00 - 04 (Auto, Last, High, Low, First)
00 - 0C (0 - 12)
00 - 18 (0 - 24)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 10
00: Closed
09: Quartet 1
01: Open
0A: Quartet 2
02: Duet
0B Jazz Brass
03: Block
0C: Strings
04: Big Band Saxes
0D: Harmonic Chimes
05: Big Band
0E: Old Time
06: Small Combo
0F: Part 4 Closed
07: Theatre
10: Part 5 Open
08: Hymn
00, 01 (Single, Unison)
00, 01 (Note, Free)
00 - 06 (Triangle, Square, Rectangle, Saw Down, Saw Up,
S&H, Fluctuation)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 03 (Tube Amp, Stomp Box, Clip, EP Amp)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (400Hz - 14.7kHz)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 03 for Effect1, 00 - 04 for Effect 2
00: Tremolo
00: Auto Pan
01: Wah-Wah
01: Phaser
02: Ring Mod
02: Flanger
03: Compressor
03: Chorus
04: Delay
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 18 (20 - 308Hz)
00 - 0F (250Hz - 3.1kHz)
00 - 13 (3.0k - 8.0kHz)
ProChord
LFO1, LFO2
“x” means;
3: LFO1
4: LFO2
Overdrive
Effect 1, Effect 2
“x” means;
6: Effect 1
7: Effect 2
Equalizer
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
189
Category
Component 1 - 4
“x” means;
9: Component 1
A: Component 2
B: Component 3
C: Component 4
Parameter
On
Key Range Low
Key Range High
Velocity Range Low
Velocity Range High
Velocity Depth
Velocity Offset
Note Delay Source
Note Delay Mode
Note Off Threshold
Note On Delay Time
Note Off Delay Time
Pitch EG Key Track Attack
Pitch EG Key Track Decay
Pitch EG Key Track Slope
Pitch EG Key Track Release
Pitch EG Vel Track Attack
Pitch EG Vel Track Release
Pitch EG Attack Rate
Pitch EG Decay Rate
Pitch EG Breakpoint Level
Pitch EG Slope Rate
Pitch EG Sustain Level
Pitch EG Release Rate
Filter EG Key Track Attack
Filter EG Key Track Decay
Filter EG Key Track Slope
Filter EG Key Track Release
Filter EG Vel Track Attack
Filter EG Vel Track Release
Filter EG Attack Rate
Filter EG Decay Rate
Filter EG Breakpoint Level
Filter EG Slope Rate
Filter EG Sustain Level
Filter EG Release Rate
Amp EG Key Track Attack
Amp EG Key Track Decay
Amp EG Key Track Slope
Amp EG Key Track Release
Amp EG Vel Track Attack
Amp EG Vel Track Release
Amp EG Attack Rate
Amp EG Decay Rate
Amp EG Breakpoint Level
Amp EG Slope Rate
Amp EG Sustain Level
Amp EG Release Rate
Amp EG Coef Attack
Amp EG Coef Decay&Slope
Amp EG Coef Release
Osc Waveform Category
Osc Waveform Number
Osc Transpose
Osc Fine Tune
Osc Pitch Key Track
Osc Stretch Tune Depth
Osc Pitch Bend On
Osc LFO1 Depth
Osc LFO1 Mod Depth
Osc LFO2 Depth
Osc LFO2 Mod Depth
Osc Pitch EG Depth
Osc Pitch EG Vel Track
Filter Mode
Filter Cutoff Freq
Filter Resonance
Filter Cutoff Key Track
Filter EG Vel Track
Filter LFO1 Depth
Filter LFO1 Mod Depth
Filter LFO2 Depth
Filter LFO2 Mod Depth
Filter Cutoff EG Depth
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4E
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
SysEx
Data
Length Data length 01 uses MSB only, length 02 uses MSB and LSB.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4E
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
01
01
01
01
02
01
01
01
01
01
02
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F: note number
00 - 7F: note number
01 - 7F (1 - 127)
01 - 7F (1 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 200 %)
00 - 40 - 7F (-64 - ±0 - +63)
00 - 03 (Component 1 - 4)
00 - 02 (Note On, Off Vel, Off Env)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127; Exponential - Linear)
00 - 7F (0 - 127; Exponential - Linear)
00 - 7F (0 - 127; Exponential - Linear)
00 - 0F (1 - 16)
00 00 - 01 7F (1 - 256)
3F 41 - 40 00 - 40 3F (-63 - ±0 - +63 semitones)
3F 1C - 40 00 - 40 64 (-100 - ±0 - +100 cents)
3F 1C - 40 00 - 40 64 (-100 - ±0 - +100 %)
00 - 7F (0 - 127 )
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
3F 40 - 40 00 - 40 3F (-64 - ±0 - +63)
00 - 64 (0 - 100 %)
00, 01 (LP12, HP12)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
3F 1C - 40 00 - 40 64 (-100 - ±0 - +100 %)
00 - 7F (0 - 100 %)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
3F 1C - 40 00 - 40 64 (-100 - ±0 - +100 %)
Appendix
190 MIDI INFORMATION - continued
Category
Parameter
Amp Level Vel Depth
Amp Level
Amp Pan
Amp Pan Image
Amp LFO1 Depth
Amp LFO1 Mod Depth
Amp LFO2 Depth
Amp LFO2 Mod Depth
Output Bus
*#1
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
4F
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
sx
SysEx
Data
Length Data length 01 uses MSB only, length 02 uses MSB and LSB.
4F
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
3F 1C - 40 00 - 40 64 (-100 - ±0 - +100 %)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 40 - 7F (Left - Center - Right)
00 - 04 (Fixed, L-R, R-L, Pyramid, Inverted)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Effect, Dry)
191
MONO SYNTH PATCH PARAMETERS
Category
Common
Oscillator
Filter
Amplifier
Envelope Generator
Overdrive
Effect 1, Effect 2
Parameter
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
SysEx
Data
Length Data length 01 uses MSB only, length 02 uses MSB and LSB.
Patch Name
Volume
Portamento On
Portamento Mode
Portamento Rate
LFO Trigger Mode
LFO Waveform
LFO Rate
LFO Delay Time
LFO Attack Rate
LFO Rate Key Track
Osc Note Priority
Osc Octave
Osc Type
-51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
-00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0E
10
-00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
-51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
-00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0E
10
10
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
01
Osc Modifier 1
Osc Modifier 2
Osc Modifier 3
Osc Modifier 4
Osc Pitch Key Track
Osc Pitch Bend Range Up
Osc Pitch Bend Range Down
Osc Pitch LFO Depth
Osc Pitch LFO Mod Depth
Osc Pitch EG Depth
Filter Mode
Filter Drive
Filter Cutoff Freq
Filter Resonance
Filter Key Track
Filter EG Depth
Filter Levl Vel Track
Filter LFO Depth
Filter LFO Mod Depth
Amp Level
Amp Level Vel Depth
Amp LFO Depth
Amp LFO Mod Depth
EG Trigger Mode
Env Filter Attack
Env Filter Decay
Env Filter Sustain
Env Filter Release
Env Amp Attack
Env Amp Decay
Env Amp Sustain
Env Amp Release
On
Type
Drive Level
Exp. Control On
Crossover Freq
Blend
On
Type
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
52
52
52
5x
5x
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
52
52
52
5x
5x
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Param 1
Param 2
Param 3
Param 4
Param 5
Param 6
Param 7
Param 8
5x
5x
5x
5x
5x
5x
5x
5x
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
5x
5x
5x
5x
5x
5x
5x
5x
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
“x” means;
3: Effect 1
4: Effect 2
16 letters
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Every, Legato)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Note, Free)
00 - 05 (Tri, Sqr, Rect, Saw, S/H, Fluc)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 03 (Auto, Last, High, Low)
3F 7E - 40 00 - 40 02 (-2 - ±0 - +2)
00 - 05
00: Duo
03: Sync
01: Unison
04: FM
02: Pulse
05: Noise
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 02 (0 - 2)
00 - 02 (0 - 2)
00 - 40 - 7F (-100 - ±0 - +100 cent/note)
00 - 0C (0 - 12)
00 - 18 (0 - 24)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 40 - 7F (-64 - ±0 - +63)
00 - 03 (LP12, LP24, HP12, HP24)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 40 - 7F (-100 - ±0 - +100 cent/note)
00 - 40 - 7F (-64 - ±0 - +63)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Every, Legato)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 03 (Tube Amp, Stomp Box, Clip, EP Amp)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (400Hz - 14.7kHz)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 03 for Effect1, 00 - 04 for Effect 2
00: Tremolo
00: Auto Pan
01: Wah-Wah
01: Phaser
02: Ring Mod
02: Flanger
03: Compressor
03: Chorus
04: Delay
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
Appendix
192 MIDI INFORMATION - continued
Category
Equalizer
*#1
Parameter
Bass Gain
Mid Gain
Treble Gain
Bass Freq
Mid Freq
Treble Freq
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
55
55
55
55
55
55
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
00
01
02
03
04
05
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
00
00
00
00
00
00
55
55
55
55
55
55
SysEx
Data
Length Data length 01 uses MSB only, length 02 uses MSB and LSB.
00
01
02
03
04
05
01
01
01
01
01
01
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 18 (20 - 308Hz)
00 - 0F (250 - 3.1kHz)
00 - 13 (3.0k - 8.0kHz)
193
CUSTOM SETS
CUSTOM TONE WHEELS
A-100
F1: #35564
A-102, serial number #35564.
F2: Shiny
CUSTOM PIPES
Classic
Classical or Liturgical stops.
Theatre 1
Theatre stops based on Wurlitzer Style 210.
Theatre 2
Theater stops based on Wurlitzer Style 260 Special.
Leakage tones with even overtones.
F3: Mixture
Harmonized leakage tones.
B-3
F1: A27563
B-3, serial number #A27563.
F2: #364839
B-3, serial number #364839.
F3: Mixture
Harmonized leakage tones.
C-3
F1: C155596
C-3, serial number #C155596.
F2: Shiny
Leakage tones with even overtones.
F3: Mixture
Harmonized leakage tones.
Mellow
F1: Full Flats
“Flat” frequency response.
F2: Husky
Emphasizes upper and lower frequencies.
F3: Flute Lead
Boosts middle frequencies.
CUSTOM SUB DRAWBARS
F1: B-3 A27563
F2: B-3 #364839
F3: A-100 #33339
Each Custom setting replicates the organ shown above.
CUSTOM LESLIE CABINETS
122 Gentle
Replicates 122 cabinet (Large body, peaking horn driver) heard from a
distance, rear.
122 Wild
Replicates 122 cabinet heard from a closer distance, front.
31H-Type
Replicates 31H cabinet heard from a distance, rear.
147 Gentle
Replicates 147 cabinet (Large body, wide range) heard from a distance.
147 Wild
Replicates 147 cabinet heard from a closer distance, front.
145 Gentle
Replicates 145 cabinet (Middle body, slightly narrow range) heard from a
distance, rear.
145 Wild
Replicates 145 cabinet heard from a closer distance, front.
PR-40
Replicates a Hammond tone cabinet.
Appendix
194 MIDI INFORMATION - continued
CUSTOM TONE WHEEL PARAMETERS
Category
Parameter
Temporary Tone Name
Foldback Low
Wheels
SysEx Address SysEx
MSB to LSB Length
Data
Description
Foldback High
Wheel Level
-10
10
10
-00
00
01
-01
02
tt
-01
01
02
(10 characters)
00 - 0C (TW#01 - #12)
00 - 05 (TW#91 - #96)
00 00 - 01 41
(0 - 193: -inf, -92.0 - +4.0[dB])
Wheel HPF
Leak Trim
Matrix Level
10
10
20
02
03
nn
tt
tt
0g
01
01
02
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00 00 - 01 41
(0 - 193: -inf, -92.0 - +4.0[dB])
tt: Fundamental TW #; 00 - 54 (#01 - #73)
nn: Note number
g: Footage(0 = 16’, 1 = 5 1/3’... 8 = 1’)
Leak Level
30
tt
ll
02
00 00 - 01 41
(0 - 193: -inf, -92.0 - +4.0[dB])
tt: Fundamental TW #; 00 - 54 (#01 - #73)
ll: Leaking TW #; 48 - 66 (#61 - #91)
tt: Tone Wheel number;
00 - 0B (#01 - #12),
0C - 17 (#F01 - F12),
18 - 66 (#13 - #91),
67 - 6B (#F92 - #F96)
CUSTOM PEDAL REG. PARAMETERS
Category
Parameter
SysEx Address SysEx
MSB to LSB Length
Temporary Pedal Name
Normal 16’ - 16’
Sub Drawbars
-50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Normal 16’ - 5 1/3’
Normal 16’ - 8’
Normal 16’ - 4’
Normal 16’ - 2 2/3’
Normal 16’ - 2’
Normal 16’ - 1 3/5’
Normal 16’ - 1 1/3’
Normal 8’ - 16’
Normal 8’ - 5 1/3’
Normal 8’ - 8’
Normal 8’ - 4’
Normal 8’ - 2 2/3’
Normal 8’ - 2’
Normal 8’ - 1 3/5’
Normal 8’ - 1 1/3’
-00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
-01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
-01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Data
Description
(10 characters)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
00 - 08 (0 - 8)
PIPE PARAMETERS
Category
Pipes
Parameter
SysEx Address SysEx
MSB to LSB Length
Name
Assign
-40
-01
-pp
-02
Tremulant
Footage
40
40
02
03
pp
pp
01
01
Volume
40
04
pp
02
Detune
40
05
pp
02
Chiff
40
06
pp
01
Cut Off Frequency
40
07
pp
02
Pan - Direction
40
08
pp
01
Pan - Imaging
40
09
pp
01
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Data
Description
(10 characters)
00 00 - 00 2D
pp: Pipe Stop number
(C-Open Diapason - P-Cornopean) 00 - 13 (#01 - #20)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 09
(32´ - 1´)
00 00 - 01 41
(0 - 193: -inf, -92.0 - +4.0[dB])
3F 4E - 40 00 - 40 32
(-50 - ±0 - +50[cent])
00 - 03
(Off, Soft, Normal, Loud)
3F 01 - 40 00
(-127 - 0)
00 - 40 - 7F
(L64 - Center - R63)
00 - 04
(Fixed, L-R, R-L, Pyramid,
Inverted Pyramid)
195
CUSTOM LESLIE PARAMETERS
Category
Cabinet
Parameter
NRPN
SysEx Address SysEx
Data
MSB LSB
MSB to LSB Length Data length 01 uses MSB only, length 02 uses MSB and LSB.
(63) (62)
Name
Speaker
-06
-17
-00
-06
-17
-01
Slow Speed Horn
Slow Speed Drum
Fast Speed Horn
Fast Speed Drum
Rise Time Horn
Rise Time Drum
Fall Time Horn
Fall Time Drum
Brake Time Horn
Brake Time Drum
Delay Time Horn
Delay Time Drum
Mic. Width Horn
Mic. Width Drum
Mic. Center Horn
Mic. Center Drum
Mic. Distance Horn
Mic. Distance Drum
Level Horn
Level Drum
Level Sub Bass
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
01
02
03
04
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
13
14
15
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
01
02
03
04
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
13
14
15
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
01
01
01
(10 Characters)
00 - 07
00: 145 Front
04: 122 Front
01: 145 Rear
05: 122 Rear
02: 147 Front
06: Cone Type
03: 147 Rear
07: PR-40
00 00, 00 01 - 00 65 (0, 20 - 120 rpm)
00 00, 00 01 - 00 65 (0, 20 - 120 rpm)
00 00, 00 01 - 02 2D (0, 200 - 500 rpm)
00 00, 00 01 - 02 2D (0, 200 - 500 rpm)
00 - 24 (0.8 - 12.5 sec)
00 - 23 (1.0 - 12.5 sec)
00 - 24 (0.8 - 12.5 sec)
00 - 23 (1.0 - 12.5 sec)
00 - 24 (0.8 - 12.5 sec)
00 - 23 (1.0 - 12.5 sec)
00 - 05 (0.0 - 1.0 sec)
00 - 05 (0.0 - 1.0 sec)
00 - 64 (0 - 100 cm)
00 - 64 (0 - 100 cm)
0E - 40 - 72 (-50 - ±0 - +50 cm)
0E - 40 - 72 (-50 - ±0 - +50 cm)
00 1E - 01 48 (30 - 200 cm)
00 1E - 01 48 (30 - 200 cm)
00, 01 - 4D (-Inf, -76 - 0 dB)
00, 01 - 4D (-Inf, -76 - 0 dB)
00, 01 - 4D (-Inf, -76 - 0 dB)
Appendix
196 MIDI INFORMATION - continued
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Category
Tune
Expression
Damper
Foot Switch
User Button
Display
Audio
Master Equalizer
*#1
Parameter
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
SysEx
Length
Master Tune
Transpose
Velocity Offset
Pitch Bend Depth
Organ Sounding Point
TW Brake Range
TW Brake Time
TW Brake Amp
Transpose Act Organ
Transpose Act Pinao
Transpose Act Ensemble
Transpose Act Synth
Source
Min. Level
Min. Limit LF
Min. Limit HF
Pedal Type
Gain
Curve
Pedal Type
Gain
Mode Foot Tip
Mode Foot Ring
Mode Leslie Tip
Mode Leslie Ring
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
07
07
07
07
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
00
01
02
03
06
07
08
03
04
00
01
02
03
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
07
07
07
07
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
00
01
02
03
06
07
08
03
04
00
01
02
03
02
02
02
01
01
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Leslie Switch Device
Mode
07
08
04
00
00
00
07
08
04
00
01
01
Short Cut
Time Out
Pop Up
Auto Power Off
Knobs
USB Mass Storage
Individual Out
------04
------00
------00
------04
------00
------01
Ext. Leslie Ch.
Use Rotary Out
Use Pedal Out
On
Bass Gain
Mid Gain
Treble Gain
Bass Freq
Mid Freq
Treble Freq
Mid Q
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
01
02
03
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
01
02
03
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Data
032E - 0338 - 0342 (A= 430 - 440 - 450 Hz)
3F 7A - 40 00 - 40 06 (-6 - ±0 - +6 semitones)
3F 60 - 40 00 - 40 20 (-32 ±0 - +32)
00 - 0D (Patch, ±0 - ±12 semitones)
00, 01 (Shallow, Deep)
3F 68 - 40 00 - 40 0C (-24 - ±0 - +12 semitones)
00 - 31 (0.1 - 5.0 sec)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Every, Next)
00, 01 (Every, Next)
00, 01 (Every, Next)
00, 01 (Every, Next)
00 - 02 (Pedal, MIDI, Both)
00 - 29 (Off, -40 - ±0dB)
00 - 29 (Off, -40 - ±0dB)
00 - 29 (Off, -40 - ±0dB)
00, 01 (H or R, Y or K)
00 - 3C (70 - 130 %)
00 - 02 (Audio, Linear, Capacitor)
00 - 03 (Switch, HalfY, HalfR, HalfK)
00 - 3C (70 - 130 %)
00 - 24
00: Off
07: Spring Shock
01: Leslie S/F Alt
08: MFX2 Delay Time
02: Leslie S/F Mom
09: Org U&L Sustain
03: Leslie S/F Tri
0A: Pedal To Lower
04: TW Brake
0B-23: Bass 1C - 3C
05: Favorite Fwd
24: ProChord
06: Favorite Rev
00, 01 (Foot Switch, Leslie Switch)
00 - 0E
00: Off
08: Organ MFX2
01: Pedal Sustain
09: Piano MFX1
02: Org U Sustain
0A: Piano MFX2
03: Org L Sustain
0B: Ens MFX1
04: TW Brake
0C: Ens MFX2
05: Spring Shock
0D: Synth MFX1
06: MFX2 Delay Time 0E: Synth MFX2
07: Organ MFX1
00 - 03 (0, 1, 2 sec, No)
00 - 03 (4, 8, 16 sec, No)
00 - 03 (No, 5, 10, 20 sec)
00, 01 (Disable, 30min)
00, 01 (Every, Across)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 06
00: Off
04: Piano / Ensemble
01: Piano Stereo
05: Piano / Synth
02: Ensemble Stereo
06: Ensemble / Synth
03: Synth Stereo
00 - 02 (1, 3, 1+Line)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 09 - 12 (-9 - ±0 +9)
00 - 18 (20 - 308Hz)
00 - 0F (125 - 4kHz)
00 - 13 (3.0k - 8.0kHz)
00 - 3F (0 - 63)
197
Category
Parameter
NRPN
MSB
LSB
(63)
(62)
MIDI In Mode
MIDI Common
--
Local Control
TRx Individual Parameters
TRx Program Change
TRx Drawbar Regi
Tx External Zone
Device ID
Rx Dump
Tx Upper
Tx Lower
Tx Pedal
Rx Upper
Rx Lower
Rx Pedal
Organ - Link L/P
Combi - Int Zone
Combi - Ext Zone
Organ - Organ Effect
Organ - Animation
Combi - Reverb
Organ - Drawbar
Organ - Percussion
Organ - Registration
Combi - Piano
Combi - Ensemble
Combi - Synth
Combi - Organ
MIDI Channel
Patch Load
--
-------------60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
-------------01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
SysEx Address
MSB to LSB
--
-------------00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
--
-------------60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
SysEx
Length
--
-------------01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
--
-------------01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Data
00 - 09
00: Upper
05:
01: Lower
06:
02: Pedal
07:
03: Lower+Pedal
08:
04: Upper+Pedal
09:
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 02 (Off, NRPN, SysEx)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 7F (0 - 127)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00 - 0F (1 - 16)
00 - 0F (1 - 16)
00 - 0F (1 - 16)
00 - 0F (1 - 16)
00 - 0F (1 - 16)
00 - 0F (1 - 16)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
00, 01 (Off, On)
Organ Upper
Piano
Ensemble
Synth
Sequencer
FAVORITES
Category
Favorites
Example
Parameter
Assign
SysEx Address SysEx
MSB to LSB Length
73
0b
0n
02
Data
Default
Description
00 00 - 00 63 (B001 - B100), same as Combination# b: Bank 0 - 9 (1 - 10)
00 64 - 01 47 (U001 - U100),
n: Number 0 - 9 (1 - 10)
01 48 - 02 2B (F001 - F100)
Set 5-2 at U005 via System Exclusive ....................F0 55 dd 10 24 13 73 04 01 00 68 F7 (dd = Device ID)
Appendix
198
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART
Stage Keyboard
Model: SKX PRO
Function
Basic
Channel
Mode
Default
Changed
Default
Messages
Altered
Note
Numbers
Transmitted
*1
1 - 16
3
X
*****
12 - 120 *2
*****
: True Voice
O
Note ON
Velocity
O
Note OFF
X
Key’s
After Touch
X
Ch’s
O
Pitch Bend
O
0, 32
O
1
O
6, 38
O
7
O
10
O
11
O
12 - 20
O
21 - 29
Control
O
33, 35
Change
O
48
O
49
O
64
O
65
O
69
O
84
X
92
O
98, 99
O
Program
0 - 127
: True #
Change
O
System Exclusive
X
:
Song
Position
System
X
: Song Select
Common : Tune
X
X
System
: Clock
X
:
Commands
Real Time
X
: All Sounds Off
: Reset All Controllers O
X
Aux
: Local On/Off
O
Messages : All Notes Off
O
: Active Sense
X
: Reset
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Date: 12-Nov-2020
Version: 1.0
MIDI Implementation Chart
Recognized
*1
1 - 16
3
X
1
0 - 127
0 - 127
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0 - 99, 127
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
Remarks
*1: Upper = 1, Lower = 2, Pedal =
3 when MIDI “Basic” Template is
loaded.
Switched by MIDI In Mode.
*2: with oct. shift
Bank Select MSB, LSB
Modulation
Data Entry MSB, LSB
Volume
Pan
Expression
Drawbar Reg. Upper
Drawbar Reg. Lower
Drawbar Reg. Pedal
Spring Shock
TW Brake
Damper
Portamento Sw
Sustain
ProChord Active
Leslie Fast
NRPN LSB, MSB
(120)
(121)
O: Yes
X: No
MIDI CHANNELS AND MESSAGES
Note
Pitch Bend
Modulation
Volume, Pan
Expression
Damper
Portamento
Sustain
Drawbar Reg.
Spring Shock
TW Brake
ProChord Active
Leslie Fast
RPN
NRPN
All Notes Off
All Sounds Off
Reset All Ctrl.
After Touch
Bank Select
Program Change
(7, 10)
(11)
(64)
(65)
(69)
(48)
(49)
(84)
(92)
(100, 101)
(98, 99)
(123)
(120)
(121)
(0, 32)
External Zone
(Tx. only)
O
Upper
Keyboard
O
Lower
Keyboard
O
Pedal
Keyboard
O
Sections
(Rx. only)
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
X
O *1
O
O
O
12 - 20 (Upper)
21 - 29 (Lower)
33, 35 (Pedal)
O
O
O
O *2
X
O
O
O *2
O
X
Combination#
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
X
Change the voice
for each zone.
*1: For all Sections/Parts (audio controlled)
*2: For Rx. only.
199
O: Yes
X: No
Appendix
200
SPECIFICATIONS
Sound Engine
Piano / Ensemble Patch
ORGAN Section
MTWI (Modelled Tone Wheel I), Polyphony: 61 (Tone Wheel Organ)
PIANO/ENSEMBLE Section
Sampling Sound Engine, Polyphony: 128
MONO SYNTH Section
Analog Modeling Synthesizer, Monophonic
Factory: 100, User: 100, Bundle: 100
Custom Tone Wheel
Factory: 4 x 3, User: 4 x 3
Custom Pedal Registration
Factory: 3, User: 3
Keyboard
61 note, two-manual, with velocity, semi-weighted, square-front (“waterfall” type)
ORGAN Section
Parts
3 (Upper, Lower, Pedal)
Custom Pipe
Factory: 3, User: 3
Custom Cabinet
Factory: 8, User: 8
Storage
Internal Memory, USB Flash Drive
Drawbars
Upper: 9 pitches
Lower: 9 pitches
Pedal: 2 pitches
Voicing
Upper & Lower: 8(A-100, B-3, C-3, Mellow, Vx, Farf, Ace, Pipe)
Pedal: 3 (Normal, Muted, Pipe)
Percussion
Buttons: On, Volume Soft, Fast Decay, Third Harmonic
PIANO/ENSEMBLE Section
Component: 4, LFO: 2
MONO SYNTH Section
Display
320 x 240 pixel
Connections
MIDI
IN, OUT
USB
To Host
Audio
Line Out L, R, Headphones, Individual 1, 2, Rotary Out, Organ Pedal
Out, Aux In (with Volume control)
Leslie
11 - pin, 1 and 3 channels available
Oscillator
6 types (Duo, Unison, Pulse, Sync, FM, Noise)
Filter
4 types (LP12, LP24, HP12, HP24), Resonance, Drive
Modulator
LFO: 1, EG: 2 (Pitch &Filter, Amplitude)
Effects
ORGAN Section
Vibrato & Chorus, Multi Effect 1, Overdrive, Multi Effect 2, Matching
Transformer, Leslie, Equalizer & Tone Control
PIANO / ENSEMBLE Section
For each section: Multi Effect 1, Overdrive, Multi Effect 2, Equalizer
MONO SYNTH Section
Multi Effect 1, Overdrive, Multi Effect 2, Equalizer
Master
Equalizer, Reverb
Key Map
Internal Zone
Transpose, Octave, Pedal To Lower, Lower To Pedal, Allocate, Pedal Sustain
External Zones
3 Zones (assignable to each keyboard)
Controllers
Pitch Bend wheel, Modulation wheel, Portamento, Leslie (Bypass, Stop,
Fast)
Memory
Favorites
10 banks x 10 numbers (Combinations), 10 numbers (Pages)
Combination
Factory: 100, User: 100, Bundle: 100, Manual
Organ Patch
Factory: 100, User: 100, Bundle: 100
*#1
Factory: 300, User: 400
Mono Synth Patch
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
Others
Foot Switch 1/Leslie Switch, Foot Switch 2, Damper Pedal, Expression
Pedal
Dimensions
1002(W), 474(D), 183(H) mm
39.5˝(W), 18.7˝(D), 7.2˝(H)
Weight
18 kg
39.7 lbs
Accessory
AC Power Cord
201
INDEX
Index
F
A
Ace 43
AMPLITUDE 96, 104
AMPLITUDE EG 97, 104
App Menu 65
Audio 131
Auto Power Off 24
Aux In 19
N
Factory 25
Factory Settings 24
Farf 43
Favorites 25, 27, 71, 140
Filter 96, 103
FILTER EG 96
Foot Switch 28
FORMAT 163
Function Mode 68
O
Octave 54
Organ 80
ORGAN 30
Organ Pedal Out 18
ORGAN SOLO 54
ORGAN TYPES 36
OSCILLATOR 94, 103, 104
Oscillator Type 53
Overdrive 106, 111
G
GENERAL 82, 91, 101
Global 142
B
Back Up 24
Bank 27
BASIC 93
Bundle 58
Number 27
P
H
Page 68
Parameter 68
Part 25, 54
Patch 25
Patch Load 139
Pedal Sustain 55
Pedal To Lower 55
Percussion 85
PIANO 46
Pipe 44
Pitch Bend 28
PITCH BEND 82, 91
PITCH EG 95
PITCH & FILTER EG 104
Play Mode 63
Portamento 28
PORTAMENTO 91
PROCHORD 91
Harmonic Drawbars 38
I
C
Combination 25, 26
COMBINATION 74
Component 90, 93
Contact 84
Control 132
CONTROL 76
Copy 98
Cursor 68
Custom Leslie 124
Custom Pedal Reg. 123
Custom Pipe 126
Custom Tone Wheels 120
D
Damper Pedal 28
DAW 154
Default 144, 145
DELAY 95
DELETE 144, 168
Drawbar Registration 38
Drawbars. see also: Harmonic Drawbars
DRAWBARS 82
E
Ensemble 46
Envelope Generator 95, 104
Equalizer 116
EQUALIZER 116
Expression Pedal 28
External Zone Channels 153
External Zones 78
Icon 68
IMPEDANCE 84
Individual Out 19
Information 146
Initialize 74, 81, 98, 99, 100
Internal Zones 77
K
Keyboard Channels 153
Key Click 127
L
LESLIE 88
Leslie Speaker 17
Leslie Switch 21
LFO 92, 102
List Window 68
LOAD 167
Lock 72
LOUDNESS 82, 91
Q
Q 117
R
RECORD 58, 118, 128, 143
Reverb 56, 77
Rotary Out 18
M
Manual 29
Master Equalizer 56
Master Tune 57
Matching Transformer 87
Menu Mode 66
MIDI 150, 158
MIDI Sound Module 155
Modulation 28
MONO SYNTH 48
Multi Effects 106, 107, 112
Music Player 19
S
SAVE 166
Section 25, 54
Section Equalizer 116
sequencer 154
SETTING 75
Setup File 165
SOUND 130
sounding point 138
Stop 35, 44
Appendix
202 INDEX - continued
Stretch Tuning 94
SUSTAIN 84
T
Tone Wheel Organs 38
Transpose 57
U
Update 147
USB 150
USB Flash Drive 162
USB Mass Storage 164
User 25, 28
V
Value 68
Velocity 93
Vibrato & Chorus 86
Vx 42
*#1
SKX PRO Owner’s Manual
203
SERVICE
Hammond maintains a policy of continuously improving and upgrading its instruments and therefore reserves the
right to change specifications without notice. Although every attempt has been made to insure the accuracy of the
descriptive contents of this Manual, total accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
Should the owner require further assistance, inquiries should first be made to your Authorized Hammond Dealer.
If you still need further assistance, contact Hammond at the following addresses:
In European countries contact:
In the United States Contact:
HAMMOND SUZUKI USA, Inc. HAMMOND SUZUKI EUROPE B. V.
219 W. Wrightwood Ave.
Elmhurst, Illinois 60126
UNITED STATES
IR. D. S. Tuynmanweg 4a 4131 PN Vianen
THE NETHERLANDS
Tel: (630) 543-0277
Fax: (630) 543-0279
Web site: www.hammondorganco.com
E-mail: [email protected]
Tel: (+31) 347-370 594
Web site: www.hammond.eu
E-mail: [email protected]
Product Registration
Product Registration
http://hammondorganco.com/support/
online-product-registration/
http://www.hammond.eu/support/onlineproduct-registration/
For other countries:
SUZUKI CORPORATION
2-25-7, Ryoke, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Shizuoka Pref. 430-0852
JAPAN
Tel: (+81) 53-460-3781
Fax: (+81) 53-460-3783
E-mail: [email protected]
Technical materials are available and can be obtained by mailing a request to the appropriate address listed above
marked ATTENTION: SERVICE DEPARTMENT.
Manufacturer:
SUZUKI MUSICAL INSTRUMENT MFG. Co., Ltd.
2-25-7, Ryoke, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Shizuoka Pref. 430-0852
JAPAN
SUZUKI MUSICAL INST. MFG. CO., LTD. Hamamatsu, Japan
00457-40215 V1.10-20220902